We're always excited to share our knowledge when it comes to gardening, whether that be how to control pests and diseases out in the garden, or how to preserve your harvest in the kitchen. Sometimes we also just need to share our top 5 favorite products. We are passionate about gardening and dedicated to helping you grow your own food and have your best garden ever - how can you be successful without knowing some of the items that make us successful? Join us and let's grow together! Get Dirty!

SHEILA'S TOP 5 FAVORITE PRODUCTS

Complete Fermentation Kit

The Complete Fermentation Kit has everything you need to start fermenting your own vegetables today. Includes Pickle Packer Jar Tamper, Pickle Pipe Fermentation Lids, Pickle Pebble Fermentation Weights and Instructional Booklet. Fermented foods are a probiotic food source that’s rich in beneficial bacteria. When consumed, these beneficial bacteria can drastically improve the overall health of your digestive and immune systems. The Complete Fermentation Kit has all the necessary tools to begin fermenting your own food today. You can easily make your own sauerkraut, pickles and carrots from cabbage, cucumbers and other goodies from your garden.

Push Pull Hoe

The Push Pull Hoe is absolutely our favorite hand hoe! With its unique V-shaped design, this garden hoe allows you to weed more effectively and efficiently with a push-pull motion. The Push Pull Hoe has changed the game when it comes to hand weeding. Amish-crafted in Lititz, Pennsylvania, this hoe has quickly become our favorite hand hoe in the garden shed. The V-shaped head allows you to weed with a push-pull motion which is much quicker and more effective than repeatedly lifting and impacting the soil with a traditional hoe. The hardened steel blade is sharpened on both sides which allows you to cut weeds in both forward and backward directions.

Raised Bed Irrigation Kit

Our Raised Bed Irrigation Kit contains everything your need to water your raised bed gardens in the most effective and environmentally friendly way. Drip irrigation allows you to use less water while watering more effectively. This is because you are only placing water directly where your plants need it – at the roots. Because you’re not watering the leaves, disease pressure and pest pressure will be greatly reduced. This kit will support 8 (4 ft. by 8 ft.) raised beds with 4 feet between them.

Garden Fork

This is the best digging fork on the market! The heat-treated steel tines provide superior strength for maximum penetration into the soil with minimal effort. Use the Garden Fork to break ground and cultivate the soil for small garden areas and raised beds. Also works great for incorporating compost into existing garden soil. This tool is a must have for those who grow potatoes. Easily lift red potatoes and sweet potatoes out of the soil for harvest with this digging fork. The comfortable, D-shaped handle and shaft are made of aircraft-quality tubing. The lightweight yet sturdy tubing gives the tool an incredible weight distribution that allows you to do more with less effort.

Hoss Pruning Shears

Our Hoss Pruning Shears are simply the best! Perfect for trimming fruit trees, pruning vegetable and flower plants, and harvesting thick-stemmed vegetables like winter squash or pumpkins. Super-sharp blade with locking aluminum handles, a shock absorption system, and a sap groove to prevent the blade from sticking. Hoss Pruning Shears are the heavy-duty solution to pruning any vegetable plant or fruit tree around your garden or homestead. This Swiss-made design dates back to 1917 and has been a dependable solution for growers for decades. This is the only pair of pruners you will ever need!

GREG'S TOP 5 FAVORITE PRODUCTS

Single Wheel Hoe

The Hoss Single Wheel Hoe is the ultimate garden tool for growing food in your vegetable garden. Save time and energy by using a Wheel Hoe to cultivate and weed your garden.

View Details

Join us for a fun “Getting To Know Hoss” video! We thought we would switch it up this evening with something a little different. We are constantly told that many of you would love to know more about us, so here we go. On tonight’s Row By Row Show, we’re asking Hoss the tough questions and we’re getting to know him a little better! Some may have to do with gardening but others may not! We hope that you will enjoy this video as much as we enjoyed making it for you! We appreciate all of your constant support! Let’s Grow Together, Get To Know Hoss and Get Dirty!

GET TO KNOW HOSS - Part 1

If you were not an expert in gardening, what is one topic you wish you had more experience in?

Greg: I would have to say science, I love science. Maybe some type of biology, soil science has always been interesting to me. I wouldn't classify that as gardening but I would love to be a soil scientist.

If you could only plant one thing in the garden, what would it be?

Greg: That's a tough one right there, as much as I love tomato sandwiches, if I only had one thing to plant as a food source it would have to be corn.

What is your BIGGEST passion in life?

Greg: I think a person's passions change during the different time periods in their life. When you're younger you have different passions (in my opinion) than you do as an adult. I would have to say that my biggest passion write now would have to be is helping others.

What hobby have you always wanted to learn that you haven't been able to tackle?

Greg: Years ago I bought me a violin, I love music and I'm not musically inclined. Some people have such a talent but I did not get that gene. I can play two songs on the violin but it took many lesson and lots of practice. It would be nice to just be able to pick up an instrument and not have to take so much time to learn it.

What do you enjoy the most about doing the Row By Row Show?

Greg: I think the interaction and the feedback that we get back from everyone is so inspiring. It really lifts your spirits when we get emails, letters in the mail or comments that tell us how we've helped them in gardening and being successful at it. It means that we are doing something right.

GET TO KNOW HOSS - Part 2

What are your pet peeves?

Greg: I get really irritated with people who have a talent and they don't use it. Whether they are intellectual or they have a specific talent and they don't use it, that really bothers me a lot.

If you could have one superpower, what would it be?

Greg: I think it would be to turn back time.

If you could have dinner with anybody in the world across history, who would it be and why?

Greg: I know this may be a strange one but I think I would have to go with President Ronald Reagan in his prime. I think during his "prime time" it was probably some of the most interesting times for America. I would love to have a conversation with him about that, I think that he is one of the Presidents that I look back and admire more so than a lot of the others.

What is on your bucket list?

Greg: I feel like this has always been on my bucket list somewhat but more lately as I'm getting older but I want to travel more. We're traveling to the Keys this month, Holland for a seed convention later this year and next year we would love to go to Alaska!

If you had a warning label, what would it say?

Greg: I don't have a clue.

Sheila: Do you want me to tell you what it would say?

Greg: Yes

Sheila: I'm not listening.

Greg: Yea, I do have this gift that I can be looking at you when you're talking but when you get done talking I haven't heard a thing you just said. You may think I'm listening but my mind is actually somewhere else thinking of something completely different.

GET TO KNOW HOSS - Part 3

What gave you the inspiration to start Hoss Tools and how did it begin?

Greg: Well it began with the inspiration of us not being able to source quality garden tools.

View Details

We all know that spring gardens are everyone's favorite to have BUT if you haven't yet, you really should start planning your fall garden! So why exactly should you have a fall garden, let's discuss a few reasons. Less work, less hands on, less pest pressure, less weed pressure, it's cooler outside, and you need less water. Most big box stores do not have plants for fall gardening which is crazy to us because you can still gardening well into the fall and even the winter depending on where you are located, many of those people in warmer climates (like Florida) can almost garden year-round. So let's talk planning a fall garden.

What Vegetables Can Be Planted In The Fall?

We've got plenty of vegetable suggestions for you that are suited for the fall garden, with planting dates that run from late summer through fall itself. Here are just a few of Hoss favorites for fall growing! Arugula, beets, broccoli, brussels sprouts, cabbage, carrots, cauliflower, collards, garlic, kale, mustard greens, kohlrabi, lettuce, onions, peas, radishes, spinach, celery, cilantro, and swiss chard. You can also add in some cool season flowers such as, Calendula Prince Mix!

When Should I Plant Fall Vegetables? | Planning A Fall Garden

Obviously the best time for planting depends on the area where you live and what you plan to grow. The secret to fall vegetable gardening success is planning your harvest backwards. You will want to start with your frost date for the fall in your area. Then find out the number of days that you will need before you can harvest your fall vegetables. You can usually find that number on the back of the seed packet. Days to maturity. This will be different for direct seeds versus transplants.

How Should You Prepare For Your Fall Garden?

Prepare your garden for the fall by making room for all the new plants that you are about to harvest. Start by ripping out all of the plants that you have already harvested, as well as plants that are no longer performing well (like tomatoes that have succumbed to disease or peas that have been burned by the sun). At this time, you will always want to pull up any weeds from the beds so that they don't try to steal nutrients and moisture from your fall vegetables.

Tarps

Cover Crops

Get your spots ready for onions, garlic, and strawberries that you will overwinter.

Ya'll be sure to check out The Great Fall Garden Festival, it's a Meet & Greet gathering of Homesteads, farms, and artisans who connect with others through their YouTube Channel. It's FREE ADMISSION on September 9, 2023 from 9am-5pm in Jemison, Alabama. Check out the link here! This family friendly event will feature an educational speaker series, homemade and home grown fare at our participants booths, meet and greet, food truck vendors, and a harvest contest.

Product of the Week

Seed Starting Supplies

Premium Garden Seeds

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/J9KUpUD04qM

View Details

Many gardeners, especially beginners, don't necessarily always think about cover crops; summer cover crops are even more on the back burner, simply because many people do not typically "garden" in the cooler months therefore, they will plant a cover crop in the winter months to help improve your their soil. We're trying to change that outlook! So how do we choose a warm season cover crop? Should you just leave your garden plot empty? What does planting summer cover crops actually do? Let's talk about, grow together and get dirty!

Summer Cover Crops | What's The Point?

Pollinators! Summer Cover Crops are amazing for attracting beneficial pollinators. You need beneficial pollinators especially if you're growing vegetables near your cover crop plots. If you don't have pollinators, you won't have food! Choosing the right cover crop is extremely important, you will want to choose a "flowering" cover crop that provides nectar and pollen. You will want to allow it to bloom before terminating the cover crop. Many only think of honey bees (we're guilty of it too), but did you know that there are over 100,000 different animal species that provide free pollination services - including butterflies, moths, beetles, birds, etc. One third of human food comes from plants that are pollinated by wild pollinators.

What Should We Know For Summer Cover Crops?

What we should know really depends on what you're looking to accomplish, better yet, it's always better to know as much as you can on a topic. Do you want a cover crop that's tailored to your native pollinators or appeal to diversity of pollinators? Some are just looking for a honey production boost. Other benefits of habitat planting would be for providing shelter for other beneficial insects and songbirds, reducing runoff and soil erosion, or simply improving water quality. Some beneficial pollinators can travel great distances to forage for the nectar, while others cannot.

Product of the Week

WARM SEASON COVER CROPS

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/GDCLhKOjRAk

View Details

Why do we garden? Why do you garden? Since we've started Hoss, our mission has ALWAYS been "We Help You Grow Your Own Food" and that will never change. When we first started our Row By Row Garden Show we shared our Top 4 Reasons why we garden. Do you think they've changed since 2015? Let's find out the Top 4 reasons why Greg and Sheila like to grow their own food! Let's Grow Together!

Why We Garden | Top 4 Reasons - 2015

Back in 2015 on our Row By Row Show we shared our top 4 reasons of why we garden, first, it is to know what is in our food. Nice good, clean and healthy food straight to our table. Secondly, the taste straight from the garden is so much better than store bought; better quality and a lot more nutrients coming from your backyard grocery store. Third, passing your skills down to the next generation is SO important. You prevent the loss of certain gardening skills and you reinstall that skill set into the next generation and hopefully many generations to come. Last but definitely not least, self-satisfaction; we know we're not the only ones who get a HUGE sense of accomplishment when we harvest what we've grown from seed. It's a great feeling!

Greg's Top 4 Reasons | Why We Garden

2023

Greg's number one reason was to learn the skill-set! I've always been amazing at the skill set needed to grow a nice garden and grow their own food!

Self sufficiency is a huge thing for me, then and now! It may sound cliche but you never know when you're going to need it.

Enjoyment, I've always enjoyed being out in the garden. When you enjoy a hobby, you go at it with enjoyment. It's also my happy place, solitude is what I find in the garden.

Cleanliness of food, knowing what's on your food and in your food is VERY important to me. Knowing how they're harvested is a good thing to know as well.

Sheila's Top 4 Reasons | Why We Garden

2023

Taste of fresh vegetables, the flavor. I know what the input is. I know that it is going to taste good, unlike the taste from grocery store. If you know you know. Unless you have that homegrown tomato picked from your garden, ripen by the sunshine, picked in the heat of summer and tasted the concentrated sugars, you have never eaten a true tomato.

Garden Community. It is fun to share knowledge, successes, failures. Comradery around the love of the garden. A hobby that is entertaining, growing, enriching and very rewarding.

Positive effects on our physical, mental and social well-being. Increase levels of physical activity through planting, watering, walking, maintaining. Gardening can help keep you mentally active, always providing opportunities to gain new knowledge. Gardening can reduce depression and stress. Increase feelings of hope and achievement. “I grew this”.

Food Security, Covid changed this experience. Supply chain issues, Food cost. Gardening is a process. You can't wait till an emergency to start. You need to start now to be prepared for an emergency. When you can afford to make mistakes and have time to learn. Just start something. Then learn how to preserve it to enjoy all year long. Then learn how to preserve it to enjoy all year long.

Product of the Week

PREMIUM GARDEN SEEDS

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/3jZKk6PFO3M

View Details

Preserving food not only extends its shelf life but also allows us to enjoy seasonal flavors straight form the garden throughout the year. Some of the oldest methods of preservation are drying, refrigeration, and fermentation. More of the modern techniques include canning, freezing, dehydrating, and freeze drying. The goal is to prevent food spoilage from bacteria, yeast, and mold. We aim to empower you with the knowledge you need to grow your own food and how to preserve your harvest. An important note to remember is that improperly packages frozen foods lose small amounts of moisture during storage, resulting in surface dehydration (commonly called freezer burn).

Food Preservation

Essential Techniques and Tips : Freezing

You can freeze "almost" any food, frozen foods remain safe indefinitely. Two of our favorite vegetables to grow are corn and peas. Freezing preserves food for extended periods because it prevents the growth of microorganisms that cause both food spoilage and food-borne illness. Freezing to 0 °F inactivates any microbes — bacteria, yeasts and molds — present in food. Once thawed, however, these microbes can again become active, multiplying under the right conditions to levels that can lead to foodborne illness. Since they will then grow at about the same rate as microorganisms on fresh food, you must handle thawed items as you would any perishable food

Most vegetables that freeze well are low acid and require brief, partial cooking to prevent deterioration. This is called "blanching." For successful freezing, blanch or partially cook vegetables in boiling water or in a microwave oven. Then rapidly chill the vegetables prior to freezing and storage. Blanching also inactivates enzymes that cause deterioration of foods during frozen storage. Blanching is carried out at temperatures close to 100 °C (212 °F) for two to five minutes in either a water bath or a steam chamber.

Essential Techniques and Tips : Canning

Canning is a food preservation technique that involves sealing food in airtight containers, typically glass jars, to create a sterile environment that prevents the growth of bacteria, yeasts, and molds. Some of our favorties to can are tomatoes, green beans, potatoes, broth, and soups. The process typically involves placing prepared food into jars, sealing them with lids, and subjecting them to heat treatment. This heat treatment, often achieved through boiling or pressure canning, destroys microorganisms and enzymes that could cause spoilage, ensuring the long-term preservation of the food.

Water bath or Pressure Can?

Depends on the acidity of the food. Low-acid foods are not acidic enough to prevent the growth of bacteria. Low acidic foods have pH values above 4.6. Acidic foods have pH of 4.6 or lower. You can acidify by adding lemon juice or citric acid. All low-acid foods should be sterilized at temperatures of 240° to 250°F, attainable with pressure canners. Begin with good-quality fresh foods. Discard any diseased and moldy food. Trim off any bad spots.

Hot packing, raw packing

Hot-packing is the practice of heating freshly prepared food to boiling, simmering it 2 to 5 minutes, and promptly filling jars loosely with the boiled food.Raw-packing is the practice of filling jars tightly with freshly prepared, but unheated food.

Essential Techniques and Tips : Dehydration

Dehydrating, also known as drying, is a food preservation method that involves removing the moisture from food to inhibit the growth of bacteria, yeast, and molds, thus extending its shelf life. It is accomplished by circulating warm air around the food, either through natural air drying or using specialized dehydrators. During the dehydration process, moisture is evaporated from the food, reducing its water content to a level where microorganisms cannot thrive. This preservation technique is commonly used for fruits, vegetables, herbs, meat, and even dairy products.

View Details

Over the last several days we have been getting hammered with bad storms and downpours of rain over several hours at a time. A break, maybe we've had a day of no rain in the last couple weeks but that's about it. So, can you garden in the rain? What does all of this rain do to your vegetables? You would think that rain is good for your garden, right? BUT TOO MUCH rain isn't good, it can cause all sorts of problems. The BEST solution is PREPARATION!

What problems do excessive amounts of rain cause? Does it ruin the foliage? What about roots? If you're in the South, you know that hurricane season is upon us! Let's grow together and get dirty!

Can Your Garden In The Rain?

Preparation Is Key!

Here are several tips that we hope will help you be prepared:

Make sure your plants are tied up/supported. Check trellis, reinforce if necessary.

Harvest as much as you can prior to the rain/storms.

Stop watering ahead of the rain!

Observe how your garden drains and identify problems areas.

Remove/Prune off bad leaves as soon as possible

Increase fungal issues from plants being damp for too long. Stay on top of rust.

Root erosion, add soil back around exposed roots.

Increase in snails and slugs.

Increase in weeds. Perfect time to pull is after the rain and soil is soft.

Rain will wash nutrients away. May need to fertilize more often.

Hail damage, cover tender plants if possible.

Mulch, too much can keep soil wet to long and be breeding ground.

Plants in containers will typically suffer more. Keep emptied and move to covered area if possible.

Protect young seedlings with buckets/pots.

Product of the Week

FERTILIZERS

PREMIUM GARDEN SEEDS

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/-6kc8145ZZc

View Details

It’s all about the King Of The Garden tonight, TOMATOES! The winners and losers (in our opinion)! Time for the Tomato Tasting Review 2023! We’ve been harvesting lots of fruit already from the garden, some of which were “trials” for us and it sure has been interesting to say the least. From beefsteaks, slicers, to cherry tomatoes, we’re reviewing them all! Let’s Grow Together! Tell us, what’s your favorite variety you’ve grown! Be sure to check out our Tomato Growing Guide for lots of helpful tomato growing tips and tricks! Be sure to watch the video for the full review!

These are just a few examples of the many types of tomatoes available. Each variety has its own taste, texture, and culinary uses, so you can choose based on your preferences of growing habits and how you want to use them! Of course, one thing you should always remember is how much room you have in the garden for growth, this is important. Each of the different types of tomatoes below have different growth habits.

Tomato Review - The Different Types of Tomatoes

Beefsteak Tomatoes

Known for their large size and meaty texture, beefsteak tomatoes are commonly used for sandwiches and slicing. They come in various colors, including red, pink, yellow, and even striped varieties.

Heirloom Tomatoes

Heirloom tomatoes are open-pollinated varieties that have been passed down through generations. They come in various colors, shapes, and sizes and are known for their unique flavors and vibrant appearances.

Roma Tomatoes

They are popular for making sauces, pastes, and canning due to their low moisture content.

Cherry Tomatoes

Small and round, cherry tomatoes are bite-sized and often used in salads or as a snack. They are available in different colors like red, yellow, and even black.

Growth Habits - Tomato Tasting Review 2023

Determinate Tomatoes

Determinate tomatoes are often referred to as bush tomatoes. They have a compact growth habit and tend to reach a predetermined height, usually around 2 to 4 feet (60 to 120 centimeters). These tomatoes typically stop growing when fruit sets on the terminal bud, and they tend to produce a large crop of fruit over a relatively short period. Determinate tomatoes are suitable for container gardening or small garden spaces.

Indeterminate Tomatoes

Indeterminate tomatoes have a vining or sprawling growth habit. They continue to grow and produce fruit throughout the growing season until frost or other unfavorable conditions. Indeterminate tomatoes can grow quite tall, often reaching 6 to 12 feet (180 to 360 centimeters) or even more under ideal conditions. They require support, such as stakes, cages, or trellises, to keep the plants upright and ensure proper air circulation.

Semi-determinate Tomatoes

Semi-determinate tomatoes exhibit characteristics of both determinate and indeterminate types. They are more compact than indeterminate varieties, but they continue to grow and produce fruit for a longer period compared to determinate tomatoes. Semi-determinate tomatoes often benefit from some support but may not require as much as indeterminate varieties.

It's important to note that these growth habits are general guidelines, and there can be variations within each tomato variety. Additionally, some heirloom varieties may have unique growth patterns that differ from the typical determinate or indeterminate habits. When selecting tomato varieties, it's always a good idea to refer to specific plant information online and recommended growing conditions.

Product of the Week

TOMATOES

FERTILIZERS

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/-6kc8145ZZc

View Details

It's June and boy, is it getting hot in Georgia! The garden is in full-force and we are harvesting every day. The temptation to just harvest and cruise on through summer is also in full-force. Do not just let the garden go, there is still plenty of time to continue plantings. After you harvest your potatoes and garlic, have something prepare to go into these plots. Find out your first average frost date for the Fall, find days to maturity, subtract to see if you have time to plant/grow. If it will take longer than the days you have, it's not worth risking. Be sure to add a week or so for harvesting to be safe. Let's discuss your June Garden To-Do List, grow together, and Get Dirty!

Succession Planting - June Garden To-Do List

Succession planting is a gardening technique that allows you to maximize your harvest and enjoy a continuous supply of fresh produce throughout the growing season. By carefully planning and timing your plantings, you can fill the gaps left by harvested crops with new ones, ensuring that your garden remains productive. Whether you have a small backyard plot or a large vegetable garden, succession planting is a smart and efficient way to make the most of your space and extend the bounty of your harvest.

Not only does it provide a constant supply of delicious vegetables and herbs, but it also helps prevent weeds from taking over and optimizes the use of resources such as water and fertilizer. Embracing succession planting can truly transform your garden into a year-round source of abundance and culinary delight. Here in USDA Zone 8, we still have time to plant okra, beans, and cucumbers.

Warm Season Cover Crops

Planting and growing warm season cover crops can significantly benefit your garden and soil health. These cover crops, such as buckwheat, cowpeas, or sorghum-sudangrass, thrive in the heat of summer and offer numerous advantages. Firstly, they provide excellent weed suppression, smothering unwanted plants and reducing competition for resources. Additionally, warm season cover crops enhance soil fertility by fixing nitrogen, enriching the soil with this essential nutrient for future crops. They also improve soil structure and moisture retention, preventing erosion and enhancing the soil's ability to hold water during hot and dry periods. Planting warm season cover crops not only boosts your garden's productivity but also helps maintain its overall health and resilience, making it a valuable addition to any gardener's summer planting strategy.

Herbs!

Growing herbs like dill, basil, parsley, and oregano in your garden is a delightful and rewarding experience. These versatile herbs not only add incredible flavors to your culinary creations but also offer numerous health benefits. Dill, with its feathery leaves and distinct taste, is perfect for seasoning fish dishes and pickles. Basil, available in a variety of flavors, brings a burst of freshness to salads, pastas, and sauces. Parsley, both curly and flat-leaf varieties, is a must-have for its bright flavor and as a garnish. Oregano, with its robust and earthy taste, is a key ingredient in Mediterranean and Italian cuisine. Growing these herbs is relatively easy, and they thrive in containers or in the garden. They require well-drained soil, ample sunlight, and regular watering. Harvesting the leaves regularly not only encourages growth but also ensures a steady supply of aromatic and flavorful herbs for all your culinary adventures.

Product of the Week

Herbs

Zinnias

Warm Season Cover Crops

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/8zOCXZS9xvk

View Details

It’s NEVER fun when diseases attack the garden! We’re talking all about controlling spring garden pathogens, like the disease causing microorganisms like fungi, bacteria, and viruses. Below is our list of organic and non-organic controls. The MOST important thing to remember is prevention, prevention is key but we like to give you the helpful tips & tricks that can combat these diseases if they strike! Join us and let’s grow together!

Controlling Spring Garden Diseases: SUMMER & WINTER SQUASHLiquid cop – Downy Mildew, Powdery Mildew, Anthracnose, Alternaria Leaf Spot
Garden Phos –, Downy Mildew, Powdery Mildew; Anthracnose, Alternaria Leaf Blight

Fungi Max – Powdery Mildew
Vegetable, Flower, Fruit and Ornamental Fungicide – Downy Mildew, Powdery Mildew; Anthracnose, Alternaria Leaf Blight, Cercospora Leaf Spot

POTATOESOrganic ControlsCrop rotation and using certified – Bacterial wilt
Crop rotation and don’t overwater – Common scab, late blight, bacterial wilt

Non-Organic Controls
Liquid cop – early blight, late blight
Garden Phos – early blight, late blight

CORNNon-Organic Controls
Fungi Max – common rust, grey leaf spot, blight

Organic Controls
Complete Disease Control – common rust, grey leaf spot, blight

TOMATOESCrop rotation and select resistant varieties – Fusarium Wilt, bacterial wilt, Tomato Mosaic virus, early blight and late blight
Complete Disease Control (Drench)- early blight

Fungi max – Bacterial wilt
Liquid cop – early blight, late blight, bacterial spot
Garden Phos – late blight, bacterial spot
Vegetable, flower, fruit and ornamental fungicide – early blight, late blight

WATERMELONSNon-Organic Controls
Liquid cop – downy mildew
Garden Phos – downey mildew, anthracnose, gummy stem blight, damping off (seed treatment)
Complete Disease Control – anthracnose
Vegetable, Flower, Fruit & Ornamental Fungicide – downey mildew, gummy stem blight, anthracnose

FOR MORE DISEASE CONTROL SUGGESTIONS, MAKE SURE YOU CHECK OUT THE VIDEO!! Product of the Week Disease Control

Turmeric

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:https://youtu.be/4r4a2G_9rOA

View Details

It’s NEVER fun when those pests attack the garden! We’re talking all about controlling spring garden pests, the larger organisms like insects and mites (although some of these aren’t very big at all) and pathogens, like the disease causing microorganisms like fungi, bacteria, and viruses in a two part series. The MOST important thing to remember is prevention, prevention is key! Join us and let’s grow together!

Controlling Spring Garden Pests: BrassicasControlling spring garden pests in brassicas is crucial for maintaining the health and productivity of your plants. Start by implementing preventive measures such as crop rotation and companion planting to deter pests. Regularly inspect your brassicas for signs of infestation, such as chewed leaves or egg clusters, and promptly remove any affected plants or pests. Utilize pest control methods such as neem oil or insecticidal soaps to target specific pests while minimizing harm to beneficial insects. By staying vigilant and taking proactive steps, you can effectively manage pests in your spring garden and protect your brassicas.

Organic ControlsGarden Insect Spray– Thrips, Horn Worms, Cabbage Looper
Horticulture Oil– Aphids, Flea Beetle, Whiteflies
Bug Buster-O– Aphids, Flea Beetle, Whiteflies
Monterey BT– Hornworms, Cabbage Looper
Take Down Garden Spray– Aphids, Horn Worms, Flea Beetle, Whiteflies
Diatomaceous Earth– Cutworms
Neem Oil– Whiteflies, Aphids

Non-organic ControlsBug buster II– Aphids, Horn Worms, Flea Beetle, Whiteflies, Cabbage Looper

Controlling Spring Garden Pests: Summer SquashOne effective method is to regularly monitor your plants for signs of pest infestation, such as chewed leaves or wilting. Handpick any visible pests, such as squash bugs or cucumber beetles, and promptly remove them from your garden. Applying insecticides can help control pests while minimizing harm to beneficial insects.

Garden Insect Spray – Thrips, Pickleworms, leaf miners, Armyworms, mealy bugs
Horticultural Oil – Aphids, Squash bugs (Nymphs), Flea Beetle, Whiteflies, Spider Mites, Beetle larvae, leaf miners
Bug Buster-O – Aphids, Flea Beetle, Whiteflies, Cucumber beetles, Thrips, Mites, Armyworms
Monterey BT – Armyworms, pickleworms
Take Down Garden Spray– Aphids, Army Worms, Flea Beetle, Whiteflies, Mites, Squash bugs(Nymphs)Vine borer ( Nymphs)
Diatomaceous Earth– Cutworms

Non-Organic Controls
Bug buster ll– Aphids, , Squash Bugs, Flea Beetle, Whiteflies, Spider Mites, Thrips, leaf Miner, Vine borer, Cucumber beetle, Armyworm

Controlling Spring Garden Pests: Sweet PotatoesSome of the worst pests that can take over your sweet potato plants are flea beetles, Colorado potato beetles, Leaf Hoppers, and/or potato tuber moths. Here are organic and non-organic controls.

Garden Insect Spray – Thrips, Hornworm, Armyworms
Horticulture Oil– Aphids, Stinkbugs, Flea Beetle, Whiteflies, Spider Mites
Bug Buster-O – Aphids, Flea Beetle, Whiteflies
Take Down Garden Spray – Aphids, Flea Beetle, Whiteflies
Diatomaceous Earth – Cutworms

Non-Organic ControlsBug buster ll – Aphids, Wireworms, Stinkbugs, Flea Beetle, Whiteflies, Grubs, Thrips, Armyworms

FOR MORE TIPS AND TRICKS, VISIT THE LINK! Product of the WeekPest and Disease Control

Turmeric

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:https://youtu.be/FAl0iL9Erpo

View Details

SWEET POTATO TIME !! One of our favorite things and easiest vegetables to grow in the garden and even in Mama Hoss’ raised beds is sweet potatoes. We’re discussing everything you need to know to have a great harvest this season, soil preparation, planting techniques, watering and fertilization needs, and much more! Let’s grow together and get dirty!

What are Sweet Potatoes?Sweet potato loves heat, and are great to fill that spot during summer heat. Sweet potatoes are a root vegetable that is packed with nutrition. They usually have a long, tapered shape and can range in size from small to large. They are a good source of dietary fiber, vitamin A, vitamin C, and many other vitamins and minerals. Sweet potatoes tend to be much more nutrient–dense than regular potatoes. They are a staple food in many countries and are used in a variety of dishes, including baked goods, casseroles, and soups. Sweet potatoes are a great vegetable to grow in the garden, as they are hardy, easy to grow, and have a long harvest season. Sweet potatoes are also a great choice for gardeners because they are relatively pest and disease-resistant, and can be stored for a long time. Additionally, sweet potatoes can be grown in a variety of climates, even in cooler regions.

Leaves are EdibleSweet potato greens are the leafy green tops of the sweet potato plant, which are edible and commonly consumed in many parts of the world. They are rich in nutrients, including vitamins A, C, and K, as well as iron, calcium, and antioxidants. Sweet potato greens can be prepared in various ways, such as sautéing, stir-frying, steaming, or boiling. They have a slightly sweet and earthy flavor, similar to spinach or other leafy greens. They can be used in salads, soups, stews, or as a side dish. When choosing sweet potato greens, look for young, tender leaves that are bright green and not wilted. Wash them thoroughly before cooking and remove any tough stems.

Varieties Recommended by HossBeauregard: Highest yielding, most forgiving on fertility and watering

Covington: longer storage time, disease resistance, good size, sweeter than Beauregard

Georgia Jets: extremely fast growing, cold tolerant,

Murasaki: sweet nutty flavor great for roasting

How to start Growing Sweet Potato? Plant on the last day to order online. To grow sweet potatoes, you’ll need well-drained soil and a warm, sunny spot. Start by planting sweet potato slips in the spring after the last frost date. Plant slips outdoors 3 to 4 weeks after your last spring frost or once the soil has warmed to at least 65°F (18°C). Nighttime temperatures should be at least 55°F (13°C). The trick is to plant them early enough for them to have time to mature fully, but not so early that they get killed by a late spring frost. Bury each slip about a foot deep, with the top leaves sticking out of the soil.

MulchingMulching sweet potatoes is an important part of growing a successful crop. Mulch helps retain soil moisture, suppresses weeds, moderates soil temperature, and prevents the spread of diseases. Use a 2 to 3 inch layer of organic mulch, such as straw, dry grass clippings, shredded leaves, or wood chips, around the base of the sweet potato plants. Keep the mulch a few inches away from the stems to prevent rot. Reapply mulch as needed throughout the growing season.

Soil Requirements to Grow Sweet Potato• Well-draining, high phosphorous soil• pH between 6.0 to 6.5• Rich in organic materials• Good quality compost added to the soil

Sweet Potato Irrigation RequirementsSweet Potato plants need at least 1 inch of water per week. Using drip irrigation is always recommended to be sure that your plants are getting moisture directly to their root system. If you’re using conventional overhead watering techniques, try and use something like the Dramm Watering Can and water and fertilize at the base of the plant to keep moisture off the leaves.

Raised Bed Fertilizer ScheduleSeveral Weeks Before Planting
Test your soil at your local extension office.
1 Week Before Planting
After adjusting soil pH to 6.0 – 6.5, mix 1 1/2 cups per 10 ft. of row of Hoss Complete Organic Fertilizer with your soil.
2 Weeks After Planting
Side dress 2 cups of Hoss Complete Organic Fertilizer per 10 ft. of row.
Every 14 Days (After 1 Week Planting)
Mix 1 tablet each of Dr. Joe Nutri Bubble -AND- Dr. Joe Tomato & Vegetable Bubble into 1 gallon of water. Apply as a drench per 4 plants

In-Ground Fertilizer ScheduleSeveral Weeks Before Planting
Test your soil at your local extension office.
1 Week Before Planting
After adjusting soil pH to 6.0 – 6.5, mix 1 1/2 cups per 10 ft. of row of Hoss Complete Organic Fertilizer with your soil.
2 Weeks After Planting
Using the Hoss Fertilizer Injector, Mix 1 cup of Hoss Premium 20-20-20 Fertilizer -AND -1-2 cups of Hoss Micro-Boost Micronutrient Supplement per 20 ft. of row.
Alternate Every 14-21 Days
Mix 1 cup of Hoss Premium Calcium Nitrate -AND -1-2 cups of Hoss Micro-Boost Micronutrient Supplement per 20 ft. of row.

HarvestingHarvest the sweet potatoes when the vines begin to yellow and die back, usually in late summer or early fall. Carefully dig around the roots and gently remove the sweet potatoes from the soil. Allow them to cure in the sun for a few days before storing. To harvest sweet potatoes, wait until the foliage begins to yellow and die back, usually in late summer or early fall. Carefully dig around the roots with a garden fork or spade. Gently lift the sweet potatoes from the soil, being careful not to damage them. Brush off any excess soil and let the sweet potatoes cure in a warm, dry place for a few days to allow the skin to harden. This will improve their storage potential. Do NOT wash.

StoringTo store sweet potatoes, keep them in a cool, dry place with good air circulation, such as a pantry or root cellar. Avoid exposing them to temperatures below 55°F, as this can cause them to develop a sweet, woody flavor. Do not wash the sweet potatoes before storing, as moisture can encourage spoilage. Instead, simply brush off any excess soil and place them in a single layer in a paper or mesh bag. Sweet potatoes can be stored for several months in these conditions. To extend their shelf life, inspect them regularly and remove any that show signs of spoilage, such as soft spots or mold.

Products:SWEET POTATOES

Watch the Full Video on Youtube:https://youtu.be/Wkwq99N92Kw

View Details

May has to be one of our busiest months in the garden and if you’re in the warmer growing zones, it is probably the same for you. Harvesting has started and we are already reaping the benefits of growing our own food. It is also one of the toughest on pests, tonight we’re discussing everything you need to stay on top of this month in your garden. Fertilization, pest control, succession planting, and much more is on the agenda tonight! Let’s grow together and get dirty!

What Should You Do in May?* Know your garden zone. * Stay on top of pests! * Stay on top of fertilization. * Stay on top of weed pressure. * Think about sccession planting. * Have watering systems in place. * Have flowers for pollinating insects.

Zones 9 & 10Weather is very warm, and everything should be planted and growing by now. Start planning your succession planting schedule if you haven’t already.

May is an ideal month for those across the U.S. to plant all your favorite annual and perennial herbs.

Direct sow herbs: dill, cilantro, chervil, fennel, & parsley
Take cuttings, 3 to 4 inches long, of marjoram, rosemary, sage, & thyme from last year’s growth to propagate new plants.
Divide and replant mint & thyme that has overgrown pots or has become straggly in the garden.
Set out basil seedlings when the danger of frost has passed. Set seedlings 12-15 inches apart and water well in the early stages until the plants are established.

Zones 7 & 8It is quite warm here in May. Harvest your garlic and onions, and harvest your potatoes at the end of May.

Sweet Potatoes (when soil temp reaches 70°F). They are best planted at least 4 weeks after the last frost date has passed. Some varieties need as much as 4 months of temperatures over 75°F. The hotter the weather and climate is, the better they grow.
Melons
Corn (if the corn is long-season, mid to late May is the last chance to plant these from seed to have them ready for harvesting before the last frost)
Beans
Cucumbers (The ideal temperature for seed germination for cucumbers is over 60°F.
Eggplant
Tomatoes (nightshade- invest in trellis, cages, and/or Florida weave)
Peppers (nightshade)

Zones 5 & 6If your weather is mild, you can get away with still planting a few cool season crops.

Tomatoes
Peppers
Eggplant
Melons
Squash (Summer & Winter)
Cucumbers
Potatoes
Beans
Herbs
Okra
Sweet Potatoes
Corn (10 days before your last threat of frost). Seeds take about 10 days to germinate so they will be protected in the soul from the frost. Soil needs to be above 55°F.
Flowers (marigolds, zinnias, sunflowers, nasturtium)

Zones 3 & 4Cool season crops can be started outdoors 4-6 weeks before the last frost.

Broccoli
Brussels Sprouts
Cabbage
Carrots
Cauliflower

Warm season crops can be started indoors 6-8 weeks before the last frost.

Tomatoes
Peppers
Kale
Lettuce
Onions
Peas
Beets
Spinach
Cucumbers (end of May)
Winter squash (end of May)
Beans (pole and bush)
Corn (when soil is above 55°F).

Products:TURMERIC

FERTILIZER

DISEASE AND PEST CONTROL

Watch the Full Video on Youtube:https://youtu.be/Yi5nyT0nIkA

View Details

Hey Neighbor! We’ve got a great show tonight, Peiter from Seminis is back! We’re talking all things indeterminate tomatoes – debunking tomato growing myths, how to treat them, pruning tomatoes and so much more! Seminis is a HUGE player in the indeterminate seed breeder for the home gardener. Let’s grow together and get dirty, ya’ll!

The Difference Between Determinate & Indeterminate TomatoesDeterminate tomatoes grow their tomatoes all at once and grow in a “bush”, while indeterminate tomatoes grow fruit throughout the season and grow through vining.

Indeterminate TomatoesBetter Boy TomatoBetter Boy Tomato is one of the most-popular tomato varieties grown across the country, and for good reason! This hybrid, indeterminate tomato variety produces heavy yields of bright red tomatoes that can weigh up to 1 lb each. Better Boy is widely adapted and performs well across the country in any growing zone. It is also resistant to nematodes, making it a great option for home gardeners and small-scale farmers. Solanum lycopersicum. 75 days to maturity.

Better Boy Tomato is the perfect slicing tomato variety. Plants produce a significant amount of foliage that protect the fruits from sun scald damage. Fruits are extra-large and have that perfect tangy and acidic tomato flavor. In addition to slicing, this is also a great variety for canning and preserving.

Tomatoes are in the nightshade family along with peppers and eggplant. Plants in the nightshade family are susceptible to blossom end rot, which is a result of a calcium deficiency. To prevent or alleviate this problem, apply pelleted gypsum at the base of the plant at bloom set. Tomatoes do best when transplanted, as the germination time can be longer than most vegetable seed. They grow very well in our heavy-duty seed starting trays. Plants should be started 4-6 weeks before the intended outdoor planting date.

If conditions outside are favorable, transplants may be planted directly from our 162 cell trays. If conditions are still too cold for planting tomatoes, transplants may be “stepped-up” to 4″ pots to allow more room to grow. Tomatoes can produce heavy fruits and will require some form of support to keep the plant upright. This ensures that plants and fruits stay off the ground, reducing the possibility of disease and keeping fruits clean.

Better Boy Tomato Planting InformationPlanting Method: transplant

When to Plant: after last frost

Planting Depth: 1/4″

Seed Spacing: 2′

Row Spacing: 3-4′

Days to Maturity:75

Disease Resistance:Verticillium Wilt, Fusarium Wilt, Root Knot Nematodes

Big Beef TomatoBig Beef Tomato is a hybrid, indeterminate tomato variety that produces large, beefsteak tomatoes. This variety is considered the gold standard for big, fresh market tomatoes in many areas of the country. Big Beef has an excellent disease-resistance package that includes resistance to root knot nematodes and tobacco mosaic virus. Solanum lycopersicum. 75 days to maturity. TREATED.

Big Beef Tomato is an All America Selections winner for its plant vigor, consistent fruit size and excellent flavor. Indeterminate plants produce fruits that average 12 to 16 ounces. Compared to other indeterminate varieties, the fruits ripen early on vigorous vines. This variety is also known to continue to set fruit in cooler conditions, producing delicious tomatoes until the first frost in many regions.

Big Beef Tomato Planting InformationPlanting Method: transplant

When to Plant: after last frost

Planting Depth: 1/4″

Seed Spacing: 2′

Row Spacing: 3-4′

Days to Maturity:75

Disease Resistance:Verticillium Wilt, Fusarium Wilt, Root Knot Nematode, Alternaria Stem Canker, Gray Leaf Spot, Tobacco Mosaic Virus

Purple Boy TomatoPurple Boy Tomato is a hybrid, indeterminate variety that offers exceptional flavor coupled with disease-resistance to perform in the harshest conditions. It offers the great heirloom tang that you’ve come to expect from varieties like Cherokee Purple, but with more plant vigor so that it can be grown later into the warmer months. Solanum lycopersicum. 80 days to maturity.

Purple Boy Tomato produces tomatoes with a deep purple color inside and out. Unlike its heirloom counterparts, fruits will be more uniform and symmetrically-shaped, making them easier to slice and prepare for that delicious tomato sandwich. It is resistant to Tobacco Mosaic Virus and Root Knot Nematodes, making it widely-adapted for a wide range of growing conditions.

Purple Boy Tomato Planting InformationPlanting Method: transplant

When to Plant: after last frost

Planting Depth: 1/4″

Seed Spacing: 2′

Row Spacing: 3-4′

Days to Maturity:80

Disease Resistance:Root Knot Nematodes, Tobacco Mosaic Virus, Verticillium Wilt, Fusarium Wilt

Lemon Boy TomatoLemon Boy Tomato is a hybrid, indeterminate tomato variety that produces bright yellow fruits with the perfect balance of sweet and tangy flavors. This variety is the yellow version of the popular Better Boy tomato variety. It has an excellent disease-resistance package including resistance to gray leaf spot and nematodes. Solanum lycopersicum. 75 days to maturity.

Unlike other gold tomato varieties, Lemon Boy Tomato has a bright yellow color like a lemon. It also is higher yielding than comparable gold tomato varieties. The eye-catching fruits average 6-8 ounces each and provide brilliant color to any salad or vegetable medley.

Lemon Boy Tomato Planting InformationPlanting Method:transplant

When to Plant:after last frost

Planting Depth:1/4″

Seed Spacing:2′

Row Spacing:3-4′

Days to Maturity:75

Disease Resistance:Verticillium Wilt, Fusarium Wilt, Root Knot Nematode, Alternaria Stem Canker, Gray Leaf Spot

Pink Delicious Tomato Pink Delicious gets its name honestly, it’s as pink in color, as it is delicious in flavor! An early maturing, indeterminate tomato that has an heirloom look and flavor, Pink Delicious is a hybrid with an excellent disease-resistance package. We tried this in our trial garden in 2022, it produced well under high disease pressure. This variety stands on its own compared to similar varieties, being a 2022 AAS Regional Winner for great flavor, texture, and for an “heirloom” looking tomato but with all the benefits of a hybrid. Pink Delicious has a high Brix for a sweeter-than-normal pink tomato. Great for home and market gardeners alike, perfect for slicing with an average weight of 1/2 – 1 pound. Well-suited for different growing zones, trailed in Georgia and Ohio, both zones outperformed expectations. If you want to grow an heirloom-type tomato and have failed in the past, this is the one you will be successful with. Solanum lycopersicum.84 days to maturity

Tomatoes are in the nightshade family along with peppers and eggplant. Plants in the nightshade family are susceptible to blossom end rot, which is a result of a calcium deficiency. To prevent or alleviate this problem, apply pelleted gypsum at the base of the plant at the bloom set. Tomatoes do best when transplanted, as the germination time can be longer than most vegetable seeds. They grow very well in our heavy-duty seed-starting trays. Plants should be started 4-6 weeks before the intended outdoor planting date.

If conditions outside are favorable, transplants may be planted directly from our 162-cell trays. If conditions are still too cold for planting tomatoes, transplants may be “stepped-up” to 4″ pots to allow more room to grow. Tomatoes can produce heavy fruits and will require some form of support to keep the plant upright. This ensures that plants and fruits stay off the ground, reducing the possibility of disease and keeping fruits clean.

Pink Delicious Tomato Planting InformationPlanting Method: transplant

When to Plant: after last frost

Planting Depth: 1/4″

Seed Spacing: 2′

Row Spacing: 3-4′

Days to Maturity:84

Disease Resistance: Gray Leaf Spot, Tomato Mosaic Virus, Verticillium Wilt

Pink Girl TomatoPink Girl Tomato is a hybrid, indeterminate tomato variety that produces beautiful, pink-colored fruits. Because it has an indeterminate growth habit, it will produce throughout the entire warm growing season in moderate climates. Pink Girl has a solid disease-resistance package including resistance to gray leaf spot. Solanum lycopersicum. 75 days to maturity.

Pink Girl Tomato has vigorous vines that produce pink fruits averaging 8 ounces each. Fruits are resistant to cracking and absolutely beautiful when allowed to reach full ripeness on the vine. Because the fruits are pink, they have a lower acidity than traditional red tomato varieties.

Pink Girl Tomato Planting InformationPlanting Method: transplant

When to Plant: after last frost

Planting Depth: 1/4″

Seed Spacing: 2′

Row Spacing: 3-4′

Days to Maturity:75

Disease Resistance:Verticillium Wilt, Fusarium Wilt, Alternaria Stem Canker, Gray Leaf Spot

SunSugar TomatoSunSugar Tomato is a hybrid, indeterminate cherry tomato variety that is known to be one of the best-tasting cherry tomato varieties in existence. SunSugar produces heavy yields of fruits that grow in clusters for easy harvesting. These fruits are rich in Vitamin A and taste like candy. You’ll probably eat them all before getting them in the house! Solanum lycopersicum. 65 days to maturity.

Unlike other cherry tomato varieties, SunSugar has a thinner skin and is crack-resistant, even in variable conditions. This provides a longer harvest window and more lenience in periods of heavy rainfall. Plants will bear fruits throughout the entire warm season until the first frost. Fruits may be harvested when they turn yellow and are slightly tart, or they can mature to a deep-orange color for a sweeter flavor.

SunSugar Tomato Planting InformationPlanting Method: transplant

When to Plant: after last frost

Planting Depth: 1/4″

Seed Spacing: 2′

Row Spacing: 3-4′

Days to Maturity:65

Disease Resistance:Fusarium Wilt, Tobacco Mosaic Virus

Determinate TomatoesCelebrity TomatoThis tomato is everything you loved about the original Celebrity, plus an enhanced disease package! Celebrity Plus Tomato is a hybrid, determinate tomato variety that produces loads of delicious tomatoes in clusters. Celebrity has long been a favorite for backyard gardeners and homesteaders across the country, and Celebrity Plus has everything you love about the original with a bonus resistance to tomato spotted wilt virus. Also, this variety is widely adapted to all growing regions! Solanum lycopersicum. 80 days to maturity.

Celebrity Plus Tomato is a determinate variety but is sometimes characterized as semi-determinate. Although the plants are shorter resembling a determinate variety, it can often keep producing right until the first frost date. Tomatoes are medium to large and average 7-10 ounces. Fruits are uniform with no green shoulders and resistant to cracking.

Celebrity Plus Tomato Planting InformationPlanting Method: transplant

When to Plant: after last frost

Planting Depth: 1/4″

Seed Spacing: 2′

Row Spacing: 3-4′

Days to Maturity:80

Disease Resistance:Verticillium Wilt, Fusarium Wilt, Root Knot Nematode, Tobacco Mosaic Virus, Tomato Spotted Wilt Virus

Florida 91 TomatoFlorida 91 Tomato is a hybrid, determinate tomato variety known for its ability to set fruit in hot and humid climates. This variety produces extra-large, round to oblate fruits that are smooth and consistently-uniform. Yields are prolific and fruits have an excellent flavor that makes it ideal for fresh market or backyard gardening. It performs well in warmer zones, but is also widely-adapted for any growing zone. Solanum lycopersicum. 75 days to maturity.

Florida 91 Tomato produces strong, vigorous vines can continue to produce well into the warmer months. It has a great disease-resistance package which includes resistance to gray leaf spot, alternaria, verticillium and fusarium. This is a go-to variety for preserving tomatoes in juices, sauces, salsas and more!

Florida 91 Tomato Planting InformationPlanting Method: transplant

When to Plant: after last frost

Planting Depth: 1/4″

Seed Spacing: 2′

Row Spacing: 3-4′

Days to Maturity:75

Disease Resistance:Alternaria Stem Canker, Fusarium Wilt, Gray Leaf Spot, Verticillium Wilt

Products:INDETERMINATE TOMATOES

FERTILIZER

Watch the Full Video on Youtube:https://youtu.be/lAIQ3NARqzc

View Details

The biggest mistake we encounter from our customers is planting okra seeds too soon in the season. There are many factors in getting it right when it comes to growing lots of Okra, for instance, starting seeds at the right time, choosing the right variety, fertilization, knowing when to harvest, and much more! Join us tonight as we discuss one of our favorite things to grow and eat! Okra! Let’s Grow Together!

The Right Time: A major factor in starting your okra seeds is timing. If you are planning a Spring crop, okra seeds should be started indoors and transplanted. However, for a Summer and Fall okra harvest, you can easily direct seed because the soil temperature has had plenty of time to warm up. The biggest mistake we encounter from our customers is planting okra seeds too soon in the season. Okra seeds will not germinate if the soil is too cool. Be sure that your soil temperature has been consistently 70°F – 75°F and all danger of frost has passed before direct sowing or transplanting. Because okra is such a heat loving plant, it makes an excellent crop for succession planting. Wait for the soil to warm in the Spring to transplant, then easily have another crop direct sown behind it to enjoy okra all the way into summer and fall until the first frost hits. Okra seeds should be started indoors at least 6 weeks before the last frost date for your zone. We recommend using our 162 Seed Trays for best results. We have everything that you need to be successful starting okra seeds.

The Right Variety- Hybrid or Heirloom:Heirlooms are varieties that have not been crossbred for 40-50 years or more. These varieties can be passed down through generations and keep their characteristics through those generations because of the careful planting to prevent cross-pollination.
Hybrid varieties have been specifically bred to have characteristics that are desirable to the grower. These characteristics can be anything from size, color, flavor, or disease resistance.

Tried and True Okra Varieties

Jambalaya Okra is a hybrid variety that is the most productive we’ve ever tried. Plants produce heavy yields of green pods that are great for pickling, frying, and stewing.

Clemson Spineless Okra produce pods that can reach 7-9″ in length, but are best harvested between 3-4″ long. Large plants will grow as large as 6′ in optimally-warm growing conditions.

Green Fingers Okra is a unique hybrid variety that produces small, flavorful 3-4″ green pods and is ideal for gardens of all sizes but has been specifically bred to be small enough for container gardening.

Heirloom Okra

Star of David produces deeply ribbed pods that are shorter and thicker than the traditional okra varieties. Pods are best when picked around 3 to 4 inches long. Plants can get as large as 7 feet tall.

Cowhorn Okra: While other varieties may become tough when pods get long, this variety will maintain tenderness at 10″ long. Pods are at optimal tenderness when harvested about 6″ long.

Emerald Green Velvet Okra: This variety is a favorite in Louisiana where it can be found in a wide variety of Cajun dishes. Emerald Green Velvet produces long, ribbed pods that will tend to stay tender at longer lengths than other varieties.

Novelty Okra

Chinese Okra is an heirloom, multi-purpose variety that can be used as okra substitute when harvested young, or for making sponges and other household items if allowed to dry on the vine.

Jing Orange Okra is an Asian heirloom okra variety with beautiful red to orange pods that are spineless and stay tender at 6″ long. Great for frying or making stews.

Red Burgundy Okra: Developed by Clemson University, this okra variety produces beautiful, deep red pods with green tips. Plants can grow as tall as 6′ and are very productive, providing bountiful harvests when picked regularly.

Pests:Of all the pests, okra is the most susceptible to root knot nematodes. Home gardeners are limited to a few methods of controlling root knot nematodes in the garden. The best ways to control this issue is good crop rotation, succession planting and incorporating a good cover crop rotation.

Aphids: Look like ants that are eating your plant. Treat with neem oil, horticulture oil, dishwashing detergent

Stink Bugs: Appears as bumps on Okra. Treat with Bug Buster II

Watering: Drip irrigation will control the amount of water each plant gets and will push water into the soil slowly and precisely for maximum absorption. Too much water too fast can cause stress to the plants and keep oxygen from getting to the root systems. On the flip side, too little water can result in low yields and increased disease and pest issues, and a host of other problems. As a good rule of thumb, regardless of how you water your okra plants, be sure they’re getting at least 1 to 2 inches of water per week but checking in on your plants and watering as needed is really the best way to manage irrigation for okra.

Being sure to not only water enough, but the right way will be a major factor in your crop. Drip irrigation is the only method we recommend for irrigating your okra plants. Overhead watering is not a good option because having moisture on the leaves can introduce problems like disease and pest control resistance. Getting water directly to the base of the plant will help prevent excess evaporation, disease spreading through the crop from moisture on the leaves, and ensures water gets down into the soil directly to the root.

Fertilization: Several Weeks Before Planting
Test your soil at your local extension office.
1 Week Before Planting
After adjusting soil pH to 6.2 – 6.8, mix 1 1/2 cups per 10 ft. of row of Hoss Complete Organic Fertilizer with your soil.
2 Weeks After Planting
Using the Hoss Fertilizer Injector, Mix 1 cup of Hoss Premium 20-20-20 Fertilizer -AND -1-2 cups of Hoss Micro-Boost Micronutrient Supplement per 20 ft. of row.
Every 14 days After
Mix 1 cup of Hoss Premium 20-20-20 -AND -1-2 cups of Hoss Micro-Boost Micronutrient Supplement per 20 ft. of row.

Harvesting too early or too late:Okra should be harvested when the pods are still tender and haven’t gotten too large to become fibrous. Each variety, however, is different when it comes to what size is best for eating or preserving. Cowhorn Okra, for example, can stay tender with the pods being as long as 10 inches whereas Green Fingers Okra should be harvested when the pods are between 2 to 3 inches. Be sure to check the seed packet or the product page for the maturity date to give you a better idea of how long it takes that specific okra to reach full maturity. You can also keep an eye on the flowers and once they start to drop, it’s a good sign that you should start harvesting in the next couple of days.

The Best Method To Harvesting Okra

Harvest your okra using a sharp knife or pruning shears and be sure to make a clean cut. Don’t yank the fruit and damage the stem, as it can introduce harmful bacteria while storing. Okra pods are delicate so be careful when handling the pods so they don’t bruise. Because okra has spines and can cause irritation to your skin, we recommend wearing gloves while harvesting to avoid discomfort.

Storing and preserving okra:After harvesting your okra, be sure not to wash it right away if you’re intending to store it. Washing it will cause it to get slimy and will mold. You can store okra in the fridge for up to 3 days in a ventilated bag. Okra also stores well in the freezer either by just freezing the pods or blanching beforehand. Pickled okra is a staple in Southern kitchens and is a great way to enjoy your okra throughout the year.

Products:OKRA

162 CELL SEED STARTING TRAY

FERTILIZER

Watch the Full Video on Youtube:https://youtu.be/F05OC-XTpvk

View Details

Tonight we’re discussing common mistakes made when growing watermelons at home. When you are successful at growing watermelons, it can make any gardener feel great but sometimes there are many of us who have difficulty. We’re here to discuss some of the major contributing factors when it comes to growing watermelon. Let’s Grow Together! Get Dirty!

The Right Time to Plant Watermelon SeedlingsA major contributing factor to having a healthy watermelon crop is to know just how much they hate the cold. Making absolutely certain that any danger of frost has passed will help keep your watermelons healthy and happy. Check out Hoss University for planting dates/seed starting dates.

Over CrowdingPlanting watermelons too close may result in overcrowding and smaller fruit.

Transplanting Your Watermelon Seedlings

Watermelon Seedling Planting Depth:

Row Spacing – 4 to 6 feet

Plant Spacing – 2 to 3 feet

Planting Depth (Plants) – Soil Level

LocationWhen choosing a spot to plant your watermelons, make sure it has full sun and won’t be shaded by other plants. Plant in loose, well-draining sandy loam, with pH between 6.0 and 6.5, that is rich in organic materials. Add good quality compost to the soil.

Over wateringWatch for overwatering, especially when almost ripe/ripe. Overwatering can cause splitting, dilute the flavor, resulting in it being less sweet. If rainfall is heavy, watermelons may swell too quickly for the plant to keep up with the extra water content. When this happens, the rind of the watermelon may split or burst as a result of the excess water building up inside of it.

Under watering:May cause slow start, the fruit will not be able to grow to its full potential and may become stunted or fall off the vine. It is also important to be watering watermelons while they are establishing in the garden or during times of drought.

Lack of pollination:Watermelon mainly depends on honeybees for pollination. In general, if the pollination does not occur, female flower will grow initially but fall off later. bees are vital for pollinating watermelons not only for the plant to be able to produce an abundance of fruit, but also to ensure that the watermelons are healthy, and with a good shape. Pollination by bees also affects the sweetness of the fruit.

FertilizingFertilizing is determined by the current soil condition and, thereafter, by the stage at which the watermelon plant is growing. For example, is it an emergent seedling or is it in bloom? Both stages have different nutritional needs. When fertilizing watermelon plants, use nitrogen based fertilizer at the onset. Once the plant begins flowering, however, switch to feeding the watermelon a phosphorus and potassium based fertilizer. Watermelons require ample potassium and phosphorus for optimal melon production.

Harvesting too early or too late:Harvesting And Storing Your Watermelons

There are several telltale signs that you can tell a watermelon is ripe. There’s the “thump test” where you can hold your ear up to the melon and, after years of experience thumping melons and knowing exactly what to listen for, you can tell that it’s ripe just by the sound it makes. While this method may be great for some, the thought of thumping acres of melons to tell if they’re ready for harvest isn’t really feasible. So here’s the 2 best ways to tell if your melons are ready for harvest.

Look For The Curly Q

Where the stem of the watermelon meets the main vine, there is a small tendril that comes off of the plant that we call a curly q. This is the best indicator as to the ripeness of your watermelons. When that curly q has completely dried out all the way to the vine, you know that your watermelons are good to harvest. Check out the video in the Extra Credit section below for more detailed info on this method!

Check The Field Spot

While growing, the watermelon rests on the ground and develops what is known as a field spot. A good indication that you’re going to have a ripe and sweeter watermelon is checking the color of this spot. The color ranges from almost white to a deep yellow color. Typically, the darker the yellow spot, the sweeter your watermelon will be.

Choosing Sweet WatermelonsWhile you may think that a shiny, bright green watermelon that you see in photos is the best watermelon to choose, this may not always be the case. Dull melons are good sign that your watermelon is not only ripe, but also sweeter than average. Another good thing to look for are brown spots and lines throughout; this is called “webbing” . For every brown spot you see, that is how many times a bee has touched the pollinating parts of the watermelon flower. The more pollination, the sweeter your watermelon is likely to be.

Products:WATERMELON

TOMATO PLUGS

PEPPER PLUGS

Watch the Full Video on Youtube:https://youtu.be/jxQishujoDA

View Details

SHE’S BACK!! Tracey from Sakata Seeds is back at Hoss HQ for her annual Spring visit! Join us as we talk about garden updates, the difference between pelleted and primed seeds, what’s going on in the tomato breeding world at Sakata, and much more. Let’s Grow Together! Get Dirty!

Primed vs. Pelleted SeedsPrimed seeds are easier to germinate and must be used the growing season they are purchased. We carry primed Red Snapper, Bella Rosa, and Shelby tomato seeds. Pelleted seeds are easier to handle (usually for small or irregularly shaped seeds). We carry pelleted Shelby, Bella Rosa, Red Snapper, and Hossinator tomato seeds, as well as pelleted carrot, lettuce, and celery seeds.

What factors are important for Primed and Pelleted Seeds?Watering is the most important factor with pelleted seeds. Watering is important because underwatering and overwatering alike can harm seed growth. Underwatering won’t allow for the coating on the pellets to wash off, but overwatering will cause the coating to stick to itself, and either way, the plant will not be oxygenated enough. Also important is air circulation. Using a fan to circulate air in your greenhouse can help keep plants healthy. Lastly, use your seeds during the year you purchased them or keep them COMPLETELY dry because any pre-exposure to moisture will degrade the coating on the seeds.

Tomato Breeding at SakataSakata takes great pride in their breeding programs, particularly with tomato seeds. They breed in Florida and test their seeds extensively throughout the United States. Breeds can take years, even over a decade sometimes, to be perfected. Sakata focuses primarily on adaptability to wherever you may be growing, as well as the yields and sizes of tomatoes. Currently, Sakata is developing new breeds that also focus heavily on great tasting tomatoes, making it the top priority behind adaptability and yields/size. In fact, Tracy will be in Florida very soon to taste tomatoes developed by Sakata.

Tips from Tracy* Don’t sucker determinants! Unless you’re training your plant or growing large indeterminates, don’t sucker your tomatoes, as Sakata designed their determinate tomato breeds to be easy to maintain and will only cause unnecessary work for yourself. * If you’re looking for flavor over ease of growing, choose an indeterminate variety. * The best tomatoes for ultra-small spaces like porches or balconies are our mini determinants, i.e. the Little Birdie tomatoes (Red Robin, Rosy Finch and Yellow Canary tomatoes).

Products:TOMATO PLUGS

PEPPER PLUGS

SWEET POTATO SLIPS

Watch the Full Video on Youtube:https://youtu.be/BFj4Q2F_tWE

View Details

April showers bring May flowers! April tends to be such a great time to grow flowers AND vegetables. Join us as we discuss what you should be planting! We are reviewing what you should be doing in the garden this April as warm weather and rain starts to settle in USDA zones 5-10. Let’s Grow Together!

In cold-winter regions, spring weather may be weeks away. In warm-winter regions, the last frost may already have passed. April is named for Aprilis, the Latin word meaning to open. This month you will see returning birds and soon their young. The first butterflies and bees should be about before the month is over. Only very far to the north will ice and snow still have their grip on the garden by month’s end.

What is Arbor Day?April is the traditional month in many countries for the celebration of tree planting. In the United States, many states celebrate Arbor Day in April. Planting trees has long been associated with various religious ceremonies and also as an activity to commemorate the birth of a child. When you sow out your first vegetable seeds this month, see if there is room for a new tree in your yard, neighborhood, or nearby park.

What should you do in your garden this month?April is a good month to harden off your plants. Now you need to get the plants ready to transplant outside without any issues. “Hardening off” means you are slowly taking the seedlings outside a few hours each day to get them used to sunlight, the dry air, and cold nights. And don’t forget to prepare your soil before you set out any transplants! You should be amending your soil and incorporating pre-plant fertilizer. This month, harvest onions and garlic. Take care and time to prune your garden plants that have succumbed to winter damage before the new shoots of spring emerge.

What should you plant this month? Here’s what you can plant in your garden based on your USDA growing zone.

Zone 9 and 10

April is like summer in zone 9 and 10. So, you will want to plant warm-weather plants. Here’s what to plant:

Bush Beans
Pole Beans
Cantaloupes
Corn
Cucumbers
Varieties of peas
Peppers
Pumpkins
Summer squash
Tomato transplants
Sweet potatoes
Watermelons

Zone 7 and 8

It is quite warm in zone 7 and 8 during April. Here are the things you may want to start planting:

Bush Beans
Poles Beans
Cantaloupe
Corn
Cucumbers
Eggplant
Peas
Peppers
Okra
All warm-season herbs
Squash
Sweet potatoes
Tomatoes
Watermelons

Zone 5 and 6

April is the perfect time to start planting stuff in zone 5 and 6. Here’s what you can start planting:

Asparagus
Beets
Broccoli
Cilantro
Cabbage
Carrots
Lettuce
Peas
Spinach
Strawberries

Zone 3 and 4

If you live in zone 3 or 4, it is best to wait until after April 15th to plant many of these in your garden. Here is what you can start indoors and move outdoors when there is no longer any frost:

Asparagus
Beets
Broccoli
Brussel Sprouts
Cabbage
Carrots
Cauliflower
Kale
Lettuce
Onions
Parsley
Peas
Potatoes
Radishes

Products:PREMIUM GARDEN SEEDS

SEED STARTING SUPPLIES

SWEET POTATO SLIPS

Watch the Full Video on Youtube:https://youtu.be/pDDRvBNtse4

View Details

How much and when to plant sweet corn?

Sweet corn is a warm season crop and must be planted after the soil warms and there is no more danger of frost. It needs to be at least 55 degrees f (13 c). If you plant super sweet corn, be sure the soil is at least 65 f (18 c). Plant the sweet corn seeds about 1 inch deep and 3 to 4 inches apart in the row. Space the rows 2 ½ to 3 feet apart. After the plants are up, thin them to 1 foot apart. If you plant them closer, your corn will have small, poorly filled ears.

Each variety of corn has different quantities per pound based on the type of corn you’re growing. Also, the seed spacing and row spacing differ between field and popcorn vs. sweet corn. Be sure and check each product page for how many seeds per pound are include with that variety of corn to make sure you’re purchasing the right amount of seed for your space.

Field Corn & Popcorn

Based on 8 inch seed spacing with 36 inch row spacing and 5 extra seeds per row just in case.
20 seeds per 10 ft row
60 seeds per 10×10 plot with 3 rows
600 seeds per 1000 square feet
This means you would need roughly 29,000 seeds of field corn or popcorn per acre.

Sweet Corn

Based on 6 inch seed spacing with 36 inch row spacing and 5 extra seeds per row just in case.
25 seeds per 10 ft row
75 seeds per 10×10 plot with 3 rows
750 seeds per 1000 square feet
Do you advise transplanting corn?

We personally do not recommend transplanting corn. While it is certainly possible, corn is very finicky and only allows for a very small window of time between when the seedlings are big enough to transplant and when it is too late to transplant, and so it tends to be more likely to be a successful crop when directly sown.

Spacing and Timing when planting different varieties

Different varieties produce pollen at different times, so you can isolate them by time. Since different varieties will respond individually to growing conditions, do not isolate them with less than two weeks until the given “days to maturity” in the variety description. You can also plant one variety earlier than another variety to achieve the needed difference in pollen production. If you garden in an agricultural area, try to plant your sweet corn 300 feet from the nearest cornfield. Large acreages of field corn will produce so much pollen that you could spoil your crop unless you plant your sweet corn far enough away. The only type of corn you don’t have to worry about cross pollination are the synergistic types of triple sweets and quad sweets. Field corn must be isolated from sweet corn so there is no cross pollination. Field corn should be planted 12 inches apart.

What causes lack of pollination?

Sweet corn must self-pollinate or pollinate with a similar variety. Wind moves corn pollen from the tassel at the top of the plant to the silks of the ears, all the way to the lower parts of the plant. Always plant corn in blocks of at least four rows. Corn planted in a single row will have much of its pollen blown out of the row and will produce ears that have blank areas where kernels did not form. If you garden in an agricultural area, try to plant your sweet corn 300 feet from the nearest cornfield. Large acreages of field corn will produce so much pollen that you could spoil your crop unless you plant your sweet corn far enough away.

Can I grow corn in raised beds and containers?

WE have been growing corn at HOSS for a long time. So, while you may see plenty of information on the internet that might suggest otherwise, growing corn in raised beds and containers is not something we personally recommend. Corn is pollinated by the wind, not by insects, so to have a good, healthy crop, you need to be able to plant a minimum of 5 rows of corn to get proper pollination between the plants. From a space standpoint, corn is just not well suited for raised beds or containers.

What is your best advice to give when your corn gets blown over after a storm? What is the best way to upright?

The best thing to do is just leave it alone. If the stalks did not break, they will stand back up.

How do I plant and how deep if using drip tape?

Water sweet corn as needed to keep it from wilting, and do not let sweet corn suffer from lack of water while the kernels are forming, or the quality of the corn will be vastly reduced. One inch of rainfall per week is good for your corn. You can plant the drip tape as deep as 6 inches. Corn should be planted 1 inch deep, best to place the drip tape under the soil 2 to 3 inches deep.

When should I fertilize sweet corn?

When plants are about 2 feet tall, apply 1 cup of fertilizer for every 10 feet of garden row. Scatter the fertilizer evenly between the rows and mix it lightly with the soil. Water after fertilizing.

When and how should I harvest sweet corn?

Corn is ready for harvest about 3 weeks after the tassel grows on top of the corn plant. Corn is ripe when juice from the kernels is milky white, the silk on the ears has turned dark brown. The best time to pick corn is in the early morning or evening when it is cool. Store corn in the husk. Place it uncovered in the refrigerator for 1 or 2 days. Corn stored for more than 2 days loses its sweetness. To preserve corn, you can can it, blanch and freeze it, or freeze-dry it.

How do you choose sweet corn varieties?

If it is your first time growing corn, we recommend growing one of the standard varieties like Silver Queen, G90, Jubilee, etc. The reason is you have a longer growing period (about 15 days longer) than the maturity date. You have a little more leeway as a far as getting enough fertilizer and water to them. Three genes control sweetness in corn: Sugary (Su), Sugary Enhancer (Se), and Shrunken (Sh). Newer varieties contain either the Sugary Enhancer (Se) gene, or a combination of the two. You will see the code letters on packets of sweet corn seed or in catalog description that give information about growing each variety: su, se, sh, and sy. Sy is the code letters for hybrid corn varieties.

Sugary (Su) (Silver Queen, Stonewell, Evergreen, G90)

Has an average level of sugar (8 to 18%) that becomes starch quickly after harvest
Both hybrid and open-pollinated types are available
It is the traditional type of sweet corn.
Some describes sugary corn as having “old-fashioned” flavor.
Its kernels are tender and creamy. They can taste chewy as the sugar becomes starch.
It is important that you pick these varieties the same day that you plant to each them.
Gardeners who want to freeze or can corn typically prefer this type as the flavorful, creamy kernels hold up to processing.
Isolate from Shrunken (Sh) and Synergistic (Sy) types.

Sugary Enhanced (Se) (Peaches and Cream, Hone, Ambrosia, Incredible, Kandy Korn, Bodacious, Silver King, Argent)

Sugary enhanced has an increased sugar level (30% to 35%), and the kernels are tenderer.
The sugar is slower to become starch after the harvest.
Fully Sugary Enhanced (Se+) types are even sweeter. They will still be sweet after three or more days in the fridge.

Shrunken (Sh) (Obsession, Avalon, Passion, Devastation)

Shrunken have two to three times the amount of sugar (40 to 50%) compared to sugary varieties.
They have a crispy texture.
They can keep their sweetness for a week in the refrigerator.
Some people find shrunken corn lacking in “corn” flavor, and they are less creamy.
Seeds are smaller and lighter in weight and look shrunken when dry.
Isolate from all other sweet corn types.
Cross-pollination between Shrunken (Sh) and any other types will result in starchy, tough kernel.

Synergistic (Sy)

They have a combination of sweetness genes.
All have at least one Se gene.
They may be combined with Sh, Su, or both.
These varieties are crisp, very sweet, tender, and creamy.
Some also have longer storage life, lasting more than a week in the refrigerator.
Sugar content in these types take longer to build up than in sugary enhanced types, and kernels can be too watery if picked too early.

Products:SWEET CORN

HOSS SHIRTS

Watch the Full Video on Youtube:https:https://youtu.be/9zAGksSn8wM

View Details

If you haven’t heard of the “Dirty Dozen”, listen up! Tonight, we’re talking about something that has recently hit the news within the last week and not everyone seems to be talking about it! We think this is information you should know. We’re talking about the top dozen vegetables and fruits offered in grocery stores that are contaminated with pesticides that are extremely common to purchase for most consumers. Is this data correct? Let’s find out together!

The Dirty Dozen comes from a CNN article analyzing the results of a 292 page USDA report regarding pesticides in produce in the United States. The article by CNN lists the top 12 vegetables with the most contamination from pesticides at grocery stores, as well as 15 foods that are the best options for avoiding pesticides. So, according to this report, what foods should you avoid in your grocery cart?

Dirty DozenThe Dirty Dozen is the list of the vegetables with the most amount of pesticides found on them according to the USDA:

Strawberries
Spinach
Kale/Collards/Mustard Greens
Peaches
Pears
Nectarines
Apples
Grapes
Bell & Hot Peppers
Cherries
Blueberries
Green Beans

Clean FifteenThe Clean Fifteen is the list of the vegetables with the least amount of pesticides found on them according to the USDA:

Avocados
Sweet Corn
Pineapple
Onions
Papaya
Sweet Peas
Asparagus
Honeydew Melon
Kiwi
Cabbage
Mushrooms
Mangoes
Sweet Potatoes
Watermelon
Carrots

How trustworthy is this information?It’s no secret that even when information seems accurate and thoroughly studied, flaws in the method of study and data collection can happen, especially when personal interests are involved. In this particular study, we found that the sample sizes were very small. For example, only 7 samples were pulled from Florida for this study. From California, only 13. Compared to how much produce comes from these states, such small sample pools can not possibly represent the whole of the industry. Also, Neonicotinoids are not mentioned in the report at all, despite how extremely prevalent it is in farming. So, should we really be worried about pesticides? It is true that exposure to pesticides can contribute many health issues including cancer and type 2 diabetes. However, this study claims that 99% of produce is below the USDA’s pesticides tolerance and 42.5% of produce had no detectable pesticide amount at all. Ultimately, it is impossible to draw conclusions from this study particularly. It is important to always look at information for yourself to determine how accurate or relevant it is. The only way to guarantee the safety of your produce from dangerous pesticides is to grow food for yourself, or purchase food from small local farms that you know the farming practices of.

Products:TOMATO PLUGS

PEPPER PLUGS

BRASSICA PLUGS

SWEET POTATO SLIPS

Watch the Full Video on Youtube:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=v3pvfir-ick

View Details

‘Tis The Gardening Season! Tonight we’re addressing some of the most asked gardening questions that we get this time of the year! No matter if it’s over the phone, emailed, or on social media, these are our Top 10 most-asked questions (for 2023 that is). We’re showing you how to step up your tomato plugs if you aren’t ready to transplant in the ground just yet, talking seedless watermelon germination, and much more! Join us and let’s grow together!

1.What do I do with plugs if I’m not ready to plant?

Put your plugs individually in a container or pot at least large enough to hold the plug and a bit of soil, such as a red solo cup (with draining holes punched in the bottom) or something of similar size. The roots of the plug will grow to fill the pot/cup as it grows. Keep them in the sun until ready to transplant to your raised beds or in-ground plots

2. When do I start fertilizing my plugs?

Fertilize your plugs once the seedlings develop their first “true” leaves. As seedlings grow, their first one or two leaves are “seed” leaves, which were the part of the stem surrounding the germinating seed. The leaves that grow afterwards are “true’ leaves, having the appearance and function all future leaves will have. Fertilize these seedlings with either our Complete Organic Fertilizer as directed or our Dr. Joe’s Tomato & Vegetable Bubble Tablets.

3. What do I do with potatoes with potential frost coming? What about other seedlings?

We recommend using a frost protection cover to protect your tomatoes, peppers, or squash if it gets below 40 degrees F, and your potatoes if it gets below 30 F. Brassicas should be fine at 20 degrees F.

4. When do I need to start my roselle?

Start your roselle indoors 6 to 8 weeks before the last frost or direct seed after the last frost in your zone. Roselle is susceptible to frost so do not plant directly until the soil is consistently 75 degrees F or above.

5. Why won’t my seedless watermelon germinate?

Seedless watermelons grow from hollow seeds that are very susceptible to rupturing of the cell structure, making them finicky to germinate. Wet your soil and warm it with a heat mat the day before, and after you plant your seeds, DO NOT WATER until the seeds begin to germinate. The soil temperature needs to consistently be between 80 and 90 degrees F or the seeds will get too cold to germinate.

6. Why are my Shelby, Hossinator, and Red Snapper tomatoes taking so long to germinate?

Pelleted, primed seeds germinate differently than regular raw seeds do. Pelleted and primed seeds have been carried through part of the germination process already, and therefore do not act the same as regular seeds do. Regular seeds are more forgiving to improper watering and uneven moisture. The coating on pellets splits when exposed to water, allowing the seed within to germinate. Watering properly and consistently is the only way to ensure the pellets split open fully while also having proper respiration.

7. Can I still plant brassicas?

In most cases, yes, you can still plant your brassicas now.

8. Why is my brass siphon mixer not working?

The brass siphon mixer does not work with mist nozzles because they do not put out enough water to soften and run the fertilizer through.

9. Can sweet corn & field corn cross pollinate? How can I prevent cross pollination? Can I plant 2 varieties of sweet corn at the same time?

Yes, it is possible for field corn and sweet corn to cross pollinate, so we recommend not growing them at the same time together. Instead, wait until it is warm enough, then plant sweet corn, then wait 3 to 4 weeks before planting field corn. Same principle with two types of sweet corn: grow them 3 to 4 weeks apart to avoid cross-pollination.

10. When will the Thom Multiplying Onions be available?

They will likely be available in April, once our seed crop grows large enough bulbs. If you are currently growing your own multiplying onions, however, you are probably good to go on harvesting them.

Products:PLUGS

HOSS PRUNING SHEARS W/ SHEATH

HOSS SHEARS SHEATH

HOSS PRUNING SHEARS

SUPREME PLANT PROTECTION COVER

Watch the Full Video on Youtube:https://youtu.be/k9WMyZjAqe0

View Details

It’s March, and the weather is quickly changing once again. Tonight, we are reviewing what you should be doing in the garden this month by USDA Growing Zones 6-10. Don’t forget – we have Tomato, Pepper, and Brassica Plugs available! Sweet Potato Slips are also on Pre-Sale! Let’s Grow Together and Get Dirty!

Zone 6:

Plant peas, Kale, Onions, Spinach, Broccoli, Radish and parsley towards the end of the month directly in the garden.
Plant Seed Potatoes
Start transplants indoors of tomatoes, peppers, and eggplant and any other cool season veg you’d like to grow.

Zone 7:

Start transplants indoors of tomatoes, peppers, and eggplant- try to get this done by March 15th.
Plant Seed Potatoes
By the end of March, you should be safe to start the process of hardening off for transplant outside of your onions, parsley, and any other cool season crops that are at least 5 weeks old. Select smaller rather than larger plants of the cold crops (broccoli, cauliflower, cabbage, Brussels sprouts) since overly mature plants exposed to low temperatures early in the season tend to bolt into flower too early. (Order Brassica’s from Hoss)
Direct sow carrots, Swiss chard, peas, collards, kale, kohlrabi, leaf lettuce, onions, parsley, parsnips, beets, leaf lettuce, radishes, salsify and spinach as soil and weather conditions permit.
Start Sunflowers, Zinnias indoors

Zone 8:

Start transplants indoors of tomatoes, peppers, and eggplant- try to get this done by March 15th.
Plant Seed Potatoes now
Plant broccoli, cauliflower, cabbage, Brussels sprouts outside. (Order Brassica’s from Hoss)
Direct sow carrots, Swiss chard, peas, collards, kale, kohlrabi, leaf lettuce, onions, parsley, parsnips, beets, leaf lettuce, radishes, salsify and spinach as soil and weather conditions permit.
Start Sunflowers, Zinnias indoors

Zone 9:

Warm-season crops, such as beans, peppers, squash, corn, tomatoes, eggplant, and others can be planted now. (If you need Tomato or peppers, order now)
Direct Seed Sunflowers, Zinnias

Zone 10:

This is the last month to plant arugula, beans, cantaloupe, carrots, celery sweet corn, endive, okra, radish, squashes, Swiss chard, and watermelon.
Direct Seed Sunflowers, Zinnias

Products:TOMATO PLUGS

PEPPER PLUGS

BRASSICA PLUGS

SWEET POTATO SLIPS

Watch the Full Video on Youtube:https://youtu.be/KSZ_Zx86FvI

View Details

Why do we LOVE squash at HOSS? Squash is a super popular and diverse vegetable to grown in the garden. Did you know that there are three different major species of squash? Like peppo, moschata, or maxima? Each squash species has different growth habits, storage lengths, days to maturity, and much more. What type of squash are you growing this season? Let’s Grow Together!

Summer vs Winter SquashWhat are the differences between summer and winter squash? Summer squash is soft-skinned, making it more tender and moist overall. Winter squash from summer squash in that it is harvested and eaten in the mature stage when the seeds (inside the vegetable) have fully matured. Unlike summer squash, which will only last 4-5 days with proper refrigeration, many winter squash varieties can be stored throughout the winter.

SpeciesPepoPepo squash includes summer squash like yellow zucchini and yellow squash, as well as winter squash such as scallop-type squash, sweeter-type squash, and some pumpkins like Blaze and Harvest Jack. They do not vine but instead form a “bush” with the fruits growing in the center of the plants. The winter squash types of this species will store for 30 days after harvesting. They take 100 days to reach maturity and do well in raised beds.

MoschataMoschata squash includes some pumpkin types like Long Island Cheese and Seminole, as well as butternut squash. They produce climbing vines that could benefit from a trellis in some cases. Since they are winter squashes, they will keep 4-6 months if stored properly. They tend to be more heat tolerant and less prone to the vine borer compared to other species.

MaximaMaxima squash includes some pumpkins, particularly our “competition” size varieties like the Prizewinner, and smaller types like the Cinderella pumpkin. Maxima also includes some winter squash like Hubbard squashes. They have lots of vines that are good for a trellis. Since they are winter squashes, they will keep 4-6 months if stored properly. They take 95-100 days to reach maturity. These squashes tend to have unique flavors and they tend to have less flowers than other species.

Products:Winter Squash

Summer Squash

Watch the Full Video on Youtube:https://youtu.be/8_ZaSL_8y8s

View Details

What is a grow light, and exactly what does it do? In order to grow strong, healthy seedlings, it’s super important to provide the proper lighting for them right from the start. Allows you to grow seedlings and transplants anywhere in your home, office, or garage. The natural light from a window is seldom enough for good, strong seedling growth. They will usually stretch and lean towards the light and will not produce sturdy plants. Most homes don’t have enough natural lighting for seedlings, and trying to grow them on a sunny windowsill will only result in disappointment and wasted time (and money!). Adequate lighting is a key part of successful seedling care, and it will give them a good start to life. When they don’t get enough, seedlings become weak and leggy, and may not survive for very long. The only way to prevent leggy seedlings is to use grow lights.

Frequently Asked Questions:What is benefits of putting seedlings under Lights:

Stronger and healthier seedlings– The main benefit of using artificial lights is that your seedlings will be much stronger, healthier, and stay more compact than they would just sitting near a sunny window.
Better survival rate– Once you provide enough light, you’ll find that the survival rate of your seedlings is much higher. So you won’t have to plant extras to make up for all the weak ones you would have ended up losing.
Less waste– Since you won’t have to plant extras to make up for those losses, there will be much less waste. You won’t waste any seeds or dirt… or your time. Because of this, you’ll find the lights will pay for themselves pretty quickly.
Much easier– Providing proper lighting for seedlings will make your life so much easier too. By using a timer, you can just set it and forget it, rather than having to constantly monitor and rotate your trays.
Prevents leggedness– The only way to prevent seedlings from getting tall and leggy is to provide adequate lighting.
Grow seeds anywhere in your house– Another benefit is that you can put your seedlings anywhere in the house. You don’t need to worry about keeping them in a room that gets tons of natural light.

What kind of light do seedings need?

It’s very important to make sure you get the right type of lighting for seedlings, and all bulbs are NOT created equal.

How much light do seedling need?

Seedlings need 14-16 hours of light every single day, without fail. Don’t leave them on for 24 hours a day though. Like us, they need to rest at night.

So, plan to keep your artificial lights on for 14-16 hours during the daytime, and turn them off overnight.

Use an outlet timer to make sticking to this schedule a snap, and ensure your seedlings get the perfect amount of light.

If you give them less than 14 hours of light per day, then make sure to monitor them closely. If they start getting tall or growing sideways, then give them another hour or two of light.

When do I put my seedlings under light?

The answer to this one is simple. Your grow lights should be turned on (or your seedlings should be put under lights) as soon as the first seed starts to sprout.

Many types of seedlings grow very fast, and they will begin reaching for the light as soon as they emerge. So, give them plenty of it right from the start.

How far should seedlings be from a grow light?

The grow light should not be very far from the seedlings. It’s best to keep it 2-3″ above the top of the leaves at all times.

So, at first, your fixture will hang directly above (but never touching!) the plastic lid on the tray.

Once your starts get taller, and you take the lid off, then you’ll need to adjust the lights on a regular basis so they are always right over the top.

The leaves should never touch the bulbs though, or they could burn. So, make sure to check on them every day, and move the light up as necessary. Using an adjustable hanger will make this job a whole lot easier!

Rotate the trays daily if you notice any of the seedlings around the edges are reaching, or aren’t growing as well as the ones that are directly under the light.

When to stop using lights on seedlings?

The only time you should stop using lights on your seedlings is when they are outside. As long as they are inside the house, they should be under the lights.

Once you’re in the process of hardening them, you can turn off the lights while your seedlings are outside during the day. But you shouldn’t stop using them completely until after you’ve moved the seedlings outside for good.

Just make sure you always put them under the lights each time you bring them back indoors, or they will quickly start to get leggy.

Products:Hanging Grow Light Kit

Indoor Seed Starting Kit

Kitchen Garden Light Kit

Sun Blaster Light Timer

Watch the Full Video on Youtube:https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MxwOrmZz5v0

View Details

What is a heat mat for plants, and exactly what does it do?

Heat mats have one basic function which is to gently warm the soil, thus promoting faster germination and strong, healthy seedlings.

Most seeds germinate best in temperatures between 70 and 90 degrees F.

To germinate, most seeds need water, air (oxygen), and warmth to break dormancy. There are exceptions, but most seeds do not need light until they have sprouted.

In many climates, temperatures aren’t consistently warm enough to germinate seeds, especially in late winter or early spring, prime seed starting times. Keep in mind that damp soil is cooler than the air temperature, even in a warm room.

You may be advised to put seed trays in a sunny window, but windows aren’t consistently warm in early spring and they may be very cold at night. Heat mats, which use very little electricity, produce gentle, consistent heat. Some heat mats for plants even have thermostats to adjust the heat.

The idea is to provide the right amount of warmth for the particular type of seed.

Work off of ambient temperature.

The most important tip is to be sure to get a thermostat attachment. This may be an extra purchase unless it’s included as a set. The whole point is to be able to warm your soil to a specified, consistent temperature to make the seeds sprout.

Without a thermostat to regulate things, some of these mats will heat way too hot. The one I tested recently went just beyond 112°F (44°C) when I left it running. That not only dries out the growing medium but wipes out any emerging seedlings.

Frequently Asked QuestionsHow long do you use heat mats for seed starting?

Heat mats, if needed at all, are useful for warming soil during the germination process only. They should be removed after several seeds have sprouted to avoid overheating the seedlings. Seeds sprout at warmer temperatures than their seedlings can cope with.

Can heat mats harm seedlings?

Yes, heat mats can harm seedlings by drying out the soil or new growth. Only use a heat mat with a thermostat to ensure you can regulate the temperature. Seeds have minimum and maximum growing temperatures. When too low, they won’t sprout.

Can I use grow lights instead of a heat mat?

No, a grow light does not act like a heat mat. Grow lights provide light and heat mats provide warmth by contact. Heat mats are used to help seeds sprout faster. Once sprouted, grow lights provide the light needed for seedlings to grow.

Hoss Germination Mat (100 Watt)$74.99

Our Hoss 100 Watt Germination Mat provides constant temperature to seed starting trays for germinating seedlings. 20.75″ wide x 48″ long. Large enough for our 162/338 Cell Seed Starting Trays or 6 of our 24 Cell Seed Starting Trays. UL Listed safe.

Hoss Germination Mat (17 Watt)$29.99

Our Hoss 17 Watt Germination Mat provides constant temperature to seed starting trays for germinating seedlings. 8.875″ wide x 19.5″ long. Will fit two of our 12 Cell Seed Starting Trays or one of our 24 Cell Seed Starting Trays. UL Listed safe.

Hoss Germination Mat (150 Watt)Hoss Germination Mat (150 Watt) – 60″ x 21″ MASTER MAT | $149.99

Hoss Germination Mat (150 Watt) – 60″ x 21″ ADD-ON MAT | $129.99

Our Hoss 150 Watt Germination Mat allows you to connect additional mats through the daisy chain feature. Each mat is 21″ wide x 60″ long. Connect up to 3 ADD-ON MATS to the MASTER MAT. ETL Listed safe.

MUST USE with our HOSS GERMINATION THERMOSTAT sold here.

Watch the Full Episode on Youtube:https://youtu.be/VvE6vmzsoNs

View Details

Tonight, we are discussing landscape fabric and its pros and cons and introducing our fabric cover garden kits!

When used correctly, landscape fabric can be an effective way to limit weed growth and keep your garden beds looking pristine. It stifles weeds, locks in moisture, and helps with stability.

Pros of Landscape fabric* Keeps inorganic mulches like rocks from sinking into the soil. Landscape fabric helps to stabilize the soil. * Prevents weed seeds covered by fabric from sprouting for up to a year * Reduces the need for herbicides * Works well on slopes where erosion control is a problem * Helps the soil retain moisture and slows evaporation * You can choose from many different materials and thicknesses, which makes it customizable for different projects. Also, the variety of choices means you can control costs, buying the right type of material for each project or area of your lawn. * Warms the soil in winter. Clear plastic increases soil temperatures by up to 9 degrees Fahrenheit, black plastic by 5 degrees, and polypropylenes by about 2 degrees. * A popular product that can be found at most any garden center, superstore, or online retailer. * If landscape fabric is the right choice for your garden or other yard project, you’re ready to learn how to install landscape fabric.

Cons* Overtime, decomposing particles or mulch & soil clog the perforations in the cloth. As it becomes clogged, adequate amounts of water and air are unable to reach the plant roots, leading to the plant’s decline. * Unwanted weed growth eventually rears its ugly head despite the weed barrier. * The University of Florida says the long-term use of landscape fabric can negatively affect soil and plant health and is best used where ornamental plants aren’t growing like pathways or mailboxes. * Earthworms, which aerate the soil, don’t develop, leading to compacted & unhealthy soil. * The fabric acts as a barrier to organic materials biodegrading in the soil, which leads to an unhealthy soil structure. * Weeds can still grow in the mulch on top of the fabric. * Landscape fabric is time-consuming to install, especially around existing plantings. * Depending on the size of the area and the thickness of the material, it can be expensive. Organic mulches, such as grass clippings and mulched leaves are free and contribute to soil health as they break down.

If downsides to landscape fabric have you rethinking your options, there are landscape fabric alternatives to consider:

Cardboard (a great option for sheet mulching to remove part of your lawn)
Ground cover plants
Ground cover plants that flower
Ground cover plants that work well in shade
Newspaper
Organic mulch, such as wood chips, straw, burlap, pine needles, grass clippings, shredded leaves, and compost. They also decompose, adding valuable nutrients and organic matter to the soil.

Hoss Lazy Garden Ground CoverOur Lazy Garden Ground Cover is an easy way to keep weeds out of your garden! You won’t find another one like it. The ground cover is a heavy-duty, woven polypropylene fabric that provides many years of reliable results. It is resistant to punctures, tears, and weed growth. It is formulated to resist UV degradation, the design allows air, water, and nutrients to pass through. There’s no need to cut or burn holes for your plants; our Lazy Garden Ground Cover is a quick plant fabric with pre-cut slits for optimal plant spacing. Two sizes are available: 15 ft x 30 ft or 15 ft x 20 ft. Fabric pins included.

This ground cover is reusable with an expected lifespan of 8-10 years. The 15 ft. x 30 ft. ground cover has 7 rows of pre-cut slits that measure 12 inches in length with a 36-inch spacing in between each slit. These slits are perfect for planting carrots, garlic, radishes, swiss chard, and more; it also comes with 8 rows of pre-cut Xs that are spaced 24 inches apart, these spaces are great for planting vegetables such as lettuce, broccoli, tomatoes, cauliflower, peppers and more! Garden layout examples are provided below.

Want the complete kit with drip irrigation? Check out our Lazy Garden Kits!

Lazy Garden Ground Cover Includes:

fabric pins (32 pins: 15 ft x 20 ft) (40 pins: 15 ft x 30 ft)
pre-cut slits/X’s

Lazy Garden KitIf you are looking for an easy way to start your garden, you’ve found it! Our Lazy Garden Kit has everything you need to be successful at starting a new garden or making your current plot even better, including ground cover, customized drip irrigation system, and pins. The ground cover is a heavy-duty, woven polypropylene fabric that provides many years of reliable results, resistant to punctures, tears, and weed growth. It is formulated to resist UV degradation, the design allows air, water, and nutrients to pass through. There’s no need to cut or burn holes for your plants, this ground cover is a quick plant fabric with pre-cut slits for optimal plant spacing for your transplants or seeds. Two sizes are available: 15 ft x 30 ft or 15 ft x 20 ft. Fabric pins are provided.

Lazy Garden Kit 15′ x 20′ Includes:

1- Woven polypropylene fabric ground cover

72- fabric pins (for ground cover & irrigation components)

1 – 20 ft. Mainline Tubing

10- pre-cut drip lines –

10- goof plugs

10- transfer barbs

1 – Figure 8 end clamp

1 – 20 PSI Filter Regulator Combo

1 – Hole Punch

Lazy Garden Kit 15′ x 30′ Includes:

1- Woven polypropylene fabric ground cover

95- fabric pins (for ground cover & irrigation components)

1 – 30 ft. Mainline Tubing

15- pre-cut drip lines

15- goof plugs

15- transfer barbs

1 – Figure 8 end clamp

1 – 20 PSI Filter Regulator Combo

1 – Hole Punch

Drip Tape Irrigation Kit Requirements:

Water hose – connects to a 3/4″ water hose or 3/4″ spigot.

Pressure – PSI should be below 50 psi and 8 gallons per minute. Requires a flow rate between 0.4 to 8 gallons per minute. To calculate your flow rate, simply record the time (in minutes that it takes to fill a 5-gallon bucket with water. Then divide 5 by the time above to obtain your gallon-per-minute rate. For example, if it takes 30 seconds (0.5 minutes) to fill a 5-gallon bucket, your flow rate is 10 gallons per minute because:

5 gal / 0.5 min = 10 gal/min

Row length – Our tubing can be used on a maximum row length of 30 ft. at 20 psi. We don’t recommend using rows longer than 30 feet. If rows are too long, water will not be equally distributed throughout the tubing along the row.

Row number – With a flow rate of 5 gallons per minute, our tubing can support 300 feet of tubing. That’s the equivalent of 30 rows that are 10 feet long. To calculate how much tubing your system can support, first calculate your flow rate based on the example above. For example, if your flow rate is 8 gallons per minute, the maximum length of tape your system can support is 480 feet. The flow rate on the tubing is 0.5 gallons per emitter per hour. The emitter spacing is 6″. Flow rate per foot/1 gallon per hour.

Small Drip Irrigation KitOur Small Drip Irrigation Kit contains everything you need to water your small vegetable garden. Perfect for wanting to utilize drip irrigation, but have a small garden. Drip irrigation allows you to use less water while watering more effectively. This is because you are only placing water directly where your plants need it – at the roots. Because you’re not watering the leaves, disease pressure and pest pressure will be greatly reduced.

You will also have much fewer weeds between rows in your vegetable garden. With overhead watering, many areas of the garden are unnecessarily watered, which results in watering weed seeds and germinating weeds that you don’t want to grow. However, with drip irrigation, you only place water underneath or beside the plants and you don’t water those spaces between rows.

The Small Drip Irrigation Kit also makes it really easy to fertilize your garden while you water it, saving you time and energy. By installing a Fertilizer Injector between the spigot and your irrigation system, you can easily inject water-soluble fertilizer into your watering system so that you feed your vegetable plants while you water them.

Small Drip Irrigation Kit Includes:

1 – 30 ft. roll of mainline tubing

2 – 100 ft. roll 1/4 tubing with emitters

1 – 20 PSI Filter Regulator Combo

1 – Figure 8 End Clamp

1 – Green Hole Punch

10 – Transfer Barbs

10 – Goof Plugs

32 – garden pins

Small Drip Kit Irrigation Kit Requirements:

Water hose – connects to a 3/4″ water hose or 3/4″ spigot.

5 gal / 0.5 min = 10 gal/min

Products of the WeekLazy Garden Ground Cover

Lazy Garden Kits

Small Drip Irrigation Kit

Watch the full video on Youtube:https://youtu.be/W1qL25AC1Mg

View Details

Join Us! Tonight, we’re discussing seed starting for February! Let’s Grow Together!

It’s important to know when the last frost date is in your area, especially when you’re gardening in the cold of February, so that you can time when to start your seeds. This will differ depending on if you’re growing warm or cool season crops. Also, keep the frost date in mind so you can time when to plant. We recommend keeping a schedule so you can keep track of when you should plant and keep it handy this time of year!

Frost dates:Warm- seeds can be started indoors 6-8 weeks before the last frost date
Cool- seeds can be started indoors 10 to 12 weeks before the last frost date
Cool- seeds can be started outdoors 4-6 weeks before the last frost date

Zones 9 & 10Last frost date zone 9: February 15th
Last frost date zone 10: January 31st
Cool season, start outdoors: Broccoli, cabbage, onions, English peas, leafy greens, chard, spinach, kale, lettuce
Warm season: tomatoes, peppers, summer squash, cucumbers, melons, eggplant

Zone 7 & 8Last frost date zone 7: April 15th
Last frost date zone 8: March 15th
Indoors: Lettuce, Peppers, tomatoes, Onions, Celery, Flowers
Outdoors:
As transplants: Broccoli, cabbage, kale, onions
As seeds: Spinach, lettuce, Asian greens, swiss chard, beets, carrots, turnips, radishes, peas

Zones 5 & 6Last frost date zone 5: May 15th
Last frost date Zone 6: May 1st
Cool season, start Indoors (start 12 weeks before last frost date, around mid-February): Leafy greens, spinach, swiss chard, arugula, bok choy, kale, broccoli, cabbage, kohlrabi, brussels sprouts

Zones 3 & 4To garden in zones 3 and 4, you will need to have frost protection for your plants when they are ready to be transplanted outdoors because temperatures will be cold well past February.
Cool season, start indoors: leafy greens, spinach, swiss chard, arugula, bok choy, kale

Products of the WeekSeed Starting Supplies

Light Kits

Watch the Full Episode on Youtube:https://youtu.be/kaR812UEMk0

View Details

Join Us! Tonight, we’re discussing our new irrigation kits for the new year of 2023! Let’s Grow Together!

Raised Bed Irrigation Kit: Our Raised Bed Irrigation Kit contains everything you need to water your raised bed gardens in the most effective and environmentally friendly way. Drip irrigation allows you to use less water while watering more effectively. This is because you are only placing water directly where your plants need it – at the roots. Because you’re not watering the leaves, disease pressure and pest pressure will be greatly reduced. This kit will support 8 (4 ft. by 8 ft.) raised beds with 4 feet between them.

Raised Bed Irrigation Kit Includes:2- 100 ft. roll 1/4 tubing with emitters

1 – 20 PSI Filter Regulator Combo

1 – Figure 8 End Clamp

1 – Green Hole Punch

20 – Goof Plugs

10-transfer barbs

2 – 50 ft. 1/4″ tubing

40 – 1/4″ elbows

10 – 1/4″ flow valve

10 – 1/4″ tees

1 -30ft mainline tubing

100 – Tubing Stakes

10 – Garden Wire Pins

Raised Bed Irrigation Kit Requirements:Water hose – connects to a 3/4″ water hose or 3/4″ spigot.

5 gal / 0.5 min = 10 gal/min

Small Drip Irrigation Kit: Our Small Drip Irrigation Kit contains everything your need to water your vegetable garden in the most effective and environmentally friendly way. Drip irrigation allows you to use less water while watering more effectively. This is because you are only placing water directly where your plants need it – at the roots. Because you’re not watering the leaves, disease pressure and pest pressure will be greatly reduced.

Small Drip Irrigation Kit Includes:1 – 30 ft. roll of mainline tubing

1 – 100 ft. roll 1/4 tubing with emitters

1 – 20 PSI Filter Regulator Combo

1 – Figure 8 End Clamp

1 – Green Hole Punch

10 – Transfer Barbs

10 – Goof Plugs

32 – garden pins

Small Drip Kit Irrigation Kit Requirements:Water hose – connects to a 3/4″ water hose or 3/4″ spigot.

5 gal / 0.5 min = 10 gal/min

Seeder Repair Kit: Our Seeder Repair Kit includes everything you need to make your repairs on the Hoss Garden Seeder. It includes the seeder brush assembly, seeder chain, replacement gear set, seeder hopper, seeder hopper cap, and the seeder wooden cone. $40.99

Seeder Repair Kit Includes:1 – Seeder Brush Assembly – Replacement brush that sits inside the hopper of Hoss Garden Seeder and Seeder Attachment.

1 – Seeder Chain

1 – Replacement Seeder Gear Set (A & B) – Replacement gear set (A & B) for Hoss Garden Seeder and Seeder Attachment. These are the gears that sit underneath the hopper.

1 – Seeder Hopper

1 – Seeder Hopper Cap

1 – Seeder Wooden Cone

Supreme Plant Protection Cover: 1.5-ounce fabric that is ideal for protecting your flowering annuals, bedding plants, and/or vegetable gardens from severe cold, harsh winds, and freezing conditions. The protection cover keeps your plants warmer than the outside temperature and gives you peace of mind when those temps start to drop outside. The Plant Protection cover can also help lengthen harvest time and extend the flowering season. Two size variations are available: 6′ x 25′ or 6′ x 50′. Garden Pins Included. $29.99-$39.99

This pant cover is UV-treated fabric; its smart design is to keep plants protected in the summer and cooler months and allows ventilation to keep plants cool and protected. Reuse year after year, after using, the product can be rolled back onto the core and placed back in the plastic “sleeve” for storage. Our plant protection covers will include pins to properly stabilize your covers to the ground.

Products of the Week:Potatoes

Seeder Repair Kit

Raised Bed Irrigation Kit

Small Drip Irrigation Kit

Watch the Full Episode on Youtube:https://youtu.be/Ifu0qbceZxk

View Details

Spring Potato Planting 7 Types of Potatoes:

- - - - Russet + Red + White + yellow + Blue/Purple + Fingerling + Petite

Early, Midseason, Late Season Potatoes:

Early Season Potatoes will get to full maturity usually in than 90 days or less. Midseason Potato Varieties will take 100+ days to mature. Late Season Potatoes need 110 days or more to reach full maturity.

Determinate and Indeterminate Potatoes:

The difference between the two types is that indeterminate potatoes tend to grow upward and have multiple layers as the plant grows and more soil gets added around the plant. Indeterminate varieties are better suited for those who are choosing to grow your potatoes in containers.

Schedule by Zone

Soil temperature and maturation timing is extremely important in growing your potatoes. Ideally, you want to get your seeds in the ground 2-4 weeks before the last frost in Spring.

https://hosstools.com/wp-content/uploads/2021/12/Hoss-Zones-Chart-Animation.mp4Zone 10 January 15– 31
Zone 9 February 1 – 15
Zone 8 February 15– 28
Zone 7 March 1 – 15Zone 6 March 15 –31
Zone 5 April 1 – 30
Zone 4 April 15– May 15Zone 3 May

Growing Potatoes in Containers:Potatoes are very well suited to grow in containers and make an excellent choice for small space gardens. While the process of growing potatoes in containers is similar to that of in-ground or raised bed planting, there are some differences in the process.

Depending on the size of your container, fill it with 4-6 inches of prepared soil and place it in full sun. Your seed potatoes need a good bit of room to grow so be sure and get the correct plant spacing. For example, our 15 gallon root pouch can comfortably grow 4 potato plants and give the root structure plenty of room for a big harvest.

The same way that in-ground and raised bed planting requires hilling, container planted potatoes require the same treatment, called layering. As the plant grows, you will continually add soil to the top of the plant to cover the new stems at the bottom until the container is full of soil.

Check out our growing guide for more detailed information.Our Potato Varieties:Irish Cobbler Potato- Irish Cobbler Potato is an heirloom variety introduced in the 1870s. Great for mashed potatoes and potato soups! Brick-shaped potatoes with deep eyes. Determinate. Early season maturity, 80 days.

Red Norland Potato- Red Norland Potato is a “new potato” variety that has been selected for darker skin color and excellent storage. Great for boiling and roasting. Resistant to scab and late blight. Solanum tuberosum. Determinate. Early season, 85 days.

Kennebec White Potato- Kennebec White Potato is the gold standard for frying potatoes. Dark brown skin with ivory white interior. High starch content makes for great storage. A great all-around potato! Solanum tuberosum. Determinate. Mid season maturity, 90 days.

Yukon Gold Potato- Yukon Gold Potato is one of the most popular and versatile potato varieties. Medium to large-sized potatoes with tan skin and buttery-yellow flesh. Solanum tuberosum. Determinate. Mid season maturity, 100 days.

German Butterball Potato- German Butterball Potato is a medium to large russet-style potato with a buttery-yellow flesh. One of the best-tasting varieties you can grow. Excellent storage. Solanum tuberosum. Indeterminate. Late-season variety, 110-135 days.

Viking Potato- Viking Potato has a beautiful, mottled-red exterior with a creamy white interior. Compact plants produce loads of 2 lb potatoes that store very well. Solanum tuberosum. Determinate. Early season maturity, 90 days.

French Fingerling Potato- French Fingerling Potato is one of the best-tasting potatoes you’ll ever have. Elongated potatoes have red skin with a buttery-yellow inside that’s scattered with red flecks. Solanum tuberosum. Indeterminate. Mid to late season maturity, 100 days.

Austrian Crescent Potato- Austrian Crescent Potato is a large fingerling potato with a golden-yellow flesh that’s buttery and delicious. Potatoes may reach up to 10″ in length at full maturity. Solanum tuberosum. Indeterminate. Mid to late season, 90 days.

Purple Majesty Potato- Purple Majesty Potato couples beauty with exceptional flavor and texture. Widely-considered the best-tasting purple potato variety. High in antioxidants and great for you! Determinate. Early season maturity, 85 days.

Product of the WeekPOTATOES

CALCIUM NITRATE

ROOT POUCH- 45 GALLON

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:https://youtu.be/zw75tsoW670

View Details

It’s January! A new year and new gardening goals! Tonight, Greg and Sheila discuss more new products that are available on the website now, some upcoming new products, and what you should be doing or should you just be preparing. Let’s talk gardening in January. How to fight cabin fever! Let’s Grow Together!

Gardening In JanuaryGarden TasksGetting “cabin fever” is understandable this time of year. It’s cold outside, you’re stuck inside and you’re itching for spring! Don’t be fooled if there are a few warm days that pop up, you don’t want to get started too early. Figure out your planting dates: last frost date minus 6-8 weeks for transplants (consider germination time and hardening off). You’ll want to schedule out succession planting on a calendar rather than sowing everything all at once, sow a little at a time. A good rule of thumb is to spread out your zucchini, squash, cucumbers, etc. instead of having an explosion of vegetables all at once.

Can Anything Be Planted Now For An Early Spring Garden?Yes, you can grow now (depending on your zone, of course), we’re talking Zone 8 and higher here. From seed: mustards, turnips, and collards are a good choice! You can start more English and Snap peas, Cauliflower, Cabbage, Kohlrabi, or Broccoli to transplant.

Soil Testing, Review NotesYou’ll want to review any notes you took last year or from your growing season(s). What did well, what didn’t? What new varieties are you going to try this year? Check out our NEW FOR 2023 seeds!

Check Your InventoryAnother important tip – your seed inventory and prepare your order, some years there are seed shortages on certain crops so you want to make sure you order in time.

Prepare! Prepare!It’s time to start cleaning up that garden. You’ll want to cultivate, weed, and clean up. Top-dress the soil with organic matter/compost. Tarp it if needed and forget about it!

Product of the WeekSEED POTATOES

NEW FOR 2023

Hoss All-In-One Fertilizer

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:https://youtu.be/IYmWGAm4L2k

View Details

It’s now the beginning of 2023 and it’s the first episode of the year! To start us off right, we have some new seed varieties and collections this year!

New Seeds for 2023: + Hossinator Bell Pepper: is a hybrid, bell pepper variety with great disease resistance, has consistent production and is widely adapted to all growing regions. A great organic variety. It produces consistent yields of extra-large, uniform fruits that average 5″ long by 4″ wide. Fruits have a blocky appearance and thick walls. This variety produces large fruit and is a large plant type. Hossinator Bell Pepper is known for its continuous setting ability which makes it a great variety for long-term production throughout the warm growing season. Prolific plants have an extensive cover to protect fruits from sunburn. + Hossinator Slicer Cucumber: is a hybrid, great southern slicing cucumber with a comprehensive disease-resistance package. Extremely prolific. A great variety for both spring and fall. This slicing variety is resistant to just about any disease that could plague cucumbers. In addition to the disease resistance, the Hossinator Slicer has a vigorous, strong plant with hardy skin with fruits that average 8.4″ long and have an excellent texture and flavor. A refreshing choice for platters and salads, perfect for the home grower, and market gardeners. Hossinator Slicer Cucumber is a monoecious variety, meaning it produces both male and female flowers. + Hossinator Jalapeno Pepper: is a hybrid, moderate heat jalapeno pepper that offers growers a unique combination of size, quality, pungency, yield potential, and earliness. This variety produces very large fruit, and has moderate cracking; it is widely adaptive to most growing regions. This popular pepper has very consistent high fruit quality that delivers fruits with good size, smooth exterior with a dark green color. Plants will grow to 3-4′ tall and produce thick-walled fruits that are 3-4″ long. If left on the plant, fruits will mature from green to red. red jalapeños, which are also called “chipotles”, are more flavorful than the green fruits. + Texas Grano 502 Onion: is a short-day, open-pollinated variety that features white flesh and straw-colored skin. Its mild and sweet flavor gives it excellent eating quality and has been known as the “eat it like an apple” onion. It produces a large round, globe-shaped onion. The Texas Grano 502 grows especially well in Southern climates and is widely used for winter onion production. Sweet flavor and stores well for months. + Supersweet 100 Cherry Tomato: is an open-pollinated, indeterminate cherry variety that produces extremely, heavy clusters of super sweet cherry tomatoes. It is a favorite for home gardeners! Vigorous plants produce heavy yields of 1-1.5″ round cherry tomatoes that grow in clusters of 15-25. The clusters make these easy to harvest, although you’ll probably eat them all before you get inside! Plants are prolific and will continually produce tomatoes until the first frost in fall. These can be grown on a paneled trellis in a larger garden, but they also make a great patio plant. You can even plant them in a hanging pot and let them dangle towards the ground for easy harvesting. Great for snacking and salads! + Aspabroc Broccoli : also known as, broccolini in the produce section of your local grocery, resembles a broccoli raab with an asparagus-like stem and offers a sweet, mild taste and a slight peppery undertone. You get to capture the savory flavor of asparagus and broccoli in one plant; the whole plant is edible! This cut-and-come again, hybrid variety is easy to grow and requires very little space. Aspabroc is great for container growing. Great for roasting, boiling, sautéing, and steaming! 50-60 days to maturity. Aspabroc is a cross between two types of broccoli: Chinese Kale (or Gia Lan) and Italian Sprouting developed in the 1990s + Burgundy Broccoli: stunning, hybrid broccoli variety that has beautiful deep purple florets with pale green stems. This variety performs well when grown in the fall and early spring in northern, colder states. It also is a solid producer when overwintered throughout the fall and winter months in southern states. Grow it anywhere in the country with exceptional results! It’s tolerant of a wide arrange of temperatures. Burgundy is a sprouting broccoli variety; it creates one moderate to the small main head but then starts producing generous side shoots. Brassica oleracea.* 40 days to maturity. + Imperial Star Spinach: fast-growing, hybrid variety. This Asian type of spinach has smooth, medium-green leaves. Its relatively early maturity makes it a great spinach variety for succession planting throughout the cooler months. Imperial has an upright plant habit with strong sturdy petioles. Great spinach that will withstand colder temperatures with a low bolt tolerance. Great for the market farmer! Spinacia oleracea. 35 days to maturity + Black Oats: cover crop that works tremendously as a ground cover for weed suppression and nematode control. It is also known to be one of the best cover crops to grow for a beginner. Black Oats produce tons of biomass allowing it to break down quickly, and return valuable nutrients and organic particles back into the soil. This makes it a perfect cover crop to rotate before corn or other heavy-feeding vegetable crops. Black Oats make a great forager for livestock. Avena strigosa. 60 days to maturity + Southern Dolly (Flue Cured) Tobacco:* hybrid, flue-cured tobacco variety that was bred in North Carolina. Southern Dolly is rich in natural tannins which can create its distinct slightly sweet and mild flavor and aroma. A high-yield, medium to late maturing variety with excellent holding ability, with an orange-colored cure. Nicotiana tabacum. Pelleted. 66 days to maturity***.

Flue-cured tobacco tends to exhibit less mold than other types of tobacco; the term “flue-cured” tobacco refers to the type of curing barn used to dry, or cure, the tobacco leaves. Flue-curing barns contained a chimney-like flue with an externally-fed tinder box that allows the tobacco to dry out slowly without exposure to smoke.
+ **Shirey Dark Tobacco:**  open-pollinated, dark Virginian-type tobacco variety with a mild flavor – typically a richer flavor than Virginia Golds. It will produce a large leaf that air cures easily to medium brown color. Its hardy plant can reach up to 6 feet tall in height and withstand moderate to late season frosts. Shirey (sometimes pronounced as “Shirley”) is sweet-scented, produces ornamental flowers that are white to pink, and is wonderful for pollinators. *Nicotiana tabacum*. **Pelleted.** **65 days to maturity**
+ **Heritage Gold (Burley) Tobacco:** is one of the classic burley tobacco varieties, a medium to late maturity for light-air curing or drying, known for its extensive disease resistance package and strong yield. Among the most common tobacco variety cultivated today, Burley-type varieties do well in a wide range of climates. The growth habit of Heritage Gold is semi-upright. *Nicotiana tabacum*. **Pelleted.** **70 days to maturity**.
+ **Lemon Cutie Sunflower:** features loads of lemon-colored flowers, it won the Fleuroselect 2023 Gold Medal for Novelty! This sunflower is a unique, short-habit variety that will only reach around 1-2′ tall, creating a blanket of bright yellow in your garden. Use these to attract bees and other beneficial insects to your garden. The flowers are pollenless with the natural production of nectar for those pollinating insects. A semi-double flower that holds their freshness unusually long! Great for containers. *Helianthus annuus.* **55 Days to Maturity**
+ **Survival Seeds Collection:** premium assortment of 45 easy-to-grow seed varieties. It includes heirloom and open-pollinated varieties, from tomatoes, cover crops, beans, flowers, herbs, peas, squash, and so many more! The Survival Seed Collection is great for any gardener, beginner, or advanced. This kit has been curated for long-term storage from light, and moisture and to have a safety seed vault (just in case). Seed packets come in a large mylar (resealable) bag for safe and dry storage. **Includes 45 seed packs.** $181.56 Retail Value. $99.99
+ **Deluxe Medicinal Herb Collection:** hand-curated, comprehensive collection of premium herb seeds. This herb collection is a great starter collection for those who would like to get started in medicinal herb growing. You can continue to enjoy these herbs year after year. Each of the herbs in this collection has its own specific medicinal properties, each essential to every garden as well as attracting beneficial pollinators. In this deluxe collection, you will not only receive 10 medicinal herb seed packets, but you will also receive 10 heavy-duty, waterproof garden stakes, and 10 growing cards with information on each herb variety. Seeds are packed in a collectible tin that may be used for years.
+ **Premium Medicinal Herb Collection:** hand-curated, comprehensive collection of premium herb seeds. This herb collection is a great collection for those who would like to branch out in more unique varieties of medicinal herbs. You can continue to enjoy these herbs year after year. Each of the herbs in this collection has its own specific medicinal properties, each essential to every garden as well as attracting beneficial pollinators. In this deluxe collection, you will not only receive 9 medicinal herb seed packets, but you will also receive 9 heavy-duty, waterproof garden stakes, and 9 growing cards with information on each herb variety. Seeds are packed in a collectible tin that may be used for years.

How many tomato plants are our customers growing?We recently took a poll from our customers on how many tomato plants they’re currently growing. Check out below how many plants our customers grow:

| Plants | Customers | | --- | --- | | 6-12 Plants | 52 | | 13-20 Plants | 73 | | 21-30 Plants | 74 | | 31-40 Plants | 31 | | 41-50 Plants | 21 | | 51-100 Plants | 46 | | 101-200 Plants | 20 | | 201-300 Plants | 3 | | 301-400 Plants | 1 | | Greater than 500 Plants | 3 |

Product of the WeekPOTATOES PRE-ORDER

SURVIVAL SEEDS COLLECTION

HOSSINATOR SERIES

TOBACCO SEEDS

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:https://youtu.be/9lZn4pvyOzI

View Details

It’s getting cooler, even where we are in Zone 8b in SW Georgia. We’re getting ready for Christmas and still harvesting from the garden. Tonight, we’re discussing some of our favorite cold-tolerant plants to grow in the garden. There are those that are cold-tolerant but can’t survive a hard frost, there are those that can do both. Let’s discuss and grow together!

Things To Keep In Mind When Growing Cold-Tolerant Plants* Know the Average Frost Date for your zone (USDA site) light frost 34-32, hard frost below 32 (water in those cells turns to ice, which expands and bursts the cell walls of the plant, plants look sad and wilted) * Variables that can affect: Wind, Humidity, size of the plant, soil moisture, mulching, row covers * Soil Moisture: water has high specific heat and takes more energy to freeze water, dry soil is the enemy. * Size of Plant: more mature plants and those that harden off do better. * Mulching can protect the plants as well row covers can make them colder tolerant and protect them from freeze damage. * Some will become sweeter and more delicious when they go through a frost.

Plants That Will Not Survive A FrostBasil, beans, corn, cucumbers, eggplant, melons, okra, peppers, potatoes, pumpkins, summer squash, sweet potatoes, tomatoes, and tomatillos.

Most Cold-Tolerant Plants: Hard FrostWhile we know that there are many plants that we can’t grow in the colder months (list above) due to the risk of frost but there are quite a few vegetables that you can grow and will survive cold weather! Check out the list below!

Carrots – roots are more tolerant than tops. Carrot roots can take down to 0 degrees, while the tops can take down to 18 degrees. You’ll want to mulch for more protection. Fun fact: the cooler temps make the roots sweeter.
Garlic – they actually really need cold temperatures and can take down to 0 degrees.
Beets/Chard – these vegetables can take down to 15 degrees
Brussels Sprouts – can handle temps down to 0 degrees, these also need cold temperatures
Collards – this truly depends on the variety, some varieties can tolerate down to 0 degrees
Spinach – spinach can take temperatures down to 20 degrees.
Leeks, Chives & Parsnips – these two varieties can also take temps down to 0 degrees
Onions – short-day onions can take temperatures down to 20 degrees, except for Walla-Walla or green onions, which can take much colder temps
Kale – most, if not all, Kale varieties can take temps down to 10 degrees
Kohlrabi – kohlrabi can take down to 15 degrees

Moderate Cold/Frost Tolerant Broccoli & Cauliflower will do ok with moderate cold temps but the heads can get spongy at times. If the heads are present. you will need to cover or harvest. Cabbage can take up to lows of 25 degrees, the heads have been known to bust if it freezes. The following varieties are great in moderately cold temperatures, cilantro, mustard, turnips, rutabagas, radishes, fava beans, and some lettuces that are bread for cold tolerance.

Cover CropsOur most cold-tolerant cover crop is Winter Rye, this variety can tolerate temperatures bottoming out at -30 degrees!! Frosty Berseem Clover is another variety that can survive pretty harsh temps of -20 degrees in the winter months. Hairy Vetch can typically handle down to -15 degrees, Australian Winter peas down to -10 degrees, Crimson Clover down to 0 degrees, and Daikon Radish down to 10 degrees.

Product of the WeekGIFT CERTIFICATES

SEED POTATOES

COVER CROPS

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:https://youtu.be/HPgvS8BGMIA

View Details

Tonight, we’ve got Ryan Thiessen of Thiessen Tillage on the show. Thiessen Tillage is our Canadian Dealer, if you are in Canada, be sure to order your garden tools from them for quick delivery. (link below) Hoss and Ryan are talking about gardening in Canada and the differences, the best garden tools to use, and much more! Let’s Grow Together!

Thiessen Tillage Equipment – Gardening In CanadaAre you gardening in Canada and want some Hoss garden tools? Check out our Canadian Dealer! Thiessen Tillage

Tilmor Farm EquipmentRyan also works with Tilmor (which is a fairly new company) in developing farming and tillage equipment for the small farmer, as well as the home gardener. He develops most of the implements for the larger equipment at Tilmor and Thiessen Tillage is a dealer of Tilmor Equipment. Be sure to check out their website!

What Is A Power Ox? Because the Power Ox 240 is the next generation of two-wheel tractors, it is designed with the small farmer in mind. Its spotlight features are a throttle control handle, Honda GX120 Engine, and a robust drive system. It has a 13.5″ ground clearance, quick handle height adjustment, and 4″ wide bar tires. It has three-width settings on the main frame. Hoss has a Power Ox and highly recommends them. It has got a great cultivation experience. Check it out here!

The finger weeder is an attachment for the Power Ox walk-behind tractor, plus it is the newest attachment that is used a lot in organic farming. Specifically designed for in-row cultivation and it uproots small and just emerging weeds. The attachment is suitable for most small crops planted in rows with (at least) 9 inches between each row and it is very effective on light to medium-heavy clay soils. It is also best when combined with implements such as vegetable knives or spyders that run in front. The weeder attachment has a ground-engaging steel drive plate that turns the flexible polyurethane fingers at a faster speed. Check it out here!

Product of the WeekSEED POTATOES

WHEEL HOES

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:https://youtu.be/lPnKS3OrxQA

View Details

With Christmas on the way, we know this can be a stressful time of year for many reasons. Don’t let gift-giving be one of those reasons. Let’s talk gifts for gardeners. We’ve got so many ideas for you for the gardener in your life. There’s something for everyone! Get Dirty!

Gifts For GardenersRoot Pouch Grow BagsRoot Pouch Grow Bags are seriously the best grow bags we’ve found and used. They’re made from recycled plastic water bottles, the best part – is they’re reusable, UV-resistant, BPA-free, and non-toxic! Plus they come in several different sizes! Don’t have the land to grow? Grow in grow bags! Check them out!

Push Pull Hoe With its unique V-shaped design, this garden hoe allows you to weed more effectively and efficiently with a push-pull motion. MADE IN THE USA $74.99

Garden HodThe Garden Hodis a multifunctional harvesting bucket that allows you to harvest and rinse your vegetables all in one container. Constructed with weather-resistant wood and heavy-duty mesh wire. MADE IN THE USA! $59.99

Pruning ShearsOur Hoss Pruning Shears are simply the best! Perfect for trimming fruit trees, pruning vegetable and flower plants, and harvesting thick-stemmed vegetables like winter squash or pumpkins. Super-sharp blade with locking aluminum handles, a shock absorption system, and a sap groove to prevent the blade from sticking. $39.99

TubTrug Bundle (4 pack)The TubTrug Bundle is a collection of our favorite UV-resistant, virtually indestructible harvesting containers. Includes TubTrug Colander, Medium TubTrug, Small TubTrug, and Mini Shallow Tubtrug. Colors may vary. $69.99**

Hoe Dag Tool KitOur Hoe Dag Tool Kit includes everything you need to plant, weed, and cultivate your raised bed or container garden. Includes the Hoe Dag, Hand Rake and Hand Shovel. All tools have high-carbon steel blades, and seasoned hardwood handles and are built to last a lifetime! $89.99

Complete Fermentation KitThe Complete Fermentation Kit has everything you need to start fermenting your own vegetables today. Includes Pickle Packer Jar Tamper, Pickle Pipe Fermentation Lids, Pickle Pebble Fermentation Weights, and Instructional Booklet. $59.99

Seed CollectionsPollinator, Herb, Heirloom, Cool Season, Fresh Salad, Cog Hill Farm Sunflower Collection.

Light KitsKitchen Garden Light Kit: $99.99

Indoor Seed Starting Light Kit: $199.99

Microgreen Indoor Starter Kit: $276.99

Hanging Grow Light Kit: $199.99

Seed Starting Kits24 Cell Seed Starting Kit: $39.99

48 Cell Seed Starting Kit:$49.99

Deluxe Seed Starting Kit: $74.99

Premium Seed Starting Kit: $109.99

Product of the WeekLight Kits

Pruners

Seed Collections

Root Pouch Grow Bags

Garden Hod

Push Pull Hoe

Complete Fermintation Kit

Hoe Dag Tool Kit

Seed Starting Kits

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:https://youtu.be/YW_-iDDkcOY

View Details

December is arguably the quietest month in the garden but there is still much to do and prepare for. Tonight, we’re discussing December garden chores, what you can be planting, our garden updates, and more. Let’s Grow Together and talk about Gardening In December.

Gardening in December Prune and TrimIf you have fruit trees, bushes, shrubs, or roses, now’s the time to cut off dead branches and trim for shape. It’s easier to see what and where to prune in the winter when there’s less foliage.

Protect Fragile PlantsMost plants can weather the colder months just fine, but some need a layer of added protection. Spring-blooming shrubs such as azaleas and rhododendron, fragile blooms including dahlias, and citrus trees are some plants that could use an extra layer in the winter.

MulchGardeners add mulch in the spring to prevent weeds and lock in moisture, but mulch is also important in the winter. A layer of straw as mulch protects the soil from temperature fluctuations so that the ground stays frozen—and the plants.

Continue To CompostYes, decomposition slows down in winter, but there’s no reason to stop composting. When warm weather rolls around, your compost will start cooking again.

Turn Off SprinklersTo prevent frozen pipes, shut off the water supply to the sprinklers. If you have an automatic irrigation system, shut down the controller. Make sure to empty and store hoses so they don’t crack from freezing temperatures.

Order SeedsCompanies start sending out seed catalogs or putting their new seed varieties on their websites around December, just in time for some couch gardening! Make sure you spend time planning out your spring garden, then get a head start by actually ordering those seeds before they run out.

Prepare Your ToolsTake inventory of all your gardening tools. Replace or fix broken items, clean tools, and sharpen blades. When warmer weather rolls around, you’ll be ready to roll.

Plant Flowers/Trees/Fruit TreesPansies, violas, cyclamen, ivy, and heather are all great plants for a winter display. Sweet Peas can be sown from October to March. Planting them now gives you a better chance of having strong healthy plants when spring arrives. If you’d like to add some roses to your garden, bare-root plants are a cost-effective way to do it – and now’s the ideal time of year to get hold of them. You can plant bare-root roses from November to March, while they are in their dormant phase. Plant Bare Root, blackberries, blueberries, and Hedges: early winter is a good time to plant bare-root trees and hedges, as this is when they are in a dormant state. You can also plant pot-grown trees now. You can also grow herbs indoors throughout winter.

Product of the WeekLight Kits

Pruners

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:https://youtu.be/XTuuW_E1iNk

View Details

Why are we talking about native plants? Well, we took a quick trip up the road from us to the Agrirama in Tifton, Georgia. We met with the President, Mary Alic Applegate, of the Coastal Plain Chapter. Their mission is to educate the public about the importance of native plants to our health and well-being as well as to pollinators and other wildlife. They also strive to promote the conservation and preservation of our native plant habitats by encouraging the planting of native plants in landscapes, woodlands, parks, and gardens. Let's talk about the importance of native plants. https://cpcgnps.org/

What is a Native Plant?

Those plants which have inhabited a particular region for thousands of years are arguably plants that were present in a particular area prior to European settlement. Grown naturally in a particular region without direct or indirect human intervention.

Why Choose Native Plants?

low-maintenance

eco-friendly to your area

easy to grow

easy to get (local nurseries)

Why Establish Native Plant/Wildflower Areas?

Native plants support native insects like butterflies, moths, and bees in ways that non-native plants cannot – through the food chain. Native insects, in turn, help bring in more native birds, lizards, toads, and turtles.

. Wildflowers and native plant areas help support crop pollinators when crops are not in the fields. This has a major impact on our farming communities.

Whether you are designing a new landscape or renovating your existing landscape, there is a wide array of native plants for every location and each landscape situation. By planting native plants, you not only will be perpetuating ecological diversity and providing wildlife habitat, but you will also be leaving a living legacy to your children and future generations.

Benefits of Native Plants

Native plants are healthier and stronger. They help the environment and help create wildlife habitats in your backyard. Most of them are low maintenance and add splendor to your landscape. With so many colors, textures, varying heights, and bloom times; it can give a stunning display over multiple seasons.

Product of the Week

Onion Plants

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/qcqeFhTuLTY

View Details

Our short-day onion plants have officially arrived at Hoss HQ!! Since we are starting to ship out our onion bundles, we feel like this is a relevant topic, yet again! Knowing the type of onion to grow, spacing, irrigation, and more, it's all about onions tonight!

Grow The Right Onions For Your Area

Short day (bulbs when day length reaches 10-12 hours)

Intermediate (bulbs when day length reaches 12-13 hours)

Long day (bulbs when day length reaches 14-16 hours)

Onion Phases

In the vegetative phase where they are producing green leaves, all energy is focused on growing the green tops

Bulbing phase: when the day length reaches a certain length, they start bulbing.

All About Onions - Nutrient Inputs

Before transplanting: Complete Organic fertilizer

2 weeks post planting: 20-20-20

4 weeks post planting: 20-20-20 and micro boost - Alternating with Ammonium Sulfate

Bulbing: stop fertilizers

3 Big Secrets To Big Sweet Onions

Water requirements/irrigation

Nutrition:

Plant the right type for your area

*Keep weeds under control, b/w rows with wheel hoe weekly

*Between plants with Single time cultivator.

*Sulfur gives the plant the onion flavor

Correct amount of water gives them the sweetness

CHECK OUT OUR ONION-GROWING GUIDE!

Product of the Week

Onion Plants

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q5xcFc_ifIA

View Details

It's November! What should you be doing in the garden this month? Is there anything to even be doing? Let's talk gardening in November, based on your zone you may need a more ardent winterizing strategy than others. You should always know your hardiness zone! Find it here at Hoss University.

The Basics of Gardening In November - for every zone

Bring tender plants inside, and cover vulnerable plants (remember to take off when the threat of frost passes so they do not overheat)

Clean out annual vegetables and flowers. Some may harbor disease, pests, and funguses. Many bacteria and pest eggs can overwinter in debris, and they will take over your healthy plants once spring arrives.

Remove weeds: Like plants, weeds left in the garden through winter can host many pests eggs, and pathogens.

Soil Test:

Nutrients: Lime, Potassium, Phosphorus, Nitrogen

Amend your soil for Spring: Manure, compost, and organic fertilizers

Plant Cover Crops: Helps prevent soil erosion, break up compacted areas, increase levels of organic matter, add nutrients

Replenish Mulch: Helps regulate soil temperatures and moisture, and protects crops from frost, added mulch breaks down, and incorporates fresh organic material into the soil.

Tarp

Clean and Sharpen Tools:

Shut off irrigation systems when a freeze is indicated

Zone 9

The weather is mild in USDA plant hardiness zone 9, and gardeners can grow nearly any delicious vegetable without the worry of hard winter freezes. All of November: Still plant your cold crops: Brassicas(transplants), Direct seed Spinach, Mustard, Turnips, Carrots, Beets, Radishes, Rutabagas, English Peas, lettuce, Kohlrabi, Kale, Strawberries, Elephant Garlic, Onion Starts, Plant till the end of November.

USDA Zone 8

First of November: Still plant your cold crops: Brassicas(transplants), Direct seed Spinach, Mustard, Turnips, Carrots, Beets, Radishes, Rutabagas, English Peas, lettuce, Kohlrabi, Kale, Strawberries, Elephant Garlic, Onion Starts, Plant till end of November. Cover Crops

Zone 7

Cole crops like Brussels sprouts, cabbage, broccoli, collards, and kale are made sweeter by frost so harvest them as long as possible. You can also use a cold frame or put up a low tunnel to extend the season. Last chance to plant garlic!

Be ready with blankets/ floating row cover fabric for covering lettuce and other half-hardy crops during the first hard freeze.

The end of the month should be consistently cold enough to start applying a 2-4” layer of protective mulch

Zone 6

First of November sow seeds directly outdoors for spinach, and Swiss Chard. Winterize irrigation systems, Frost protection material on hand.

Product of the Week

Onion Plants

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/AOFcgGiZMIc

View Details

Tonight we're joined by a special guest and friend, Pieter. Pieter has worked in the seed industry for many years and tonight, we will discuss everything peppers! From the different types of peppers, seed germination tips, soil media information, transplanting tips, and so much more! We're going to even debunk some "pepper myths"! If you want expert pepper gardening tips - you found them!

Different Types of Peppers

Bell Pepper

Bell peppers are the most commonly grown and used by home gardeners. Every bell pepper will turn to a color - depending on the variety, most green bell peppers will turn red. It depends on when you harvest them as well. Knowing when to harvest is important, with green bell peppers you'll want the fruit to be firm. You can touch it and know if your bell peppers are mature. Red, yellow, and orange bell peppers are sweeter in taste.

Poblano Pepper

Just like the bell pepper, you will want to harvest it once it is firm. The poblano pepper plants can get medium to large in size, they will need room to grow. Poblano peppers tend to range from 4" to 6" long once mature.

Anaheim Pepper

Anaheim peppers tend to be only mildly spicy in flavor but can surprise you! They're smaller in size but look similar to the poblano pepper. They can range anywhere from 6" to 10" in length at the mature stage. They are popular in Northern Africa and are mostly harvested when green.

Serrano Pepper

Did you know that Serrano peppers are more widely used in Mexico than Jalapenos from a culinary perspective? It has an immediate heat, you want to harvest and consume when green. Harvest between 1" to 4" in length. It is a smaller version of the well-known jalapeno variety.

Habanero Pepper

We're taking it up a notch with the heat! There are so many different varieties of habanero peppers. Fun tip: choose a hybrid variety - you'll get a quicker harvest! Typically, the habanero pepper will get 1" to 2.5" in length depending on the variety you grow. Harvest once the fruit is red or orange.

Cayenne Pepper

Their origin is from Nothern Africa. There are longer, skinnier types and thicker varieties. The most common size once harvested is between 2" to 5" in length. The scoville heat units for the cayenne are 30,000 to 50,000 units. Mainly used when making hot sauces.

Rocoto Pepper

Originating from South America, it's also called an "apple pepper" due to its shape and color. Rocoto peppers are not overwhelmingly hot, scoville scale puts them around 30,000 to 75,000. Extremely flavored and should be tried by everyone at least once!

Peri Peri

Another pepper originating from Africa, the Peri Peri registers at 300,000 scoville units. If you like a pepper with a quick, stinging bite... this is for you! This type has a large plant but small peppers... alot of peppers! They only get 3/4" to 1 1/4" in length.

Pepper Seed Germination - Expert Pepper Gardening Tips

Germinating peppers can be a challenge for any gardener. Peppers take longer to germinate, so be patient. When starting pepper seeds, you always want to use a new, good soil media, one that does not hold a lot of moisture. Heat is very important when it comes to starting pepper seeds. Use a heat mat! 85 -90 degrees is the best temperature for germination. Always make sure you do not overwater! The hotter the pepper, the longer it takes to germinate.

Growing Tips: Common Insects, Common Diseases

Peppers can be susceptible to insect damage and a lot of different diseases. With the proper selection of disease-resistant varieties and a good pest control program, you can have success in growing healthy peppers. Some common pepper plant pests are thrips, hornworms, aphids, stink bugs, whiteflies, flea beetles, cutworms, and spider mites. Bug Buster II can treat all of these pests.

Organic controls for common diseases include crop rotation and select resistant varieties. Peppers are susceptible to bacterial wilt and spot,

View Details

It's that time of year again, we always get excited when it's time for growing strawberries at home. Don't have a big garden? You can grow them too! Tonight, we give you tips on how you should be growing strawberries in-ground, in containers, towers, and much more!

Growing Strawberries At Home

Yes, there are many ways to grow strawberries at home. We've tried both in-ground and in containers, and both did well BUT did one do better than the other? Growing strawberries throughout the fall and winter months, you can grow them in USDA Hardiness Zones 6-10. Zone 6, you should plant earlier, in September to get them well established before the cold hits. In Zones 7 & 8, plant in October, and in Zones 9 & 10, plant in late October or November.

The TWO Major Struggles With Growing Strawberries

Weeds - They tend to take over. Using a good hand tool like the push-pull hoe is a great option for raised beds. Birds - keep the birds off the berries! Use netting or some type of cover. A fellow gardener told us she painted rocks to look like strawberries, when the birds "tried" the rocks, they realized this isn't edible, so they eventually left the actual fruit alone once it started producing. We may try that in our raised beds this year!

Soil & Fertilizer Requirements

Always check to make sure your pH levels are between 6.0 and 6.5. Don't stress if it's off a little. Fertilize heavy up-front, and give them plenty of food early on. Visit Hoss University for more information on fertilizer. (link below) Add complete organic about 1 week before planting.

For more information like spacing and irrigation, visit the Hoss Strawberry Growing Guide!

CHECK OUT THE STRAWBERRY GROWING GUIDE!!

Product of the Week

Elephant Garlic

Onion Plants

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/TUUSlwU3dW4

View Details

We went to Front Royal, Virginia a few days ago to the Homesteaders of America conference. We were blessed to be able to visit with old and new friends. We got to meet with some of our affiliates that attended and met new homesteaders, customers, and even fans of Hoss Tools.

Homesteaders of America

Greg and Sheila both agreed that it was a truly magical and heartwarming experience to be able to meet and see everyone at the Homesteaders of America Conference. “We were surrounded by so many great, knowledgable people – from YouTubers, Affiliates, and Hoss Tools Family, we are truly blessed.”, Greg Says. “It was so heartwarming to be able to hug, shake hands, share stories, and finally meet a lot of these people we’ve known for years face to face and also add to our Hoss Tools family.”, Sheila added. We took a lot of our affiliates that were there out to dinner and had a wonderful time with everyone. They have given us much advice on how to get started in raising pigs.

4 Kids and A Farm

Rachel and Aaron, from Northern California, and have 4 amazing kids. Aaron is a nurse, he could not say enough about Rachel and how she has such a major role in their homestead. We had a wonderful time talking to them and their commitment to raise their own food and be self-sustainable. They love to garden and share their knowledge about raising pigs, sheep, goats, and chickens. Plus, being in northern California, they get to grow year-round! Give them a follow here!

Whispering Willow Farm

Jill and Nathan are from rural Arkansas. She is a self-taught gardener, which is so amazing to see in a new generation. They have recently purchased Roots and Refuge farm and are growing quickly. Sheila really enjoys watching her videos, Jill is down to earth and has the most calming voice. Give them a follow!

Stivers Homestead

Zack and Gen are from the Appalachian Mountains in Kentucky. We also had the pleasure of meeting their daughter Ray Ray. They have a passion for preserving food, raising animals, homesteading, and gardening. They are known for their Calendula Salve! Great stuff. They also have an Airbnb. Tons of animals, including Kune Kune pigs. Y’all should check them out!

2 Quacks & 5 Clucks Farm

Scott is one of our newest affiliates, mainly on TikTok. Scott and his wife are from Virginia. We thoroughly enjoyed meeting him. He is extremely knowledgeable in gardening and has a big following. He teaches you the easy ways to garden and gives you the skills you need. They have pasteurized chickens and a growing garden! Give him a follow!

The Honeystead

Kaylee from Quail Hollow Farm is a beekeeper, gardener, and forager. On her farm, she has chickens, goats, cows, honeybees, and pigs. She is extremely knowledgeable in beekeeping and has a wealth of knowledge of herbs. She spoke at the conference as well, her topic was “How to keep your bees alive and healthy through the winter.” If you are wanting to get into beekeeping, Kaylee is the one to follow!

https://hosstools.com/hoss-tools-university/

Product of the Week

Elephant Garlic

Onion Plants

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/BWlXXOtj_BA

View Details

Carrots come in all shapes and sizes. From the small Chantenay type to the long, straight Imperator type carrot; will they grow in your garden? We’re reviewing what types of carrots work best in what specific types of soils, and how to be successful growing carrots this season! GET DIRTY! So, are you growing the right carrots for your soil type?

Tips For Growing Carrots: The Right Carrots For Your Soil Type

You need a sunny spot, with plenty of organic matter, free of weeds, clumps, debris, and rocks. Your soil should have good drainage. Fine tilth is the desired consistency.

2 weeks prior to planting: Add complete organic fertilizer work soil every couple of daysbegin watering to condition the soil.

Water before you mark off your rows. Plant ¼ inch deep. Very Shallow, cover with soil and water gently.

Keep soil moist until seeds germinate (usually 10-20 days) Moist throughout the germination process. Carrots take longer than most crops to germinate. Thin out in Stages, weed regularly, and water minimally after germination. Planting them thicker will help weed suppression, but will need to thin out later. Since they take longer to germinate, weeds can quickly take over outpacing the sprouts. Must stay on top of weeds.

Shapes and Types of Carrots

Nantes: Blunt, great for storage, uniform and fits well into jars, almost perfectly cylindrical and smooth, great for juicing and fresh eating. Need loose, well-draining garden soil.Danvers: Bugs bunny type, broad shoulders fairly sharp taper, classic medium length.Chantenay: Short stubby, great for hard or clay soils, short, conical roots that can power through clay and rocky soils.Imperator: long slender, can pack a lot of these in small space, long roots up to 10 inches (baby carrots found in stores) Need loose deep soil.

Hard, Clay Soils, Muck Soil

Part 1

Scarlet Nantes Carrot is a widely-adapted variety that works great in many soil types. Great for full-size or baby carrot production. Crisp texture and sweet flavor. Broad shoulders and blunt ends. It has a cylindrical shape with very little tapering from top to bottom. This variety is well-adapted and performs nicely in a wide variety of soil types, including harder, clay soils. Envy Carrot is a hybrid variety that produces 10-12″, bright-orange carrots that grow well even in clay or muck soils. Kuroda Carrot is an heirloom, chantenay-type carrot known for its exceptional sweetness and ability to be grown in hard or rocky soils.

Purple Elite Carrot is a hybrid, imperator-type carrot that produces tapered, 7-9″ carrots. Carrots have a distinct coloration with a purple exterior and a bright yellow core Chantenay Royal Carrot is an heirloom, open-pollinated variety that works great in heavy or clay soils. produces uniform carrots that are thick and chunky. Orange Blaze is a high-yield carrot that is adaptable across multiple soil conditions, muck, mineral, and deep peat. Easy to harvest, average length 9-10″ with a very smooth skin texture and bright orange color.

Part 2

The Oxheart Carrot is an open-pollinated heirloom variety that hails originally from France. The stout roots have a distinct heart shape and feature a bright orange flesh and have a mild crisp texture despite their hefty size. These massive carrots have been known to weigh as much as one pound each and measure between 5-6”. This is a great variety for gardeners with heavy soils or clay soils that might usually present struggles for carrot growers.

Malbec Carrot is a hybrid variety. It produces smooth, uniform 10″ long roots. A great texture with strong tops that have good tolerance to blight and bolting. A beautiful medium red in color, the small core allows consistent, rich internal color for multiple ends uses, including marketing as whole roots, sliced, or mini carrots. Danvers 126 Carrot is an open-pollinated variety with broad shoulders and a sharp taper. Performs well in all soil types.

View Details

Garlic is one of the easiest crops to grow in the home garden. You can plant a large amount in a small space, it doesn’t have many pests or diseases, and it loves cold weather. In fact, it’s so simple to grow that you can plant it and basically forget about it until you harvest it nine months later. Let's discuss choosing the right garlic to grow!

It's the perfect vegetable for beginning gardeners because it's so forgiving; start searching early as garlic tends to sell out rather quickly. Most of the world's garlic is grown in China, and most of the garlic grown in the United States is in California. There are over 700 cultivated varieties in the world.

History On Garlic

In ancient times Garlic was celebrated as a source of great strength. Greek Olympians ate before competitions, Roman soldiers ate before battle, and during WW2 when penicillin was a shortage, was used on soldiers' wounds to prevent infection. Today considered a superfood, stimulating the immune system and helping to fight disease. Chemical Allicin:

Reduces Blood PressureLowers CholesterolContains AntioxidantsBoost immune system

Because of the combination of heart-related benefits and antioxidants, has been said to help with the prevention of Alzheimer's and dementia. (One clove twice a day)

Types Of Garlic - Choosing The RIGHT Garlic To Grow

Hard Neck Garlic

Forms cloves around the center of the stalk have a central core. Easier to peel, Ideal for Northern climates and cold, harsher winters. Does not braid well due to the hard stalk. More Flavorful. Because the outer paper on the bulb is thinner, they won’t store as long as soft neck garlic. It creates a scape that's great for stir fry, and pesto. You need to cut this off when appears so energy will go to the bulb and not to the flower.

German White garlic is a very large hard neck, porcelain type botanically classified as Allium sativum. This variety is widely grown for both its garlic scapes, which are false flower stalks that can be eaten as vegetables, and for their silvery white, papery bulbs. German White garlic is sometimes called Northern White garlic and German Extra-Hardy. German White garlic is believed to be native to northern Germany. It is a very hardy variety and grows best in climates with cooler winters, though it will grow well in any climate. Differences in the growing environment will have a direct impact on the size of the cloves.

Soft Neck Garlic

The mild flavor usually has more cloves but is smaller. Ideal for milder winters and fewer chill hours. Most commonly found in Grocery stores. The garlic that most of us cook with is the soft neck, so called because its neck is soft and braid-able. Soft neck garlic contains a circle of plump cloves shrouding the second circle of smaller cloves, all enveloped by many papery layers. Longer storage life, due to more layers of paper. It can be stored for up to a year. Drainage biggest issue with soft neck, needs well-drained soil, wet feet in cold wet winter causes damage

Elephant Garlic

Not really garlic, but technically and botanically a leek. Looks like giant garlic. Super mild flavor, less medicinal, more bang for your buck. The very mild flavor is ideal for soups, salads, and sauces leaving no garlic aftertaste. The cloves are milder and sweeter than true garlic varieties and have a yellow hue. Elephant garlic can have the flavor of onion and leeks mixed with soft notes of garlic.

Growing Tips & Tricks - Choosing The RIGHT Garlic To Grow

How much garlic to plant

(1 bulb = 8 cloves or 8 plants, 8 bulbs – 68 plants) If you think you use one garlic bulb a week, then you might want to grow around 65 bulbs. Enough for 1 per week and some to replant in the fall.

When to plant garlic

USDA Zone 3 – plant in early to late SeptemberZones 3b to 5b – plant in late Sept. to early Oct.Zones 5b to 7b – plant in mid to late Oct.Zones 7b to 9b – plant in late Oct. to Nov.

View Details

Since it is almost onion planting time, we decided to take our top 10 onion growing questions that are usually asked by viewers, customers, or fellow gardeners. Why are onions a great crop for homesteaders and home gardeners? They're low maintenance, rarely have any pest or disease pressure, and they have great storage! One key tip is to know what type of onion you need to be growing for your zone, short, intermediate, or long-day onions. Don't know? Check out our onion map!

10 - Acorn Squash

Acorn squash is a semi-bush plant that grows well in compact spaces. Our acorn winter squash varieties are Table Ace, Table King, Taybelle PM, and Reno Acorn.

9 - Red Kuri

Red Kuri is an open-pollinated, hubbard-squash type with orange, teardrop-shaped fruits that are great for soups, pies, and bread. Each plant produces 2-3 fruits.

8 - Georgia Candy Roaster

The North Georgia Candy Roaster is a big one! This variety is an open-pollinated heirloom that is extremely prolific and produces fruit that has a nutty, mild sweet buttery flavor. One squash has been known to make up to 3 pies!

7 - Kabocha

Kabocha Squash is an open-pollinated variety that is hailed by many as one of the best-tasting squash of all time. Not only does the yellow/orange flesh have a wonderful nutty, sweet flavor but the dark emerald skin is also edible. This Japanese pumpkin is a prolific early maturing variety that produces 3-4 lb. fruits.

6 - Hoss Butternut Squash

Hoss Butternut Squash is a hybrid with improved productivity and more uniformly shaped fruits. Vigorous vines produce heavy yields of 5-6 lb fruits. Hoss Butternut Squash has a less-pronounced bulb and fruits are more uniform from top to bottom than traditional butternut squash. This ensures more flesh or meat per fruit. Fruits have rich orange flesh with excellent flavor and texture.

5 - South Anna Butternut Squash

South Anna Butternut Squash is a stabilized cross between Waltham Butternut Squash and Seminole Pumpkin. This open-pollinated variety has the shape of butternut squash with the vigor and disease-resistance of a Seminole Pumpkin.

4 - Spaghetti Squash

Our Primavera spaghetti squash is a hybrid with great fruit uniformity and consistency than open-pollinated varieties. Semi-bush plants with concentrated fruits.

3 - Algonquian

Algonquian Squash is a Native American heirloom originally grown by the Abenaki tribes of New England. Produces loads of 3-5 lb fruits on semi-compact vines. Sweet and savory!

2 - Delicata

Delicata Winter Squash is noted for its high sugar content and sweet flavor. Vining growing habit that makes the excellent ground cover to suppress weeds. It's one of the sweetest winter squashes you can grow.

1 - Sweet Dumpling

Sweet Dumpling Squash has delicate flesh with a wonderfully sweet flavor. Easy to prepare and great for stuffing. Average 8-10 fruits per plant. Hoss' favorite winter squash is the Sweet Dumpling variety.

Product of the Week:

Winter Squash

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/ZSkO15kxh7M

View Details

Last week we discussed fertilizers, this week it's time to talk about pest control. What is a pesticide, what are the benefits of using them, and are there different types of pest control? Tonight we discuss synthetic and organic methods of controlling those pests in your vegetable garden.

What is a Pesticide?

Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating any pest.Any substance or mixture of substances intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. (epa.gov)

Types of Pest Control

Insecticides (all insecticides are pesticides, but not all pesticides are insecticides)Herbicides (plants/weeds)Rodenticides (mice/rat)Fungicides (fungus)Bactericides (bacteria)Larvicides (larvae)

Alternatives to Pesticides

A good organic alternative to pesticides is the cultural methods: crop rotation, and interplant mixtures of plants. The biological control method is the use of naturally occurring disease organisms. You can also use pheromones to attract pests to traps. Hormones can cause insect metamorphosis change, if applied at the wrong time in the life cycle, insects can be killed off.

IPM: INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT: a combination of pest control methods that keep pest population low without economic loss. Use conventional pesticides sparingly when other methods fail.

HOSS Pest Control

SPINOSAD Takedown garden spray Complete disease control

Neem oil Monterey Bt Liquid Copper Fungicide

Fruit Tree Spray Plus Fruit Tree Spray Plus Bug Buster O

Diatomaceous Earth Horticultural Oil Sluggo Plus

Fungi Max Garden Phos Ultra 90 Surfactant

Come and Get it II fire ant Vegetable and Ornamental weeder

Vegetable, flower, fruit, and Ornamental Fungicide

Product of the Week

Mother's Day Gift Set

Titan Sunflower

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/i6KQprbWdx4

View Details

Do you know what fertilizer you should be using? What is the difference in synthetic and organic? Do you really need nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium? With so many questions revolving around fertilizers in the garden, we decided it's time to do a deep dive before we get too far into this 2022 spring/summer season.

Facts About Fertilizers

Did you know that organic fertilizers feed the soil and synthetic fertilizers feed the plant? Any source of organic matter will, sooner or later, become a soil acid after it has deteriorated into the soil. Manure that is applied to the surface without a soil cover can lose 25% of its nutrients in a single 24-hour period on a sunny, windy day. Calcium Nitrate (or nitrate of lime) is produced by reacting nitric acid with crushed limestone.

What Fertilizers Should You Be Using? Part 1

20-20-20 Fertilizer

Our 20 20 20 Garden Fertilizer has a balanced ratio of nitrogen, phosphorous and potassium that works great for fertilizing plants at all stages of growth. This water-soluble formula dissolves easily in water and can be applied by pouring alongside plants or with an injection system. used on any vegetable or plant in your vegetable garden. It works especially great when used early on heavy-feeding crops like tomatoes, onions or corn and it also helps to stimulate early plant growth in heavy-feeding cool crops like broccoli, cauliflower, cabbage, kohlrabi and more!

Micro-Boost

Micro-Boost is a micronutrient blend specifically designed to improve the yield potential of your vegetable garden plants by maximizing nutrient uptake, promoting a robust root system and an overall healthier plant. It can be used on all crops.

Complete Organic Fertilizer

Our Complete Organic Fertilizer is a balanced blend made from 100% all-natural, composted chicken manure. Includes 5% Nitrogen, 4% Phosphorous, 3% Potassium and 9% Calcium. OMRI listed for certified organic production. This formulation also includes 9% calcium which is especially important when growing tomatoes, peppers and eggplant. Calcium deficiencies can cause blossom end rot in nightshade (tomatoes, peppers, eggplant) species and is indicated by a rotting on the bottom of the fruit. This fertilizer will provide the adequate calcium to prevent blossom end rot and provide a healthy harvest.

What Fertilizers Should You Be Using? Part 2

Calcium Nitrate Fertilizer

Calcium Nitrate Fertilizer is a water-soluble formulation that provides fast-acting nitrogen along with calcium to increase fruit quality and prevent blossom end rot. Great for tomatoes, peppers, broccoli, Brussels sprouts and more! This fertilizer contains ammoniacal and nitrate nitrogen, which results in quick uptake and fast growth responses. Nitrate nitrogen also improves the uptake of potassium, calcium and magnesium by the plant.

Chilean Nitrate Fertilizer

Organic Nitrate Nitrogen nutrient source collected from natural rock deposits found in Atacama desert in chile. Chilean Nitrate Fertilizer provides a non-synthetic, natural source of nitrogen for your vegetable garden. Also known as sodium nitrate, this fertilizer is bagged in a dry, flowable form that is 100% water soluble. OMRI listed for organic use.

For side-dressing field corn, popcorn or sweet corn, apply 3.5 lbs per 1,000 square feet at least 2-3 times throughout the life of the plant. We recommend an initial application prior to the first hilling of the corn. Apply the granular fertilizer alongside the row and cover with soil during the hilling process. For other vegetable crops, apply alongside the plants at a rate of 1 cup per 10 feet. Use a hoe or other hand cultivation tool to mix the fertilizer into the soil. Apply every 2-3 weeks or as needed.

Products of the Week:

Fertilizers

Tongues of Fire Bean

Oxheart Carrot

Indigo Rose Tomato

Trinidad Scorpion Pepper

Depurple Cauliflower

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/ttk35rcVCDY

View Details

We're not talking just "flowers", we're talking pollinators. What are pollinators? Are they important? Why do we need them in the garden? What is the result of lack of or poor pollination in the vegetable garden, how does it affect the economy, and much more?! Join us tonight as we dig in!

What Is A Pollinator?

Anything that helps carry pollen from male part of the flower (stamen) to the female part of the same or another flower (stigma).

Are Bees The Only Insect Pollinators?

It can be bees, wasp, moths, butterflies, ants, birds, flies, and small animals including bats.

Some, including bees, intentionally collect pollen. Others (butterflies, birds, bats) move pollen accidentally. Pollen sticks to their bodies and is transported unknowingly from flower to flower resulting in pollination.

Why Do We Need Pollinators In The Garden?

Food

One out of every three bites of food you eat exists because of the efforts of pollinators, including many fruits, vegetables, and seeds. Pollinators not only are necessary for our own food but support the food and habitat of animals.

Clean Air

Healthy ecosystems depend on pollinators. At least 75 percent of all the flowering plants on earth are pollinated by insects and animals! This amounts to more than 1,200 food crops and 180,000 different types of plants—plants that help stabilize our soils, clean our air, supply oxygen, and support wildlife.

Healthy Economy

In the United States alone, pollination by honey bees contributed to over $19 billion of crop production in 2010, while pollination by other insect pollinators contributed to nearly $10 billion of crop production.

Somewhere between 75% and 95% of all flowering plants on the earth need help with pollination – they need pollinators.

The Best Flowers To Attract Pollinators

Zinnias, Sunflowers, Hibiscus, Lavender, Lantana, Salvia, Celosia

Tips for Pollinators and Pollinator Plants

Bees are one of the most important pollinators. They are able to see ultraviolet colors and prefer flowers in shades of yellow, purple and blue. Bees are also attracted to plants with a sweet fragrance. Bees like a few dry, sunny, bare spots with well-drained soil. South-facing slopes are ideal.Butterflies need sunny, open spaces, fresh water and shelter from the wind. As a general rule, butterflies are attracted to purple, white, pink, yellow, orange and red – and less to greens and blues.Hummingbirds need open spaces that allow them to fly from one pollinator to another. They also need a safe place to perch and a few shady spots to rest. They like most nectar-rich, unscented, tube-shaped flowers, but are highly attracted to pink, orange and bright red. Plant a variety of flowers so something is blooming in your pollinator garden throughout the growing season. Plant large patches of pollinator plants, which makes it easier for pollinators to forage.

Products of the Week:

Jester Pumpkin

Ruby Red Onion

Glorious Nasturtium Mix

Magnolia Blossom Pea

Purple Tomatillo

Indigo-Sun F1 Tomato

Thom Multiplying Onion

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/mUKDc2oAabY

View Details

Greg and special guest, Pieter from Seminis (a company that develops, grows, and markets vegetable seeds for the home gardener) do a deep dive into the seeds you should be growing this season! Discussing heirlooms and hybrids, the difference in parthenocarpic, monoecious and gynoecious varieties, pests in tomatoes, best practices for starting seedless watermelon varieties, and much more!

CUCUMBERS

Hoss carries many types of cucumber varieties. Understanding the scientific terms can be a bit confusing. Let's dive in.

Gynoecious cucumbers are varieties that are predominantly female. There are far more female flowers on the plant than male flowers. It provides heavy harvests in a shorter period of time but does require more pollinators in the garden. Monoecious cucumber varieties have more of an equal ratio of female and male flowers and do not require bees as the gynoecious varieties do. They are designed to have more of a longer harvest period. Parthenocarpic varieties are typically what you find in the grocery stores, they will make fruit without being pollinated.

PEPPERS

Gypsy peppers are great to grow in containers, by pepper growing standards this variety produces early than most other varieties. Roulette Heatless Habanero is the perfect snacking pepper, it gives you the habanero flavor without the heat. The traditional green bell pepper to grow (even in a container) is the King Arthur.

There is a trend on social media that people are pinching off the terminal bud of the pepper plant to force lateral growth. We haven't seen any benefits to this method. It is not practiced commercially.

TOMATOES

Heirloom varieties are becoming more popular again in the home garden, while hybrid varieties are still very popular. Hybrid tomato varieties have been bred to produce more fruit. What is the difference between determinate vs. indeterminate varieties? Determinate tomato varieties require little to no staking of the plant. Indeterminate varieties develop into vines that never top off.

Products of the Week:

Cucumbers

Peppers

Tomatoes

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/PxgvAPFxYp0

View Details

We've all struggled to grow watermelon at some point. Many of you may not even want to try and grow watermelons because of all the stories of struggle but we are here to tell you...it's easy! With the right tools and knowledge, we will have you growing watermelons successfully!

Types of Watermelon

Seedless: Seedless watermelons were developed in the 90's to have small edible seeds. Typically produce 10-20-pound fruits and mature in 85 days and require a pollinator variety. (Tailgate, Harvest Moon, Summer Breeze, Tripe Play, Treasure Chest, Captivation, Yellow Buttercup,

Icebox: Specifically bred to be small enough to fit in a refrigerator and feed one person or a small family. Round fruits average between 5-15 pounds and mature in 75 days. (Sugar Baby, Black Tail)

Yellow and Orange: Specifically bred to be small enough to fit in a refrigerator and feed one person or a small family. Round fruits average between 5-15 pounds and mature in 75 days. (Tender sweet Orange, Yellow Doll, Orangelo)

Picnic: The largest watermelon variety weighs in between 16 and 45 pounds. Makes a great option to feed large crowds. Oblong fruits will mature in 85-90 days. (Crimson Sweet, Sangria, Georgia Rattlesnake, Moon and Stars, Charleston Gray, Carolina Cross 180, Jubilee, Jamboree, Congo, Dulce Fantasia)

Seed Starting Dates

Wondering when you should start your watermelon seeds for your zone? See the list below:

Zone 10 - 12/15

Zone 9 - 1/15

Zone 8- 2/20

Zone 7- 3/15

Zone 6 - 4/1

Zone 5 - 4/20

Transplanting Your Watermelon Seedlings

Once your watermelon seedlings have at least 2 sets of true leaves, the weather is warm enough for the soil to maintain at least 70°F, and the plants have a healthy root system, your seedlings are ready to transplant into the ground.

The most important thing to remember when transplanting watermelons is to take extra care with the root systems. They are very delicate and disturbing them could result in the loss of your plant.

When the plants can easily be pulled from the seed tray cells, that is a good indication that they are ready to go in the ground. If they don’t come out of the trays easily, that’s okay. You can help them out by very gently pushing them through the hole in the bottom of the 162 cell seed starting tray.

Watermelon Seedling Planting Depth

Row Spacing – 4 to 6 feet

Plant Spacing – 2 to 3 feet

Planting Depth (Plants) – Soil Level

When choosing a spot to plant your watermelons, make sure it it has full sun and won’t be shaded by other plants.

Product of the Week:

Black Mountain Watermelon

Orangeglo Watermelon

Lilly Crenshaw Melon

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/6o1as-OyXRs

View Details

Small space gardening is growing in popularity and is becoming more of a necessity in these trying times. What can you grow in raised beds? What can you grow in containers? Tonight, Greg and special guest, Tracy with Sakata Seeds go over the Best vegetables you can and should grow in your raised beds and containers.

Container Gardening: Plants that work well for containers

The Little Birdy Series includes a great selection of compact, determinant plants. These are great for hanging baskets, containers, grow bags, and raised beds. Rosy Finch, Yellow Canary, and Red Robin

Peppers

Lola Banana Pepper

Arapaho Cayenne

Ruby Delite

Lemon Delite

Orange Delite

Cinder Jalapeno

Orange You Sweet

Right on Red

Yes To Yellow

Lettuce

Red Tide

Green Tiger

Red Dragon

Herbs

Dill

Large Italian Basil

Santo Cilantro

Okra

Green Fingers

Jambalaya

Beets

Kestrel

Merlin

Broccoli

Green Magic

Godzilla

Vegetables for Raised Beds

This also includes all of the seeds from the Container gardening list above.

Summer Squash

Green Zebra Zucchini

Cometa

Determinate Tomatoes

Shelby

Hossinator

Bella Rosa

Roadster

Product of the Week:

Seed Starting Supplies

New Seeds for 2022

Root Pouch Grow Bags

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/ewpMy-dP1mg

View Details

One of the most popular vegetables in the United States is corn, especially sweet corn. Scientists believe people living in central Mexico developed corn at least 7,000 years ago. It started from a wild grass known as teosinte. Tonight we discuss when to plant, where to plant, water requirements, and much more.

General Information

Sweet corn is a warm-season crop and must be planted after the soil warms and there is no more danger of frost; at least above 55 degrees F. (13 C.). If you plant super sweet corn, be sure the soil is at least 65 degrees F. (18 C.), as super sweet corn prefers a warmer climate.Plant the corn seeds about 1 inch deep and 3 to 4 inches apart in the row. Space the rows 2½ to 3 feet apart. After the plants are up, thin them to 1 foot apart. If you plant them closer, your corn will have small, poorly-filled ears. Plant in full sun

Part 2

Sweet corn must self-pollinate or pollinate by a similar variety. Wind moves corn pollen from the tassel at the top of the plant to the silks of the ears, and to lower parts of the plant.Always plant corn in blocks of at least four rows. Corn planted in a single row will have much of its pollen blown out of the row, and will produce ears that have blank areas where kernels did not form.If you garden in an agricultural area, try to plant your sweet corn 300 feet from the nearest cornfield. Large acreages of field corn will produce so much pollen that you could spoil your crop unless you plant your sweet corn far enough away.Different varieties produce pollen at different times, so you can isolate them by time. Since different varieties will respond individually to growing conditions, do not isolate them with less than two weeks until the given “days to maturity” in the variety description.You can also plant one variety earlier than another variety to achieve the needed difference in pollen production.

Water Requirements

Water sweet corn as needed to keep it from wilting. Do not let corn suffer from lack of water when the kernels are forming.One inch of rainfall per week is good for your corn.Drip Irrigation is best to use with corn

Pests and Diseases

Two insect pests that feed on the developing ears of corn are corn earworm and European corn borer.

Smut causes firm, tumor-like growths on leaves, stems, ears and tassels. Look for smut galls throughout the season and cut them out before they produce spores. Remove these galls from the garden and bury them. Do not compost them. Leaf rust appears as rusty orange streaks on leaves that release an abundance of powdery orange spores. Rust resistant varieties are available and are the best form of control. Use good cultural control practices to reduce disease problems to a good level and allow for a successful harvest.

Harvesting

Corn is ready for harvest about 3 weeks after the tassel grows on top of the corn plant. Corn is ripe when juice from the kernels is milky white, the silk on the ears has turned dark brown. The best time to pick corn is in the early morning or evening when it is cool. Place it uncovered in the refrigerator for 1 or 2 days. Corn stored for more than 2 days loses its sweetness.

Product of the Week:

Sweet Corn

Mexican Sour Gherkin

Austin's Red Pear Tomato

Hoss Green Blaze Bush Bean

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/7Fnbwc_f2ik

View Details

While okra may be considered a "southern thing", it can be grown in most USDA planting zones. There are many benefits to adding okra to your "things to grow this season" list, okra is an excellent source of vitamins and it is one of the easiest things to grow in the garden. Most okra varieties are heat-lovers, have low watering needs, and the beneficial pollinators love the blooms. What variety should you grow? Let's discuss!

General Information:

Excellent source of vitamins A, C, Folate, and magnesium. Low in calories and carbs. Provides protein that many other fruits and vegetables lack. Contains antioxidants that contributes to brain and heart health.So many ways to cook, roasted, grilled, sauteed, fried, pickled, soups, gumbo, freeze dried.

Comes in 2 colors, Pods usually green, but numerous red varieties out there as well.Okra is an annual. Okra grows the best in hardiness zones 6 – 11. You can grow okra in zone 5 but will need to take greater care with the plants.It does especially well in the south in growing zone 7 and zone 8. In zones 9, 10, and 11, watch for early consistent temperatures over 100 degrees which can stunt growth if they aren’t watered enough. Okra takes 50 – 65 days to grow and matureThe ideal growing temperature is 75 – 90 degrees.

Starting Seeds: (soak or not to soak?)

Takes longer to germinate, have to be patient, 5-17 days

Transplants: Likes soil temps of 65-degree F to germinate. Will need a heat mat with thermostat.

For transplants start 4-6 weeks before last frost date. Will need to harden off before planting outdoors. Be careful transplanting. If root breaks, it will not thrive. (taproot) (fragile roots)

Water immediately after transplanting.

For direct sow: evening temp above 60 after last possible frost date.

(Northerners can lay black plastic over planting location 1 month before planting to raise soil temps)

Plant seeds 3/4″ – 1″ deep.

Plant spacing 2 feet apart, Row spacing 3-4 feet apart (grows over 6 feet and 3 feet wide, need plenty of space) Be sure to read you seed package information specific to the variety you are planting.

Location:

Choose a location that receives full sun. 12-16 hours daylight

Okra loves the heat

Grows best with pH that is close to neutral, anything 6.0-8.0 will workWell-draining soil amended with lots of compost or organic matter

Water Requirements:

Okra has low water needs and doesn’t like wet feet.No more than 1 inch per week if no rain.Water under foliage, right at ground level to avoid getting leaves wet.Best to water in mornings so water on leaves will evaporate during the day.

Fertilization:

Prior to planting, Complete organic fertilizer, compost, organic matterMicro boost, Fish emulsion

Pest and Diseases:

Not particularly prone to pest or disease, usually manageableUse crop rotation, high quality seed, keep garden clean removing old vegetationPowdery mildew (white and powdery spots) of in humid, overly moist conditionsFungus is possibility where there is too much moister (drooping yellow leaves)Root knot nematodeAntsAphids

Harvesting:

itching, irritation when harvested. Can grow spineless varieties. Recommend wearing long sleeves and gloves to protect skin.Check daily, grow quickly within a few days after flowering.Most varieties intended to be picked when the pods are no longer than 3 inches long. Usually every other dayPods grow fast, pick frequently to encourage the plant to produce more pods. The larger pods taste woody and need to be tossed, don’t let go to seed.Best to snip rather than snap due to fragile roots.Can be stored in fridge 2-3 days

Saving Seeds:

Open pollinated varieties will produce replicas of parent plantsMake sure plants are isolated from other okra varietiesPollinated by insects that can bring pollen from plants.Only grow one variety if wanting to save the seedsSome can remain viable up to several years, best to use them the next growing season

View Details

Whether you are a novice gardener or seasoned veteran, it is very important to understand the differences between transplanting and direct sowing. Advantages and Disadvantages to each method. A lot depends on both the vegetable and time of year.

Direct Seeding

Pros

Some things don’t tolerate transplanting. Spinach, beets, carrots, peas are examples that like to start and finish in same placeThings that are quick to germinate. Radishes, beans, peas, beets, and turnips.Requires less labor and ten to mature fasterMore cost effective, especially if growing in large quantity.Better drought tolerance

Cons

Can be riskier, due to contending with weather and weed pressureCrowded plants, need to thin so plants don’t compete for light, water, and nutrients.Direct sown crops occupy the land longer than the same crop transplanted.Direct sown crops may be harder to get started in cold (or hot) conditions.

Vegetables to Direct Seed

Beans Corn Turnips

Carrots Zucchini Bunching Onions

Peas Radish

Spinach Squashes

Transplanting

Pros

Starting with baby plants can give you more control and predictable resultsSeeds started in more ideal conditions, easier to care forTransplants give you a huge jumpstart on the season, start earlierIncrease harvest with succession planting.Transplants can be more resistant to insect and other pest pressure.Plants that have already developed roots and other systems are stronger, making them less vulnerable to outside conditions.

Cons

Extending the season by starting earlier does mean more work.It takes extra time caring for the starts, as they won’t get water if you don’t provide it.Transplant shock can delay harvest – be sure to learn and practice good techniques.More attention is needed to watering new plants after transplanting, (compared to direct sowing) as some root damage is almost inevitable. (Plug flats and soil blocks minimize root damage.)You need a good greenhouse set-up if you plan to grow lots of transplants.

Vegetables to Transplant (start in trays)

Herbs Eggplant Peppers Cabbage

Collards Kale Scallions

Broccoli Kohlrabi Tomato

Leeks Onion Watermelon

Vegetables to Direct Seed or Transplant

Okra Zinnias Sunflowers Beets Roselle Lettuce

Product of the Week:

Seed Starting Supplies

New Seeds for 2022

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/yMnCmzaDlio

View Details

It's about to get heated! Hoss is gonna sweat! It's all about peppers tonight! What types of peppers are there, what is the science behind the heat, how should you grow and what should you avoid? Be sure to check out the podcast or video for ALL the hotness!

Facts About Peppers

Peppers contain only 20 calories per 100 grams, making them low-calorie and healthy. They are a great source of Vitamin C, Vitamin A, and Vitamin B6. They also contain vitamin E, vitamin B2, vitamin K, folate, potassium, manganese, magnesium, and phosphorus.

One pepper contains as much as 300% of your daily requirement of Vitamin C!

Spiciness measurement. There are the SHU scale or Scoville Heat Units. Which was named after American pharmacist Wilbur Scoville, who first invented it in 1912. SHU varying from 0 for bell peppers to 3,200,000 SHU for some extremely hot peppers.

Types of Peppers

Capsicum annum: (AN-yoo-um) Most common, various shapes and flavors. Almost all sweet and have thicker walls. Ideal for sauces. Bell, cayenne, jalapeno, banana, Poblano, pimento,

Capsicum frutescens: (froo-TESS-enz) Often used as ornamental peppers, typically colorful, small, mid to intense heat levels.

Tabasco Pepper: great for hot sauce or pepper sauce, 90 days

Serrano Pepper: Slightly hotter than jalapeno

Capsicum baccatum: (bah-COT-tum or bah-KAY-tum) Best for drying. Spicy, fruity flavor, generally disease resistant.

Mad Hatter Pepper: Originating from Bolivia and Peru, the Mad Hatter has been widely adapted to grow easily throughout most of the U.S. and matures from green to bright red

Capsicum chinense: (chi-NEN-see) Habanero-type, thin-walled. Fruity flavor, heat dispersed throughout pepper. Hottest species

Ghost Pepper: One of world’s hottest peppers 1,000.000 Scoville units

Helious habanero pepper: Hybrid, Intense heat with citrusy flavor

Chocolate Habanero pepper: 425,000-577,000 Scoville heat with a hint of smoky flavor

Habanero Orange Pepper: chile pepper with a sweet fruity flavor that packs intense pungent heat.

Capsicum pubescens: (pew-BES-enz) Most Unique, meaty, juicy apple-shaped fruit with black seeds. From South America

Product of the Week:

North Georgia Candy Roaster

Mattadorres Roasting Pepper

Mad Hatter Pepper

Green Fingers Okra

Seed Potatoes

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/CZ3DfS226KI

View Details

It's about that time! We've got most of the seed potato orders out, now it's time to get into the dirty details of seed potato planting! What type of potato should you plant, should you plant in-ground or in raised beds, does soil temperatures matter, and so much more!

What Type of Potato Should You Plant?

7 types of potatoes: Russet, White, Red, Yellow, Blue/Purple, Fingerling, PetiteEarly Season (90 days or less), Midseason (100 plus days), Late Season (110 days or more)Determinate and Indeterminate Potatoes

Spring Potato Planting Schedule By Zone

Soil temperature and maturation timing are extremely important in growing your potatoes. Ideally, you want to get your seeds in the ground 2-4 weeks before the last frost of Spring. The warmer your climate, the sooner you'll need to plant.

Preparing and Planting

In-ground planting: Rowing spacing needs to be 3-4 feet apart. Plant spacing should be 6-12 inches and planting depth should be 3-6 inches. Raised bed planting: Row spacing needs to be 2 feet apart. You'll want to space your plants 6-12 inches apart (same as in-ground planting), and the depth should also be the same (3-6 inches deep).

Hilling Your Potatoes

As your plants grow, they will need special maintenance throughout the season. Every 1-2" that potatoes grow, they are going to need extra support by mounding up dirt loosely around the base. This process is called "hilling", it is very important in the growth cycle and the root development of your potatoes. Hilling also helps with weed suppression, plant support, and frost protection as well as keeping the potatoes out of the sunlight, which could cause them to turn green and become inedible. Indeterminate potatoes require more hilling due to their upward growth habit.

Growing Potatoes in Containers

Potatoes are very well suited to grow in containers and can make an excellent choice for small space gardening. While it is a very similar process as in-ground growing, there are a few differences in the process. Depending on the size of your container, you'll want to fill it with 4-6 inches of prepared soil and place it in full sun. Be sure to get the correct spacing because they will need a good bit of room to grow. For example, our 15-gallon root pouch can comfortably grow 4 potato plants and give the root structure plenty of room for a big harvest. You'll want to "layer" your soil the way you would "hill" with in-ground planting. Continually add soil to the top of the plant to cover the new stems at the bottom until the container is full of soil.

Hoss University

Be sure to check out the Potato Growing Guide on our website for lots more growing information! More on irrigation, fertilizer needs, disease protection and SO MUCH MORE! CLICK HERE!

Product of the Week:

Shelby Tomato

Purple Ruffles Basil

Seed Potatoes

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/YtjtaHaKI9g

View Details

Let's talk about the tips & techniques of seed starting. Evaluating your seed starting method is extremely important, is it art or skill? Where should you start your seeds? Are you using the correct soil? Are you planting at the right depth for each variety? Let's discuss!

Important Tips of Seed Starting

Here's what you need to remember:

Keep Records/Journal to record when seeds are sown, germination, success rate and date transplanted. Tracy (justdigitfarms) did excellent video last week.Purchase seed from a trusted source (high quality) (germination rates) check seed packet for specific directionsKeep seeds stored properly: Cool dark location with low humiditySelect the correct seed-staring mixPlant in correct container/seed starting tray (drainage holes) (plant markers)Plant proper depthKeep seed starting mix moistWarm locationFertilize when seedlings have true leavesThin if needed, step up as neededPest Control

Evaluate Your Method

Indoor Vs outdoor:

Indoor: Got to have lights, Heat mats, more expensive, less fluctuation in temps, limited space. Temperatures of 65 to 75 to germinate (ambient temp). Don’t plant too early

Outdoor, (in green house.) more fluctuation in temps got to run heaters, less expensive (Sort of) can start more seeds. Unpredictable weather

Overall Problems in Seed Starting

Germination: Humidity + tempDamping offLeggy seedlingsNutrition: begin once true leaves emerge

Correct These Issues

Have heat mat and some type of humidity

Drainage! Airflow

Light and light. Strat over if plants are leggy. Harden off if needed/acclimated to direct sunlight

Product of the Week:

Cog Hill Sunflower Collection

Seed Starting Supplies

Seed Potatoes

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/jBYhaO6LJBY

View Details

Our friend, Craig Howell from Sakata sits down with us to discuss all things tomatoes. What's coming to the home gardener this season, what certain tomato terms mean, what makes a good tomato, and so much more! We also choose our new name for the Hoss tomato variety!

Hoss' Most Popular Tomato Varieties

Bella RosaRed SnapperRoadsterTachiSweet HeartsHossinator (STM2255)

What Makes A Good Tomato

Disease ResistanceSmoothnessHeat SetTaste

What Varieties Is Hoss Trialing?

This season we will be trialing 3 new varieties!

RamblerThunderbirdShelby

Little Known Fact

Most organic growers use hybrid varieties as their #1 to grow!

Product of the Week:

Amarillo Gold Rudbeckia

Hossinator Tomato

Striped Carosello Cucumber

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/LXoE3t8mg1A

View Details

No matter how large or small your garden is, every grower wants to get the most out of their space. What if you only have a 20 x 20 space? Let's talk about small space gardening, what important factors to think of when planning your garden, and which varieties to plant.

Garden Site Considerations

Good SoilPlenty SunshineWater SourcePollinationPossibly Fence

How To Select Varieties

Choose Compact VarietiesGrow VerticallyCompanion PlantingSuccession PlantingCrop Rotation

20 x 20 Small Space Garden Layout

We have taken a 20 x 20 garden and made a Spring Garden Plan to get the most out of every square foot of garden space. This plan utilizes thick planting methods, vertical gardening, and smaller 3.5’ raised beds with a well-producing pollinator breaking up the quadrants. Some of us picked our favorite varieties that we would plant in our space but encourage to try different varieties and see what works for you.

Q1: Kentucky Pole Bean, National Pickling Cucumber, Lemon Boy, Golden Delight Zucchini

Q2: Jambalaya Okra, Merlin Beet, Mini Bell Pepper Mix, Nadia Eggplant

Q3: Elephant Garlic, French Breakfast Radishes, Yukon Gold, Warrior Bunching Onions

Q4: Tarragon and Parsley, Cilantro and Dill, Thyme and Sage, Lemon Basil

Product of the Week:

Root Pouch

Trellis Netting

New Seeds For 2022

Seed Potatoes

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/1XiuTkONCA0

View Details

Not everyone has a large enough space for in-ground planting, tonight we focus on container gardening and give you some ideas on what to grow this season! We are excited to introduce our newest collection, the Acre Homestead Container Collection was hand-curated by Becky at Acre Homestead. We have partnered with Becky to focus on small space and container gardening. More videos from @Acre Homestead to come!

Container Gardening

Container gardening is ideal for those with little or no garden space. Problems with soilborne diseases, nematodes, or poor soil conditions can be easily overcome by switching to a container garden. Being able to use different-sized containers can give you easy access to your fruits or vegetables.

The Perfect Space

Whether you have little to no yard, live in an apartment, or only have a driveway, there is still SO much potential! You can use your windowsill, your deck, patio, doorstep. Get creative with where you place your containers. Not only is it important to the size of your container for plant purposes but also for placement.

Sizes

It is very important to have the right size containers for certain plants. You will want to consider the size and shape of the plant's root system and how rapidly it grows. When you are picking your containers, make sure you keep in mind that light-colored containers keep the soil cooler than darker containers. Drainage holes are always essential with containers, if your containers don't have the proper drainage holes, you could risk root rot or other death to your plant.

Container Material

Clay or terracotta are attractive but breakable and easily damaged by freezing and thawing.Cast concrete long lasting, but can be heavy and hard to move.Plastic and fiberglass are lightweight, become brittle with cold or age.Wood: Choose a naturally rot- resistant wood. Don’t use creosote (toxic to plants)Root Pouch

Container Preparation

You'll want to put in desired space before filling and planting. Put in appropriate shade/sun according to plant requirements.

Plain garden soil is too dense.

Water Requirements

The type of pot will determine water requirements as well as shade/sun placement. Clay pots dry out faster.

Product of the Week:

Root Pouch

Dr. Joe Fertilizing Tabs

Arkansas Traveler Tomato

Chiba Green Organic Edamame

Red Dragon Lettuce

Mingle Mix Tomato

Green Tiger Lettuce

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/4JHHpHZs7_c

View Details

What zone are you in? What should you be doing in the garden now? Let's go over it! Be sure to check out Hoss University and the Growing Guides that we continue to put out, lots of great growing information.

ZONE 10

Ya'll in Zone 10 are good to go and can plant most anything right now.

ZONE 9

Now - Inventory seeds, supplies to be ready to start warm-season crops by end of January (lights, heat mats, soil). Start your cool-season Crops inside: Kale, lettuce Cabbage, Broccoli, Cauliflower, Brussel SproutsGet potato spot ready for planting end of February

February - Plant English peas, carrots and start planning your garden out, remembering good rotation.

ZONE 8

February - Plant English peas, carrots and start planning your garden out, remembering good rotation.

ZONE 7

Now: Inventory seeds, supplies to be ready (lights, heat mats, soil)

End of January

Start your cool season Crops inside: greenhouse or grow lights, Kale, lettuce Cabbage, Broccoli, Cauliflower, Brussel Sprouts

Soil Sample

Grow microgreens and lettuce indoors.Start intermediate day onion seedsStart planning your garden out, remembering good rotation.

ZONE 6

Now: Inventory seeds, supplies to be ready (lights, heat mats, soil)

February:

Start your cool season Crops inside greenhouse or grow lights, Kale, lettuce Cabbage, Broccoli, Cauliflower, Brussel SproutsSoil SampleGrow microgreens and lettuce indoors.Start planning your garden out, remembering good rotation

Product of the Week:

Potatoes

New Seeds for 2022

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/A7ENCgJGeLQ

View Details

Want to expand your garden all throughout the year? We know having a garden in the spring and summer months is very popular but you can have a bountiful harvest in the fall & winter months too.

Growing A Winter Garden

We know the most popular garden to grow is in the spring and summer months but you can have a bountiful harvest in the winter as well, especially if you are in the warmer, southern states. Here is a list of some of our favorites from our winter garden!

Cabbage

Caribbean Queen Cabbage is a hybrid, tropical-style cabbage with a massive, flattened head. Easier to slice and process. Great for making wraps, slaw, soups, sauerkraut and more! 80 days to maturity.

Cauliflower

Graffiti Cauliflower is a hybrid variety that produces stunning, bright purple heads that are medium to large-sized. Performs well even in humid conditions. 80 days to maturity. Flame Star Cauliflower is a hybrid variety that produces beautiful, pastel orange heads with great flavor. Plants have high tolerance to heat and stress. 55 days to maturity. Twister Cauliflower is a hybrid with large, dense heads and outstanding wrapping ability. Outer leaves “twist” and protect the head for beautiful, uniform harvests of bright white heads. 75 days to maturity.

Kale

Lacinato Kale is an Italian heirloom that is one of the most productive crops you can grow. Produces delicious, long, and slender leaves year-round. 65 days to maturity.

Carrots

Chantenay Royal is an heirloom, open-pollinated variety that works great in heavy or clay soils. This chantenay-type produces uniform carrots that are 4-5″ long with wide diameter. 75 days to maturity. Gold Nugget is a hybrid yellow variety with broad shoulders, blunt ends and little tapering from top to bottom. Strong, vigorous tops make it easy to harvest by hand. Great flavor and uniformity. 75 days to maturity.

Beets

Touchstone Gold Beet is the preferred variety of golden beet. Orange to gold skin with bright yellow flesh on the inside. Great flavor and retains color when cooked. 55 days to maturity.

Spinach

FanTail Spinach is an extremely heat-tolerant spinach variety that is exceptionally resistant to downy mildew. Upright growing habit for easy and clean harvesting. Great for baby leaf or full leaf production. 45 days to maturity.

Turnips

All Top Turnips is the perfect variety for those who want to grow heavy-yields of delicious turnip greens. No turnip roots here — just thick, large leaves that can be cut multiple times. 50 days to maturity.

Mustard

Savannah Mustard is the fastest-growing and most tender mustard green we’ve found. Early-maturity. Grow as baby greens or harvest at full size. Cut-and-come again type crop. 20 days to maturity.

Collards

Flash Collards is a hybrid collard variety with heavy yields and superior heat-tolerance. Slowest-to-bolt of any variety we offer. Vates-type collard that grows on upright stalks. 55 days to maturity.

Kohlrabi

Quickstar Kohlrabi is a fast-growing hybrid that maintains texture and flavor at larger bulb sizes. Pale green bulbs with slightly flattened appearance. 35 days to maturity.

Product of the Week:

Premium Garden Seeds

Pickling Pipe Lids

Pickle Packer Jar Tamper

Rust Proof Jar Bands

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/HE6mY_frJqo

View Details

Gardening Questions & Answers

Part 1

Can you plant potatoes without sprouting first?

Yes, you can. If you don't pre-sprout them, they can take a little bit longer in the ground to come up but yes, it can be done.

How do you calculate how much (or how concentrated) fertilizer to run through your drip? And with the variability of rates (like 1:100 needs x amount of fertilizer per x gallons of water concentrate) currently working towards getting good fertigation set up going with a dosatron I salvaged from our chicken houses, have a five-gallon bucket to mix my fertilizer in.

Try not to make it too complicated. The water that you are using is only a carrier for the fertilizer, don't focus on how much water. You want to focus on how much fertilizer you're putting out into the area of your garden you are focusing on. It's very hard to give rates when we don't know your soil type, temperature, what you're planting and how big your garden is.

Do you have a printed catalog?

We don't. We stopped printing a catalog about 4 years ago. We are strictly online. www.hosstools.com

What's the best pea variety to grow for having dried split peas to make soup with?

I'll be honest, we haven't made split pea soup. Greg isn't a big fan of split pea soup but you can make it with any of our English pea varieties. Some people have been known to make it out of a yellow-type pea.

How to keep the stink bugs off zucchini? How to kee green worms off cauliflower, kale, and cabbage?

Great question, we keep our garden clean, start our plants early, and we don't wait to have a pest control plan. If you plant these in the springtime, it is often better than in the fall. They're easier to control when they are young. Try Neem Oil and Spinosad.

Part 2

Do you have any brilliant ways to store all of the attachments for my single-wheel hoe? Right now, they are in various stages of organization. Some have hooks on the barn wall, and some are in a pile on the workbench or floor?

Greg uses a lot of hooks in his barn. They are great to hang wheel hoes and attachments. We would love to see your photos of how you organize your garden tools. Send them to custserv@hosstools.com

I'm planning to build a new strawberry-raised bed and want your advice on what soil type and amendments I should add. I have a compost pile I've been working for about 4 months and just added 14 bags of leaves and wondered if I should add some of this to the bottom or top of the bed when we fill it. These strawberry plants are coming from an existing area, in case that matters.

Yes, you should add it. Add it to the top, the key to it is to incorporate it all in. Compost on the bottom and then add your leaves.

What kind of watermelons do you plant and how do you plant them?

Greg plants a lot of different varieties just to try them out. His all-time favorite is the Crimson Sweet Watermelon. He normally plants on drip irrigation with 3 to 4-foot row spacing.

Would you recommend incorporating brassica leaves into raised beds after harvest, or throwing them away?

Yes, incorporate them. Sheila would do a "chop and drop", you don't want them to rot on top. It will add a good source of nitrogen to your compost.

I have sugar sand soil but has been improved. Which wheel hoe would be best suited for the loose sandy soil, single or double?

Any of our wheel hoes will work great in sandy soils. Greg recommends basing it on the size of your garden. If you have a smaller garden, he recommends the single-wheel hoe. If you figure out later on that you made a mistake and needed a different one, we have conversion kits.

Part 3

What type of nightshades are you growing there?

Greg and Sheila grow tomatoes, peppers, eggplants, and potatoes. That would be Irish potatoes, not sweet potatoes.

I've not had much luck with Roselle here in South Central Tennessee but just bought seeds to try again. What is the optimal pH, season,

View Details

What should you do to "winterize" your garden? Tonight, we discuss exactly what you need to do in your garden this season. Based on your zone, you may need a more ardent strategy than some others in warmer climates.

Winterizing Your Garden

Be sure you bring tender plants inside, cover vulnerable plants (remember to take when the threat of frost passes so they do not overheat).

Clean out annual vegetables and flowers. Some may harbor disease, pests and funguses. Many bacteria and pest eggs can overwinter in debris, and they will take over your healthy plants once spring arrives.Remove weeds. Like plants, weeds left in the garden through winter can host many pest eggs and pathogens. Soil Tests.Nutrients: Lime, Potassium, Phosphorus, and NitrogenAmend your soil for spring. Manure, compost, and organic fertilizers. Plant Cover Crops: Helps regulate soil erosion, break up compacted areas, increase levels or organic matter, and add nutrientsReplenish Mulch: Helps regulate soil temperatures and oisture, protect crops frm frost, added mulch breaks down and incorporates fresh organic material into soil.TarpClean and Sharpen ToolsShut off irrigation systems when freeze is indicated

Product of the Week:

Potatoes

Gift Certificates

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/95XVp6_2xg0

View Details

Tonight, we discuss the difference in seeds. With a lot of confusion on what Open-Pollinated, Heirloom, and Hybrid seeds are, we will break it down for you.

Open-Pollinated (OP)

Occurs in nature, naturally. As long as plants are separated from other varieties, will breed true to type.Advantages: Save seeds for next season, Superior flavorHave stable traits from one generation to the next.

Heirloom

Developed outside commercial plant tradePast down from generation to generationIdentified by how long the seed has been passed down. (50-100 years) Prior to 1940Heirloom seeds must be open pollinated, but not all open pollinated are heirloom seeds.Why Heirloom: Taste (No more pale tasteless tomatoes)Stability (Characteristics stable from one year to next, plant will be like parent plant)ExpenseHardinessSeed Saving

Hybrid

Often called F1 in seed catalogsA hybrid is created by crossing two different varieties of the same plant. Can result naturally if plants are not separated. Can also be intentional. It is an attempt to tease out the best genetic traits of both parent plants and combine them in a hybrid seed. Seeds are unstable and can’t be used for saving as the will grow but likely will not be like parent plants. When a hybrid tomato (for example) produces its fruits, the seeds inside those fruits will carry genetics from both, or either parent plant. That means their traits will be less predictable. Must purchase new seeds every yearTend to grow better and have higher yields than open pollinated seeds.Offer higher disease resistance.Improved Flavor in some cases.

Can you save Hybrid seeds?

Plants that grow from seed saved from hybrid plants generally are less vigorous, more variable, and usually have smaller blossoms and yield less than their parents.

Heirloom Vegetable Seeds Vs. Organic Seeds

Organic seeds refer to a growing practice (most likely without pesticides.)

Product of the Week:

Kitchen Garden Light Kit

Hoss Stocking Stuffer

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/6sB-rp6mBE0

View Details

G-M-O. You probably know what it stands for: genetically modified organisms. I know there’s been a lot of controversy around it. You might think it’s unnatural, that’s it’s bad for your health. Others say that it’s actually a cool technique to make crop production more efficient. So, is it good or is it bad?

GMO - How Are GMOs Made?

“GMO” (genetically modified organism) has become the common term consumers and popular media use to describe foods that have been created through genetic engineering. Genetic engineering is a process that involves:

Identifying the genetic information—or “gene”—that gives an organism (plant, animal, or microorganism) a desired traitCopying that information from the organism that has the traitInserting that information into the DNA of another organismThen growing the new organism

Eating Foods From GMO Crops

Only a few types of GMO crops are grown in the United States, but some of these GMOs make up a large percentage of the crop grown (e.g., soybeans, corn, sugar beets, canola, and cotton).

Most GMO plants are used to make ingredients that are then used in other food products, for example, cornstarch made from GMO corn or sugar made from GMO sugar beet.

Farmers and GMO Crops

Most of the GMO crops grown today were developed to help farmers prevent crop loss. The three most common traits found in GMO crops are:

Resistance to insect damageTolerance to herbicidesResistance to plant virusesResistant to drought, easing the demand for water

Not Just In Your Food

Cotton can also be ‘GMO’d’, and as a result, a whole ton of other everyday items have GMO ingredients in them.5 Sheets, towels, clothes, you name it, if it’s cotton, GMO could be in there too. It doesn’t stop at cotton though. GMOs can be found in a bunch of other products. Alcohol can be made from GM corn and soy, so as a result GM can be found in toiletries, hand sanitizer, ink, gasoline - the list is as surprising and diverse as it comes.

GMO VS. HYBRID

One of the key points is that hybrid plants aren’t the same as GMOs. “Hybrid seeds come from pollen exchange within the same species, directed by human hands. GMO seeds are genetically engineered by modifying genes from unrelated species in a laboratory.

Pros of GMO

The pros of GMO crops are that they may contain more nutrients, are grown with fewer pesticides, and are usually cheaper than their non-GMO counterparts.

Cons of GMO

One of the major disadvantages of GMO corn is its potential to trigger allergies. First, genetic material from a potentially allergenic food may be transferred to corn, also transferring the allergenic properties. Secondly, genetic modification alters the actual DNA of the corn. This process introduces new proteins into the food supply that are not naturally present, opening the door for a new allergy to be developed.

Who Can Buy GMO Seeds

There are currently no genetically modified garden seeds available for sale to the general public. When farmers choose to purchase GM seed, they sign an agreement stating that they will use the seed solely for the planting of one commercial crop.

Product of the Week:

Garden Hod

Hoe Dag Tool Kit

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/G_fD0cuMQC4

View Details

You asked, Greg and Sheila answer! Many of our customers, followers, and Row By Row Group Members submitted their gardening questions and tonight, you will have them answered.

Q & A - Part 1

"Have you ever had success growing asparagus?" - Yes, we've been growing asparagus for the last 7-8 years. We have several videos on our YouTube on how to be successful growing it. The key to it is after the 3rd year of growing it, you want to cut them back. You will develop weeds around the asparagus and that's normal. If you cut them back, you'll continue to get asparagus shoots.

"What is the best way to get rid of grasshoppers? I'm surrounded by grassland and they're inundating my yard and garden." - There isn't much you can do for them organically. You need to hit them early on with a synthetic insecticide. You can rotate Bug Buster II and Neem Oil to treat them.

"Concerning nitrogen fixers, do the nitrogen-fixing plants have to die or be pruned back to release the nitrogen for other plants to scavenge from the roots left behind?" - You can't intercrop a "live" legume with a crop and expect it to exchange the nitrogen. It needs to die back and break down into the soil before it is beneficial.

"Will I get better germination on my edible hibiscus if I leave the pod on the plant longer? I don't want to leave it on too long since it could go bad but I need some tips on when is the right time to pull the seed pods." - Once it blooms and the bloom falls off, I normally wait about 5-7 days after the bloom falls off.

"I've heard it said for a long time now, insects don't attack healthy plants. Can you demystify that? - There is some truth to that. Think about it like it was your body and your immune system is weak, you are more than likely to get sick. It is more likely for an insect to attack your plant if it does not have the proper fertilization, health, etc. Insects can also attack healthy plants but they tend to fight off insect infestation easier.

Q & A - Part 2

"Can you tell me what fertilizer to use on onions and at what time?" - We recommend a well-balanced fertilizer, like 20-20-20, and alternate it with a nitrogen source like Ammonium Sulfate. Stop fertilizing 30 days before you harvest.

"Does Mrs. Hoss succession plant or intercrop in her raised beds?" - I do succession planting a lot in the spring and summer. I don't do it in the fall because the broccoli, cauliflower, etc. take longer to grow. I will intercrop with flowers in the spring and summer, I do sometimes plant my garlic and onions in with my English peas.

"What can I use next time to prevent my pumpkins from being destroyed by vine borers? I want to give it another try." - For vine borers, you want to make sure you plant earlier in the spring to get ahead of the outbreak of the vine borers. You want to spray them early on, have a good spray schedule. If they get into the vine, you're done.

"I want to bring my peppers inside for the winter. What do they need to keep producing or at least not to die over the winter months." - If you bring them inside, you'll want to keep them wet (keep the moisture to them) but I wouldn't fertilize them. Once the springtime comes, you want to re-pot the plant and then start fertilizing.

"Can you use your drip irrigation system in containers? If yes, can you show how?" - We actually have a container watering kit that is perfect for your needs. We will get a video done on it soon!

Q & A - Part 3

"When you are starting a farm on raw land, what is the best cover crop to plan to help build better soil?" - Hairy Vetch and Winter Rye are great ones for the cool season. During the warm season, you would want to go with Sunn Hemp.

"I have never been able to get bell peppers to grow to a respectable size. I am in Central North Carolina. Any ideas?" - Fertility, fertility, fertility. I struggled back in the day until I realized bell peppers LOVE fertilizer.

View Details

Tonight, Greg and Sheila talk about all things herbs and fruit orchards!! Expand your food supply!

Start Small, Start Simple

Herbs

When growing outside, consider those herbs that are hardy and can handle changing of seasons/cold weather. Lavender and Rosemary. Consider how large they will grow when planting. If planting in a raised bed, keep larger plants to the back and small plants in the front. This will make harvesting easier. Don't plant herbs together that need different amounts of sunlight and water.

You'll do well planting tarragon and basil together. They love full sun and like a bit of extra water. Put your rosemary, sage, and thyme together because they prefer drier and sandier soil.

Cool Season Herbs

Cilantro

Chives

Dill

Parsley

Warm Season Herbs

Sage

Thyme

Oregano

Mint

Bay Leaves

Fruit Orchards

Augment your supply of homegrown food beyond the traditional food garden. Choose those that bear fruit at different times of the year to further extend your harvest. Preserve homegrown fruit for jams. You can dry, freeze and ferment your fruits, as well. Greg and Sheila grow fig trees, grapes, blackberries, blueberries, mulberries, peaches, apples, lemons, limes, oranges, and strawberries!

Knowing your soil is vital. There are two important factors in determining if a particular tree or plant will grow well in your part of the country. First, you need to live within the recommended USDA Hardiness Zone and if you're planting a fruit or nut tree, you must determine if your area receives enough annual "chill hours".

Where To Plant

Look for an open spot in the yard. Fruit trees generally need at least six hours of full sunlight in order to grow strong and produce healthy fruit. Don't plant the trees where they will be shaded by your house or taller trees. Limes are excellent for those with limited space, they can be planted in larger containers and can be brought indoors for protection.

Where to Buy

Local nursery (carry trees that will grow well in your area), big-box centers, or online. Remember - bigger isn't always better, look for bulging tight pots, signs of pest or disease issues, good shape, structure, and generally healthy-looking plants.

Shop Stark Brothers Fruit Trees - use coupon code ROWBYROW10 to receive a 10% off discount on your order.

Products of the Week:

Herb Collection

Kitchen Garden Light Kit

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/g7lmB0jd1Vk

View Details

Dr. Glen Harris with the University of Georgia is back!! Tonight, he and Greg get into the data behind cover crops, the importance of the organic matter, why you should be concerned with it, and much more!

Research Project from UGA

The study measures the biomass of four cover crops planted Nov. 1 and the nitrogen available to the following crop.

https://www.farmprogress.com/cover-crops/measuring-mass-nitrogen-benefit-four-early-cover-crops

Importance of Organic Matter in Soil

Two of the biggest benefits of having the organic matter in your soil are to aid in holding water and nutrients, two of the things you need for plants to grow, besides sunlight. "If you can get your hands on good compost, man, get it in your garden", Greg says. If you don't have access to getting good compost, a good cover crop or a mixture of cover crops is the way to go.

What is Cation Exchange Capacity in Soil?

Cation exchange capacity is the total capacity of soil to hold exchangeable cations. Dr. Glen Harris states, "Soils have a net negative charge, the negative charges come from clay and organic matter. They hold a lot of the positive things in your soil. The more clay and organic matter you have, the better your soil will be at holding the cations."

Cover Crops

Rye is typically a cool-season cover crop is a great suppressor of weeds, adds organic matter into the soil, reduces erosion, and works to scavenge nitrogen. Clover cover crops improve nitrogen-fixation, a great ground cover, and the clovers make a great crop to have before planting vegetables. Tillage Radish is one of the best cover crops for improving soil quality and reducing soil pest pressure. Hairy Vetch is a cool-season cover crop that fixes a significant amount of nitrogen, in addition to reducing erosion and providing weed suppression for garden soils. Check out all of our Cover Crops here.

Products of the Week:

Cover Crops

Vermiculite

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/bXyH9C4epE4

View Details

It's all about garlic!! A deep dive into the types of garlic, how to plant, best practices for growing, fertilizing, and more!

Growing Garlic

Nutrition and Health Benefits

Garlic contains allicin, a sulfur compound with many health benefits: an ancient plant used for flavor, health, and medicine for 5,000 years with only a small number of calories. Studies have shown that the properties of garlic can help lower blood pressure, reduce your risk of heart disease, and boost your immune system. It also contains antioxidants that may help people avoid Alzheimer's disease and dementia.

Types of Garlic

There are over 600 named varieties, grouped into three types.

Hard-Neck (ophioscorodon) (German White)

Fewer but larger clovesEasier to grow in cold weatherStronger FlavorDoesn't store as wellHarder to braid

Soft-Neck (sativum) (most grocery store bought is soft-neck)

Stores the longestMild in flavorLarger bulbs and more clovesGrows best inr egions with mild wintersBest for braiding

Elephant

Actually, a leek.Grows largest of all typesHas the mildest flavorStores wellDoes not braid

How To Grow

Plant from "seed garlic" bulbs purchased or from the previous season.

"Store" garlic is often sprayed with growth inhibitor.Seed garlic has not been sprayedSeperate the cloves, do not cut them up. Plant with blunt root facing down, pointed end facing up.

You'll want to space cloves 4"-6" apart and 1"-2" deep. You should have fertile soil, well-draining is a must, pH neutral, and you should avoid planting where alliums have been planted the previous season. Organic fertilizers can help its condition if you want to take the extra step to support your growing garlic. Garlic prefers full sun, at least 6 hours of daily sunlight. Water 1" per week, let the soil dry between watering, you don't want to overwater!

Fertilize every 2-3 weeks with Dr. Joe Fertilizing Tabs (raised beds) or with 20-20-20 and Microboost (In-ground) and keep the soil moist during fertilization. Har-neck garlic varieties produce scapes around the spring and summer, by removing them, you can encourage the production of larger bulbs.

When To Harvest

You can identify garlic bulbs that are ready to be pulled from the soil when you spot green leaves growing on the sides. Check to see if the leaves at the bottom of the stem are brown - if they are, your garlic should be ready to harvest! Before pulling your bulbs, take the time to loosen the soil around the plant. You can use a digging fork but make sure you insert it away from the bulb.

Storing Your Garlic After Harvest

Let your garlic cure after harvesting it by leaving it in a cool space with good ventilation. After this period is up, you can store your harvest in a cool, and dark spot. Your garlic should not be refrigerated. Soft-neck garlic lasts longer after being harvested than hard-neck garlic. With soft-neck garlic, you can expect your bulbs to stay in good condition for 9 months to 1 year.

Alternatively, you can leave the tops on, braid your garlic, and hang them in strings. The key here is to never store them in an airtight container. Garlic bulbs should be kept in a place where they can continue to get airflow.

Products of the Week:

Root Pouch

Complete Organic Fertilizer

Dr. Joe Fertilizing Tablets

Hanging Grow Light

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/oFlVbZg6s30

View Details

Tonight, Greg and Sheila do a deep dive into everything onions! When to plant, how to fertilize, and so much more!

The Right Kind of Onions

Short Day

Short-Day varieties will form bulbs with 10-12 hours of daylight and only need mild winter climates (Zones 7 and warmer). These should be planted in the fall for maturity in late spring.

Intermediate Day

Intermediate-Day varieties will form bulbs with 12-14 hours of daylight, normally grown in zones 5-7, and should be planted in the fall.

Long Day

Long-Day varieties will form bulbs with 14-16 hours of daylight, typically grown in northern regions (Zones 6 and colder), and planted in late winter/early spring.

Types of Onions

Bulbing Onions Spring/Bunching OnionsMultiplying

Fertilizing Bulbing Onions

Two important tips to remember, plant the right type of onion for your area and plant them at the right time. (Refer above)

In-Ground Planting for Zone 8 - make sure your soil PH is between 6.0 - 6.5, about 1 week before you plant you will need to incorporate 1.5 cups per 10 ft. of the row, of Complete Organic Fertilizer into your soil. Two weeks after planting your onions, add 2 cups of 20-20-20 per 1,000 sq. ft of garden space to your Hoss Fertilizer Injector. Every week after (for 3 consecutive weeks), you will add 2 cups of 20-20-20 and 1/2 cup of Microboost per 1,000 sq. ft. of garden space to your Hoss Fertilizer Injector. Every 4th week, side-dress with ammonium sulfate. About 30 days before you get ready to harvest your onions, you want to stop fertilizing your onions.

Raised Bed Planting for Zone 8 - make sure your soil PH is between 6.0 - 6.5, about 1 week before you plant you will need to incorporate 1.5 cups per 10 ft. of the row, of Complete Organic Fertilizer into your soil. Two weeks after you plant your onions, side-dress 2 cups of Hoss Complete Organic Fertilizer per 10 ft. of row. Every week (for 3 consecutive weeks), use one tablet of each of Dr. Joe All-Purpose Growing Bubble and Dr. Joe Nutri Bubble (mix into a 1 gallon - 5-gallon watering container). Apply the Dr. Joe fertilizer as a drench to 10 ft. of row. Every 4th week, 1/2 cup Hoss Premium Ammonium Sulfate to 10 ft. of row. Repeat as necessary until 30 days before bulbing process.

Products of the Week:

Root Pouch

Onion Plants

Warrior Bunching Onions

Natsuguro Bunching Onions

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/1SRYcgFK884

View Details

Tonight, Greg and Sheila discuss their experiences at the Homesteaders of America Conference in Virginia this past weekend. Met with lots of affiliates, YouTubers, fans of Hoss Tools, and so much more!

What's Up in the Veg and Flower Garden:

Out in the main garden, Greg has lots of Sun Sugar tomatoes growing, along with his delicata squash. Sheila is still harvesting Jambalaya Okra and has finally started seeing blooms on her Roselle Hibiscus after many months of waiting.

Homesteaders of America

Greg and Sheila both agreed that it was a truly magical and heartwarming experience to be able to meet and see everyone at the Homesteaders of America Conference. "We were surrounded by so many great, knowledgable people - from YouTubers, Affiliates, and Hoss Tools Family, we are truly blessed.", Greg Says. "It was so heartwarming to be able to hug, shake hands, share stories, and finally meet a lot of these people we've known for years face to face and also add to our Hoss Tools family.", Sheila added. We took a lot of our affiliates that were there out to dinner and had a wonderful time with everyone. They have given us much advice on how to get started in raising pigs.

Cattywampus Acres

Jason and Lauren, from Metro Atlanta, make handcrafted soap and goodies from goat's milk. Jason is a police officer and Lauren is a butcher. On their farm, they have goats, pigs, chickens, a mini donkey, and a garden. Give them a follow here!

4 Kids and A Farm

Whispering Willow Farm

Just Dig It Farm

Tracy and Gene, from Alabama, have a dream of becoming self-sufficient and striving for a better, healthier lifestyle. Tracy has the most beautiful cottage garden. If you want to be inspired by an amazing potager garden, you should check them out. They have lots of animals, orchards, and she is such an inspiration to Sheila. Follow them!

Stivers Homestead

2 Quacks & 5 Clucks Farm

The Honeystead

Kaylee from Quail Hollow Farm is a beekeeper, gardener, and forager. On her farm, she has chickens, goats, cows, honeybees, and pigs. She is extremely knowledgeable in beekeeping and has a wealth of knowledge of herbs. She spoke at the conference as well, her topic was "How to keep your bees alive and healthy through the winter." If you are wanting to get into beekeeping, Kaylee is the one to follow!

Crowley House Flower Farm

Jason and Beth are from Oregon. Beth is a floral designer, flower farmer, and gardener. She is also an author.

View Details

Tonight, it is Sheila's turn to answer the gardening questions. She speaks on preserving, raised beds, and so much more! Even how she "puts up with Greg".

Ask a Gardening Expert

Q & A

What tips can you share for someone just getting started with canning and preserving their harvest?

Find a mentor with experienceUse fresh produce in good conditionHave all the proper equipment/ingredients before you startSet aside the time, once you start you have to finishFollow directions/recipe ingredients exactly

What are things you can every single year?

SoupTomatoes (stweed, Italian, Juice, Cherry)Green BeansPickles

Can you recommend some books on canning that would have information on what to look for in a pressure canner and recipes?

Sheila uses the "Ball, Blue Book - guide to preserving". It has a lot of information on the different types of pressure canners, as well as recipes.

How is irrigation systems set up in raised beds?

Currently, Sheila is using a water hose, watering can, and sometimes a sprinkler due to the fact that her 20 year+ old raised beds and the wood is "giving way". There is no system set up right now but Greg plans on redesigning the raised beds and getting the system put down.

So, you use cover crops in your raised beds?

"Not intentionally but I do plant mustard in the Fall, and in the summer I will rotate sunflowers in most of the beds.", Sheila says. It's really easy to do. I never keep my raised beds empty.

Hello, Mrs. Hoss. What are your favorite recipes for making pickled okra and whole pickles? Thank you.

"I do 3 types of pickled okra, sweet, spicy, and dill. My "go-to" book for these recipes is the Pickled Pantry. Hoss prefers the spicy okra. If you will email custserv@hosstools.com, and request the recipes, we will be happy to send them to you. As far as pickle recipes, I always use my grandmother's recipes for sweet pickles, fermented dill, and bread and butter.", Sheila says.

What is the best way to get into canning? Books first or jump right in?

Definitely go by a recipe from a trusted source. I love the Ball Book. Begin with something simple that requires just a water bath, such as tomatoes.

Should I add compost every year to my raised beds? I have mostly flowers. Some are perennials. Most are annuals; I had some red snapper tomatoes. Can I plant tomatoes there next year? I've heard it's not a good idea.

I add compost twice a year to my raised beds. Before my summer crop and before my fall crops. Yes, tomatoes can be planted behind the flowers.

What do you personally water bath can?

Any type of tomatoes and bread and butter pickles. I use my pressure canner for vegetables, meats, poultry, and soups/stews because of the low acidity.

Do you have any recipes for preserving homegrown ginger? (Not candied ginger)

I do not but if any of our listeners do, please send them in so we can share them.

Besides fermenting, what other ways can you preserve cabbage? Is it possible to freeze it in shreds?

I have a recipe in the Blue Book for Freezer Slaw, it includes shredded cabbage, peppers, onions, and carrots. You can email us at custserv@hosstools.com for the recipe. We will send it out to you.

How do you amend your raised beds?

I use the compost and complete organic fertilizer twice a year. If you follow @mamahosstools on TikTok, there is a video from back in the spring of how I amend my beds.

I'm in Zone 8 (in Auburn) and can't grow carrots to save my life. Any advice would be helpful.

Loose, well-drained soil in a sunny spot. The soil needs to be rich high in organic matter. One of the most important things to remember is the keep them watered. I water twice a day until they germinate. Needs at least 1" of water per week. 6-8 hours of sunlight per day.

What is the best layout for raised beds in a small yard? What to plant, how many per bed, etc. Ya'll are closer to my zone here in North Carolina.

View Details

We have a very special guest on the show, Dr. Glen Harris of the University of Georgia. Glen specializes in Environmental Soil & Fertilizers. Tonight, Greg and Glen do a deep dive into what exactly is in fertilizers. It's time to plant cool weather cover crops and short maturing greens (Mustard, Turnips, Kohlrabi, and Spinach).

What's In Fertilizer?

Fertilizer Labels

A generic label in most garden centers uses 13-13-13. With any and all labels, the first number you see on a fertilizer label is for Nitrogen, the second number is phosphorous, and the third is Potassium. (N, P, K) Glen states that the numbers on these labels are all the same around the world! For it to be a "complete fertilizer" it will need to also include micronutrients as the secondary, such as calcium, magnesium, sulfur, and iron (to name a few).

Nitrogen

Ammoniacal Nitrogen (NH3-N) is nitrogen derived from ammonia. One form of nitrogen that your plants regularly use. Most commonly found in the soil is ammonium. It is naturally created by the nitrogen cycle (or introduced) through synthesized fertilizers and deposited into the soil. If you have a high PH in your soil, it can "gas up" and leave the soil (volatilization).

Plants have the ability to take up many chemical forms of nitrogen. Most common, Ammonium (NH-4) which has a positive charge and can be held by the soil; Nitrate (NO-3) which has a negative charge and will have trouble holding onto the soil (too much rain can cause this issue), and Urea ((NH-2)CO)) which has no charge. Many commercial fertilizers contain mixes of a combination of all three of these nitrogen forms. Plants need both Ammonium and Nitrate. Nitrate is very important for your soil and it is the main driver for proteins in your plant.

Urea Nitrogen, when applied to your soil, begins to break down as soon as it is applied. It will hydrolyze and convert into ammonium and carbon dioxide. The main drawback with Urea is the tendency to be lost through volatilization, which is the loss of applied nitrogen to the atmosphere as ammonia gas.

Phosphate/Phosphorous

Phosphorous plays a primary role in storing and transferring energy produced by photosynthesis for use in the growth and reproductive process in your plants. Rock Phosphate is an organic source of phosphorous and an issue with this source when putting it directly into your garden. Other types include wood ash, bone meal, manure, and vermicomposted manure. Wood Ash is the most rapidly available organic source of phosphate.

"Phosphorous should be managed. It is immobile in our soil, will build up and get bound in our soil.", Glen Harris states. It is important for early seed/seedling growth. The roots of the seedlings will have to intercept with the phosphorous and that is mainly why there is phosphorous used in started fertilizers.

Potassium

Potassium Chloride is the most widely used potassium source worldwide, this aids healthy plant growth disease resistance. It is associated with the movement of water, carbohydrates, and nutrients in plant tissue. The common salt often referred to as potash, is widely used as a major fertilizer. Potassium also helps in reducing water loss and wilting, it also reduces respiration, preventing energy losses.

Potassium chloride is a naturally mined salt, and surprisingly it is considered non-organic. You do not want too much or it could potentially kill the microbes in your soil but if used correctly, it will be very beneficial to your soil.

Just as Important

Boron is a secondary element and many of the vegetable crops need and love boron in the soil. Beets and corn are two of those that need boron.

Sulfur is an anion, and it is very leachable. 90% of sulfur in soil is found in organic matter, which mineralizes and releases sulfur to the plants. Onions and Garlic love sulfur. Sweet onions like sulfur in the early stages of growth.

Calcium plays a vital role in plant growth,

View Details

Tonight, Jennifer with Fancy Girl Farms joins Greg in a discussion into flower farming and how you and your children can enjoy the growing beautiful flowers all year long and make a little extra cash doing it!

What's Up in the Veg and Flower Garden:

In the recent weeks here in southwest Georgia, there has been a lot of rain, which has put so many farmers and gardeners behind on their fall planting. With too much rain, the ground is too saturated to plant. Greg is planning on starting his turnips and mustards in the next couple of weeks. In winter cover crops, in Zone 8 you want to go ahead and start thinking about getting your cover crops in the ground between October 1st through October 15th. Greg's favorite cover crop has always been clover. Jennifer stated that she planted red clover last year and that it did great but the white dutch clover was an issue for her. Greg suggests that Hairy Vtech and Winter Rye is the "GO-TO" mix for beginners and for those who do not know which cover crop they need to plant.

Cool Season Flowers

For the home gardener, Jennifer suggests growing Snapdragons. Snapdragons have great germination and are easy to start from seed. They take that frost great and will over-winter better than most any flower. Sweet Peas is another one that many people do not think of growing like a flower, they do require protection from the frost but when they bloom in the early spring, they don't have much bloom time but when they do, they smell amazing and look great. Strawflowers are also one that Fancy Girl Farms is growing that is very easy to grow in the winter.

Flower Arrangement:

Jennifer suggests using the 5 key ingredients in flower farming while making bouquets; focal flowers, fillers, spikes, discs, and your airy flowers. Zinnias are considered a disc or focal flower depending on the time of the year. Basil is another great filler for bouquets, adds a wonderful smell and beautiful greenery. A spike flower like the salvia or any blue flower will make the bouquet pop. Celosia is also considered a "spike" flower, it will give you the color and greenery.

Making Extra Money Growing Flowers:

How kids (and you) can make some extra money, Flower Farming! It teaches kids the value of the business and getting them involved in the importance of growing. Greg asks, "What is easy to grow for the beginner"? Jennifer suggests starting with Zinnias, the Zinnia is inexpensive, great germination rate, and produces so many blooms. Sunflowers is the 2nd top flower to grow for the beginner. Sunnies can be a "one-hit wonder", like the Pro-Cut Sunflowers. Pro-Cut produces a single stem and single bloom but with so many variations of colors, you will be a big hit at the marker. Most market farmers will get $.75 - $1.25 per stem for the sunflowers. Jennifer suggests doing a "You-Cut" day where you can be open to the public and they can cut their own sunflowers or zinnias, of course, you want to have a larger area for this. Lemon Basil and Cinnamon Basil are great to grow for bouquets; herbs, in general, are great. Think outside of the box!!

What Do You Need To Get Started:

Knowledge!! Do your research! Jennifer suggests finding a flower farmer that has been doing it a long time. Lisa Ziegler is a great one to start with, she has many books and online classes that you can take as beginners. "It truly is just learning how to start seeds and learning from there, if you can read some books and do some research before you get started, you will already be ahead of the game.", Jennifer states. Knowing what type of nutrients they need, how much water, and have just a little patience and you will be growing in no time!

Different Ways To Sell:

Pop-Up Markets are great to have at your home. They are great for a "You-Pick" as well. Farmers Market is another good way to sell your flowers but they will take up a whole Saturday (putting up/breaking down your booth, set up, etc.

View Details

We are excited to have Tracy Lee from Sakata Seeds back at Hoss HQ. With over 25 years of experience in the seed industry, Tracey has a wealth of knowledge of seed varieties of which she and Greg will discuss tonight!

Insights on Varieties for Fall Planting:

What are Brassicas? Broccoli, Kale, Cabbage, Cauliflower, Brussel Sprouts, among many others, are just a few in the brassica family.

Broccoli

Tracy says " If you are hesitant at first, once you know what variety to purchase and what to look for then you will want to continue to grow broccoli. Broccoli is a very popular and big commercial crop, if you are growing or eating broccoli, there is a 75% chance it came from Sakata Seeds.

"Green Magic Broccoli is one of the best varieties to start with if you are a beginner or wanting to have great success in your harvesting. This variety (unlike many varieties) isn't "too" specific, meaning it can be grown almost anywhere and in any climate. It is wildly adapted. It will be your best bet.", Tracy says.

"Imperial Broccoli has a really strong root system and is one of the best as far as heat tolerance.", Tracy states. Greg suggests that if you are a beginner gardener or just new to growing broccoli, Imperial is the way to go.

Cauliflower

Cauliflower gets a bad reputation, it is one of the least grown crops in the home garden. "It can be a little more finicky than a lot of the other cold crops, it is a little more skeptical to heat damage and will bolt as soon as it gets warm. Frost does not improve cauliflower, you want to give it plenty of time to be able to develop ahead before your first frost.", Tracy says.

To protect the color of your cauliflower, you can take a rubber band and pull the leaves up around the head when the head is about 3-4", the leaves will shade the head and protect the color of the head.

Twister Cauliflower has a bright white head and how it got its name is from the leaves being able to fold up on its own and protect the head without having to rubber band those leaves yourself. It is also a variety that is only available to the home gardener that will do that. A "self-wrapper" variety.

Collards

Collards aren't picky when it comes to the weather, they are way more adaptable than other plants. Flash collards mature early, you can continue to cut back or "crop" this variety. "You will get a lot nicer, bigger, more uniform leaves with flash collards.", Tracy says.

A fun fact on Flash Collard, this variety has become extremely popular for growing baby greens and microgreens indoors.

Kale

Kale is known as the "superfood." Interestingly, Kale is the most cold-hardy plant. It can tolerate temperatures down to zero degrees Fahrenheit and can withstand snow. Normally, Kale takes about 3 months to mature. The top 3 most popular varieties are Red Russian Kale, Lacinato Kale, and Blue Ridge Kale.

Cabbage

"Cabbage, in general, will take freezing temperatures but it can affect the texture of the cabbage head.", Tracy says. The Bobcat Cabbage variety is considered a "fresh market" cabbage because it doesn't have that stronger, sharper, or "old-fashion" cabbage taste but it is on the sweeter side. This variety has an extremely dense head. If you get a lot of rain, cabbage heads will split.

China Star is Chinese cabbage. The best way to describe it to someone who has never tried it is "tastes like cabbage, feels like lettuce". It has the texture and the look of crisp, romaine lettuce.

Joi Choi Chinese Cabbage is a Pok Choi, closely related to the China Star. This variety is very popular to grow and continuously cut the leaves early for salads. A very easy variety to grow and it has since become Sakata's #1 Pok Choi variety to grow and you will want to direct seed it.

Kohlrabi

Very popular in the mid-west, Kohlrabi (also known as German Turnip), with a taste very similar to a water chestnut. Kohlrabi varieties normally have quick maturity dates.

View Details

Tonight, Greg and Sheila do a rapid-fire Q & A session. We asked our followers and members of the Row By Row Facebook group to send in gardening questions that they may have for Greg to answer.

Questions & Answers Part 1:

Thoughts on using Round-Up Weed Kill around the edge of the garden? I'm in Zone 8 a/b and hybrid Bermuda grass runners are hard to keep out. "There is a lot of controversy out there regarding using "round-up" but I use it around the edge of my garden. It is ideal to use for the grass runners but ultimately it is a personal preference. I do not use it in my vegetable garden but I have been known to edge my garden with it", Greg states.

Will there ever be a clear dome made for the Heavy-Duty Bottom Trays? I don't have a greenhouse and it would be helpful for us in germinating our seeds in the house. "Probably not, the heavy-duty bottom tray is a catch basin for overflow of water for the 162 cell and 338 cell seed starting trays. There are no domes currently out there that are USA-made that we can find to carry. We do have smaller trays that have domes but for the larger trays, we do not have them", Greg answers.

All of my fall crops are loaded with whiteflies. They fly out like crazy. I sprayed with Sevin but it doesn't even phase them and I spray them when they are flying out as well, doesn't seem to affect them. "Whiteflies are tough to get rid of. We have done a couple of videos on this exact issue. You want to use Horticultural Oil (you can even use dish detergent), spray early in the morning or late in the evening, spray underneath the leaf." Greg says.

What vegetable or flower should never be grown in a pot because their roots grow so deep? "I'm not saying it can't be done but I would not grow corn, okra, or roselle in pots because of their deep root system.", Greg states.

Questions & Answers Part 2:

How do you know when to harvest the Roselle bush? "You want to pick it 7-10 days after it blooms, harvest it when it's tender, not when it's dry. The more you harvest, the more blooms you will have and will be able to continue to harvest for a few weeks.", Sheila answers.

Can I plant swiss chard right now in Zone 8? "Heck yeah, you have plenty of time to plant swiss chard. It does plenty of cold weather, I would say you can plant all the way up to November.", Greg says.

Can potatoes be planted again in summer or fall? I live in North Georgia, Zone 7B. "Potatoes can be grown either time, it is a lot more difficult to get seed potatoes in the fall but it can be done. Potatoes do not like the summer heat, we will plant them in the early spring and leave the summertime for okra", Greg answers.

What are tomato varieties that you have that would do good for fall and when should they be started? "Seems like you may be a little late, we normally plant our fall tomatoes in July in Zone 8. The two varieties that I am growing that I believe would be good for almost anywhere in the fall is Florida 91 and Homestead varieties."

Questions & Answers Part 3:

When to plant collards, sown in the ground in Zone 8a for the fall? Greg says, "You can plant them now and continue to plant them up until early November."

When do I start onions and garlic in Zone 7b, slightly north of Atlanta? "With garlic, you want to plant it 2-4 weeks before your first frost date. If you are growing a short day onion variety it will be the same thing, 2-4 weeks before the first frost. Anytime between October 15th and the first of November would be the ideal time to plant both, garlic and onions in Zone 7."

I'm in South Florida, I've heard that peppers love the sun. I've had some issues with my pepper plants not producing any fruit, can heat be the problem? Greg states," We typically don't grow peppers in the heat of the summer. I have found that tomatoes and peppers do not do well in extreme heat. They do love the sun but early spring and early fall sun are best."

View Details

Tonight Greg and special guest, Jeremy Kichler from the University of Georgia Corporative Extension discuss all the dirty details on soil sample basics. Jeremy is the Colquitt County agent and has been helping commercial farmers, gardeners, and new homeowners for 21 years with researched-based information.

BASIC SOIL SAMPLING

Soil sample bags are available at most county extension offices. Soil samples routinely check the PH, Sulfur, Calcium, Magnesium, Sodium and so much more! If you are testing a large amount of area, you may need more than one soil sample if the soil has a lot of variation, you should take more than one sample.

Collecting Soil Sample

Most county extension offices will lend you a soil probe to collect your soil samples, you can also use a shovel. In gardening, get 6"-8" deep (around the root zone), for a lawn sample you want to go 4" deep and for orchards 8"-10". It all depends on what you are wanting to test and how deep-rooted it is. A good way to make sure you have a good test is to collect 10-12 samples throughout the area you are working with, mix them up in a "plastic" bucket (using a galvanized bucket will throw your zinc reading off), and then collect your sample with soil (fill to the line). It is very important to make sure all of your information is filled out on your soil sample bag. The typical basic soil sample costs $6.00 (USD) plus postage.

What do you get with a soil sample test?

Collecting a sample of soil is very beneficial, you receive a test of your soil levels of potassium, phosphorous, calcium, potassium, zinc, magnesium, and most importantly soil PH. Greg recommends adjusting PH levels (if needed) with pelletized lime. Potassium and phosphorous are two of three major elements you need to have a successful garden. If you're wanting to have a good crop of corn, phosphorous is a key element, if you are too high in this element, you can use a fertilizer with lower phosphorus (15-0-15). Potassium helps with root development and the overall health of the plant; if your soil has too much potassium, it can be leached out with a big amount of rain.

Calcium and Magnesium are two of the most misunderstood elements in the soil for vegetable gardeners. Calcium is the element that helps build the cell thickness in certain plants, such as bell peppers, and prevents blossom end rot. If calcium and magnesium get out of balance with one another, they can compete with one another. If you need to add magnesium, you can use Magnesium Sulfate. Both of these elements have the same charge but will work against each other. Zinc is an important element when it comes to pecan orchards or cornfields. If you have high zinc index levels in your soil, the higher your PH levels need to be. Greg and Jeremy cannot stress the importance of knowing soil sample basics and getting a soil sample done before gardening.

Vegetable & Ornamental Weeder

Vegetable & Ornamental Weeder is a preemergence herbicide, with the main ingredient of Trifluralin. Trifluralin is a root inhibitor, if you already have weeds up in your garden, this product will not help you. You can use the Vegetable & Ornamental Weeder will work on crabgrass, pigweed, small seed grasses, and other broadleaf grass (does not work with nutgrass). Make sure your plants (such as pumpkins, cucumbers, squash, etc.) are around 5" in height before you use the weeder around your plants.

Products of the Week

Vegetable & Ornamental Weeder

Strawberry Plugs

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/rYp2XzPl650

View Details

Challenges of Growing Fall Garden:

Temperature

For gardeners in late summer months, it can be tough. The heat in the southern states can become a big challenge with your spring/summer crops winding down and starting to die off. Temperature plays a big factor in wanting to get out and be in the garden. August and September normally are months of transition, starting to plan your fall garden, getting your seeds started and figuring out when to direct seed or transplant is a big factor in fall gardening. Time Management is important, garden in the early morning and late evening.

Weather

Unpredictable weather is another big factor in the southern states. A lot of rain can cause many issues in the gardening including diseased plants, such as powdery mildew, and blight. It can also stunt your crop and prevent pollinators from being able to work affecting the blossoming of fruits and vegetables. Dry weather also plays a big factor during the transition period. Drip Irrigation is a garden saver when it comes to having dry weather. Living in states that have tropical storms and hurricanes you may tend to question whether or not you would need a drip irrigation system but it is always a good idea to put down your drip tape just as a precaution.

Bug Pressure

Whiteflies are one of the biggest issues you will see during the late summer months, typically feeding on the undersides of plant leaves. They are closely related to aphids, mealybugs, and scale. Horticultural Oil works great on soft-bodied insects, safe and you can spray up until harvesting. It is best to spray early morning and/or late in the afternoon. Horticultural Oil will not work on worms, such as cabbage loopers and horn worms because they can become problematic as well. Spinosad, Monterey B.T., and Bug Buster II, you can use any these by themselves or together. A good schedule is rotating Spinosad, B.T., and Bug Buster II every 7 days.

Disease Problems

There is more humidity in the fall, which means more plant diseases. The hot temperatures and humidity will create powdery or Downey mildew in your cucumber and squash plants. Planting disease resistant varieties will also help to combat certain diseases. A fungicide and a insecticide on a 7 day schedule. Garden Phos is great for controlling late blight, root rot, and more. Stay proactive!

Weed Pressure

Weed pressure is always the worst in the fall, you are fighting against summer annuals and summer perennials, along with summer and winter weeds. Crabgrass is one of the biggest issues many gardeners have. Vegetable and Ornamental Weeder is good to use in the garden but make sure you read the label to know where you can use it depending on what crops you have growing.

Exciting Things From Hoss Tools

We currently preselling Strawberry Plugs from Alabama, Florida, Georgia and Mississippi. We also will have German White Garlic cloves in the next few weeks which we've never provided to our customers in the past, we will, of course, have Elephant Garlic and our 3 varieties of shallots. Another exciting plant we will provide this fall will be 3 varieties of onion bulbs.

Products of the Week

Strawberry Plugs

Horticultural Oil

Vegetable & Ornamental Weeder

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OArTyatt4hU

View Details

What To Plant Now In Your Zone

Zone 9

Now: Continue planting flowers and cover crops, fall corn can be planted until the end of August, get ready for fall planting of Brassicas (Broccoli, Brussel Sprouts, Cauliflower, Cabbage) - make a plan

September 15th - September 30th - Plant onion seeds (short-day varieties)

Zone 8

Now: Plant sweet corn, start first planting of Cabbage and Brussel Sprouts in trays.

September 1st - get ready to plant Brassicas (Broccoli, Kohlrabi, Brussel Sprouts, Cauliflower, Cabbage) You can still plant zinnias and sunflowers, and some cover crops. Plant short-term cover crops such as Buckwheat, Sorghum Sudangrass, and Kodiak Brown; Sunn Hemp may be too late to plant at this time to get the full benefits. Plant short-day onion varieties between September 1st - September 15th.

Zone 7

Now: Start first planting of Cabbage and Brussel Sprouts in trays now. Start planning Brassicas (Broccoli, Brussel Sprouts, Kohlrabi, Cauliflower) on September 1st. Similar to Zone 8, you still have time to plant flowers and cover crops. Be sure to plant short-term cover crops.

Zone 6

Now: Plant English Peas, Beans, Collards, Turnips, Mustards, Beets, and Radishes.

Start your cool-season cover crops (Hairy Vetch, Crimson Clover, Broadleaf Mustard, Kodiak Bron Mustard)

Greg's Seed Recommendations

Cabbage:

Charleston Wakefield - a wonderful flavored heirloom variety, 75 days to maturity, heat-tolerant with excellent storage capabilities

Cheers - a hybrid, easy to grow, disease-resistant, 75 days to maturity, and can produce heads up to 5 lbs.

Red Jewell: a hybrid variety, deep red in color, 3-3.5 lb. heads, 75-day maturity

Broccoli:

Green Magic - this variety is probably the most heat-tolerant variety, 55 days to maturity, and has a uniform production

Imperial - a heat-tolerant, hybrid variety that is known for its tight head that is great for freezing

Waltham 29 - heirloom variety, normally you want to use this variety as a follow-up behind your Green Magic or Imperial varieties due to it being more cold-tolerant.

Brussel Sprouts:

Jade Cross - a hybrid variety, AAS winner, 90 day maturity, Greg's tip - you must have patience when growing Brussel sprouts

Catskill - an heirloom variety, 100 days to maturity, and produces loads of 2" sprouts

Red Bull - an open-pollinated variety, deep-red in color, very nutritious, 90 days to maturity.

Brassica Germination Tips: 75-80 degree soil temperature, keep them wet! Do not let your brassicas dry out!

Fall Corn:

Ambrosia - a hybrid variety, Bi-Color, sugary-enhanced (se) variety, 75 days to maturity. Zones 7,8,9 can still plant corn.

Products of the Week

Certified-Organic Strawberries

Hoss Premium Seed Starting Mix

Collards

Broccoli

Mustards

Onions

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=i3OcvdX2aiY

View Details

With over 22 years in the growing business, Logan McLean of Cool Springs Nursery joins Greg on the Row By Row Show tonight to discuss and break down the different types of seed starting mix (potting soil).

Garden Update

August is Greg's least favorite month in the garden. With it being so hot in south Georgia, he is using this time to prepare for his fall garden with his silage tarps. Tarping, bed prep for the fall sweet corn crop. His first crop of cabbage and broccoli started in the greenhouse. Greg recommends starting varieties in the Brassica family (Broccoli) inside, if you plant start them in the greenhouse and have temperatures that reach in the 100s, you could have problems; he also states that there is still time to plant cover crops and flowers!

Potting Soil Ingredients

Most of the consumer mixes that you buy in the big box store are mostly made up of Peat, which is a very common ingredient in potting soil. There are different grades of peat; the best peat to use is peat that comes from Canada, they have the superior product. Peat with a good water holding capacity is the best.

Perlite is a volcanic glass that is heated at 1,600 degrees Fahrenheit. Whereupon it pops much like popcorn and expands 13 times its former size, resulting in an incredibly lightweight material. More porous than vermiculite. It is considered non-organic. It does drain well, and there are different grades. A lot of commercial growers use perlite to put on top of the seeds/seedlings to retain moisture.

Vermiculite is a hydrous phyllosilicate mineral that undergoes significant expansion when heated. Increases water, nutrient retention, and aerates the soil; it is heated just like Perlite. The finer the grade of vermiculite, the lower the quality - which is normally what consumers receive. The commercial line isn't as fine as what the consumer would get. This mineral has major water holding capabilities. The nutrients in Vermiculite are not as good as what is in peat; vermiculite is used for aeration in your soil.

DIY Seed Starting Mix

2/4 peat

1/4 perlite

1/4 vermiculite

A good mix should be dense enough to hold the plant, allow for air exchange and water flow while retaining moisture, be free of pathogens and weed seed, and meet the need of specific crops and growing environments.

Container Mixes

One of the most used ingredients in commercial mixes is pine bark because it is economical. Pine bark needs to be aged to work well; most "container" gardeners use this mix for tomatoes but will work with almost any vegetable or fruit grown in a container. Coir is another important ingredient, it is considered coconut fiber. A natural fiber extracted from the outer husk of coconut with a very similar water holding capacity as peat.

Logan describes their companies propagation mix as using mainly sand and pine bark. Some of the varieties they propagate will have some perlite but not much. Having a mix with a good amount of pine bark and sand will help hold in moisture extremely well. Sand is used to increasing density and drainage, it is used as a filler. Logan's container mix is made up of 80% pine bark, 10% sand, and 10% peat. We do add a small amount of 3-4 month fertilizer (8 lbs per yard) which gives it a kick-start. You normally want to keep your PH level around 5-6%.

Compost

Compost adds nutrient value and micros while holding water and nutrients well, has a high cation exchange value. Most mixes are 2 parts peat, 1 part perlite, and 1 part vermiculite.

Products of the Week

California Giants Zinnia Mix

Chef's Choice Black Tomato

Hoss Premium Seed Starting Mix

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HCFwzJ4LqQw

View Details

CLEAN EATING

Throughout the last couple of years, Greg and Sheila have started trying to focus more on clean eating and sustainable living within themselves and their family, recently they have found that Microgreens is a way to benefit them all in many ways. Benefits:

Food Safety - you know exactly what has been put on your food. You do not have to worry about such things as an overdose of fertility, and certain pesticides.

Sustainability - knowing that you are not dependant on the stores or supply chain is something that creates a huge peace of mind.

Health - you won't have digestive issues due to nitrates being sprayed on the foliage of your greens like you do with industrial farming.

Being Sustainable

There are many ways to be sustainable, outdoors and indoors. Canning and preserving fruits and vegetables is always a great way to be more sustainable from your outdoor gardens. Indoor gardens are growing rapidly in popularity, more young adults are growing in their homes and apartments. The Little Birdie Series tomatoes (Rosy-Finch, Yellow Canary, and Red Robin) are easy to grow in containers indoors or on a patio. Many of the lettuce varieties and herbs can be grown indoors using the Indoor Seed Starting Light Kit.

Microgreens

Greg demonstrates how to use the Microgreens Seed Starting Kit with 3 different microgreen varieties. You want to keep your germination temperature at 73 degrees, the "grow out" time is 75 degrees. There are certain microgreen seeds that you want to "soak" and some that you do not have to. A "blackout" time is defined as the time you broadcast your seed over the seedling mix, you want to cover the seeds with the 1020 tray for the proper amount of time for seeds to germinate.

Broccoli: No soaking required, Blackout time: 2-4 days, Growout time: 10 days, Yield per 1020 tray: 8-12 oz.

Sunflower: Soak seeds: 4-8 hours, Blackout time: 2-3 days, Growout time: 10 days, Yield per 1020 tray: 1-2 lbs

Peas: Soak seeds: 12 hours, Blackout time: 1-3 days, Growout time: 10-12 days, Yield per 1020 tray: 1-2 lbs

Products of the Week

Microgreen Kit

Microgreen Products

Trays

Light Kits

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=l-NnWEvDwQw

View Details

Garden Update

Hoss Garden:

There has been a lot of rain here in south Georgia, Greg has been cleaning out a lot of the garden to make room for the next crop. Greg still has the Jing Orange Okra growing, everything else has been extinguished except for the okra and cover crops. Greg is getting excited about starting the fall crops. Lots of transplants coming up but we still have all the rain coming in, Greg plans on using the silage tarp on the plots to get them ready once the rain stops.

Raised Beds:

Greg and Sheila have pulled up all of the Zinnias, planted Jambalaya Okra, and recently planted some Sweet Dumpling Squash (winter squash). Greg has started some herbs in the greenhouse to transplant into the raised beds when ready. Sheila has also planted 3 different varieties of sunflowers, Sun Spot, Sungold, and Mardi Gras - all dwarf varieties.

Questions & Answers Part 1:

After Gardening for so Many years and seeing so many different other gardens. If you started your garden all over again, what would you do differently? Greg says, "have smaller garden plots, and we have a goal now to grow our own food all year round. Smaller plots make things so much easier to manage, you can use crop rotation, cover crops, and even give some plots a rest. In smaller plots, you can plant everything in 2 weeks intervals so your plants are ready to harvest at different times, giving you fresh vegetables for a longer period."

What are the easiest things to grow for beginning gardeners? Greg says, "Summer Squash is the easiest thing to grow by far, low maturity date not much room for error. During the fall for beginners, the best things to grow would be Radish, beets, and any leafy vegetables (Collards, turnips, and mustards). Something you could try would be Broccoli, it is not the easiest but highly rewarding."

What is the correct height I should put my grow lights at? Greg states that the general rule would be 6-10 inches from the top of the plant.

What are your favorite blackberry varieties that do have thorns? Greg is not a fan of blackberry varieties with thorns. Years ago, he did a trial with the thorn and thornless to see which one tasted better. There was not a significate difference in the taste. Greg would not recommend anyone growing the ones with thorns. His favorite is the thornless Apache Blackberry.

How long should the Hortanova trellis netting last? Greg states that it really depends on how it is stored when you are not using it. He hasn't had one go bad before and has used it for many seasons.

I have heard my whole life not to plant rows east to west only north to south. Do you gentlemen have a certain direction that you plant your crops? Greg has never heard of this theory. The main thing he says you would need to worry about is when you create the rows, is erosion. When it rains the way the water runs you want to plant your rows perpendicular to the flow.

What would you recommend for a cover crop in raised beds? Greg says, "Summer Cover crops are very limited because they all get pretty good sized and are very hard to extinguish in a raised bed. Buckwheat would be the easiest summer cover crop. Winter cover crops will almost all be fine to be grown in a raised bed, Diakon Radish, mustards, clover almost cover crop."

Could field peas be used as a cover crop and tilled into the soil? "Absolutely, Red ripper and iron clay pea. The red ripper pea would be better if you can chop it up in the end. If you have to use a lawnmower or similar to till them down the Iron Clay pea is better.", Greg says.

Questions & Answers Part 2:

I’ve heard/ seen a lot about cover crops, but I can’t wrap my mind around how to eradicate them when it comes time to plant in the spring. I saw another video you did, where you mowed the cover crops down really short, but what happens after that? "About a month before your spring garden. You want to extinguish the crop which is one of the more difficult thi...

View Details

Garden Update

Greg:

Greg has started his seeds for fall in the greenhouse. He has a few different cover crops growing (Black Oil Sunflowers & Sorghum Sudangrass). Greg says that they still have their Jing Orange Okra coming in like crazy, this variety can get a little bit longer than the normal okra varieties but has great flavor and texture.

Sheila:

Sheila is getting ready to transplant more sunflowers in her raised beds. Sungold, Mardi Gras, and Sun Spot are the 3 different varieties Sheila is starting this go around but will also be planting more every two weeks to keep them blooming well into the fall. She recently tested a theory on soaking seeds. The "seed soaking" theory was to see if it made a difference with germination if you soaked seeds overnight. Jambalaya seeds were soaked in milk, another batch in water, and then none were soaked at all... the conclusion? It did not make a difference if you soak the seeds. If you plant okra seeds in cool soil, you will have problems. We did have the "no soaking" seeds come up in 3 days! Roselle is getting taller and Sheila has had to thin out the garden.

Seeds/Product Updates

Greg has been in contact with many of the Hoss seed breeders. They say that seed prices will increase over the next year or gardening season and that the breeders' reserve on seed is getting pretty thin. Hoss Tools will be later than normal getting our seeds for the 2022 Spring Season, we should be getting our seeds in around early December. Another interesting topic, Hoss' potting soil supplier has informed Greg that there will be a shortage of potting soil going into 2022.

3 Important Fermenting Tips

Cleanliness/ types of equipment - crock vs. jarBrine/Temp/Strength (%of salt by weight in given volume of water)Monitor/Check Daily/Skim off white scum/any mold

Recipe

Mrs. Hoss' Dill Pickle Recipe

(No-Fail Half Sour Dill Pickles)

Makes about 2 Quarts

Ingredients:

4 cups of water2 TBS pickling or fine sea salt1/2 cup distilled white vinegar8 cups whole pickling cucumbers1 dill head or 6 sprigs of fresh dill4 garlic cloves, peeled

Step-By-Step:

Heat the water and salt in saucepan, stirring until the salt is fully dissolved. Add the white vinegar and let cool to room temperature.
Slice 1/16 inch off the blossom end of each cucumber
Pack a clean 2-quart canning jar or crock with the dill, garlic, and cucumbers, in that order. Pour in the brine. Weight the cucumbers so they are completely submerged in the brine.
Cover the container to exclude the air. Set the jar where the temperature will remain constant; 65-75 degrees Fahrenheit is ideal.
Check the jar daily and remove any scum that forms on the surface.
The pickles will be ready n 2 to 3 days, although full flavor will not be reached for a week. If your kitchen is reasonably cool, you can leave these pickles out for up to 2 weeks. If the brine starts to become cloudy, refrigerate immediately to prevent spoiling. The flavor of the dill and garlic will continue to develop. The pickles will keep for at least 3 months in the refrigerator.

Product of the Week

Complete Fermentation Kit

National Pickling Cucumber

Food Preservation

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_r-Y8zlBmgE

View Details

Joining us at the Hoss Headquarters is Wes Blair with Naked Hog Gardening, straight out of Louisiana it's officially a Cajun Invasion tonight; Greg and Wes discuss life on the Homestead, the dirty tricks of gardening, pepper tasting and so much more. With "Homesteading" growing in popularity over the past few years, we take every opportunity to help those who want to become more self-sufficient and grow their own food.

Garden Update

Naked Hog:

Being in Louisiana, Wes' garden seems to be all about rain and weeds this growing season. "It is very rare that we have a day without rain, which makes it difficult to get in there to take out the weeds because the soil is so wet", Wes says. "In Louisiana, we have sandy/clay soil, so it doesn't drain well due to when it hardens, it is more hard clay than anything."

Hoss Tools:

While we have had some rain in South Georgia but most days have been pretty dry and Greg leans heavily on the Drip Irrigation System during the dry days. This was the first year Greg has grown sweet corn that has not been knocked down by a storm. The first watermelon harvest didn't turn out like Greg had hoped due to the rain that started setting in but the 2nd harvest did better because of drier conditions which in turn made the watermelons taste sweeter.

Wes asked Greg if he uses drip tape under his corn, " I don't use drip tape under everything but I always use drip tape under my corn and my watermelons.

Sweet Corn Tip - When you are done harvesting your sweet corn and your stalks are green, mow it right then. They will decompose so much faster and better when they are green. They are harder to decompose if dried out.

Hoss Pumpkin Boss Contest

Who will win the title of "Hoss Pumpkin Boss"? Greg still thinks it is him! Only time will tell! Be sure to enter, the winner gets a $200 Hoss Gift Certificate!

Rules:

Tag @4_kids_and_a_farm and #hosspumpkinboss throughout the competitionThere's no tentative end date (since everyone is in different zones)You have to use these Hoss varieties - Big Max, PrizeWinner, Atlantic Giant, or Mammoth Gold (link to seeds tagged)Once your pumpkin is ready - take a photo of your winner on a scale and tag us!

Can you outgrow these YouTubers? @4_kids_and_a_farm @coghillfarm @nakedhog @adlerfarms @deepsouthhomestead

Wes' DIY Germination Chamber

Wes has created his own DIY Germination Chamber. A germination chamber is defined as "an enclosed area, where the temperature and humidity can be regulated." The reason he built his own chamber was due to the fact of having issues growing peppers in Louisiana. After picking up a small chest freezer and a small crockpot (1/2-1 qt.) with no dial, Wes filled the crockpot with water and plugged in his thermostat. Using the 162 cell seed starting tray filled with soil and topped with perlite, Wes wrapped the seed-filled 162 trays with plastic wrap and left them to germinate. Amazed by the results, the peppers germinated in four days, while the tomatoes germinated in one day. The Carolina Reaper germinated around one week.

Peppers

Greg grew several different varieties of peppers this season and has brought a few on the show for taste testing with Wes.

Gypsy Pepper doesn't get very tall and would be a perfect container variety, both described the pepper as "fruity but with a little heat."

Right on Red is a pimento-style pepper, perfect for stuffing and cooking on the grill with a sweet taste.

Aruba Cubanelle is packed full of flavor, perfect pepper for stuffing with mild heat.

Cinder Jalapeno is a jumbo-sized jalapeno pepper and like with most jalapenos, they bring the heat!

Hidalgo Poblano is used a lot of Mexican dishes, we use them to stuff them. One of Greg's favorite peppers with very little heat.

Orange You Sweet is another pimento-style pepper, perfect container pepper, and extremely sweet flavor.

Roulette Heatless Habanero was bred to get all of the heat out of the pepper...

View Details

When people think about farming and gardening, most of the time they think about the spring and summer months. The fall time of year is just as important for growing a garden especially with the prices of items in the grocery store starting to climb.

One reason people don't plant a fall garden is simply because there is so much going on in most people's lives during that time of year. Major holidays are around the corner, children are getting ready to go back to school, and your mind is not on growing things as much as it was earlier in the year.

Even with a ramped up schedule it is still very rewarding to grow a fall garden. Today we'll go over a few things that will help you plan your fall garden that will help you be successful this year.

Freezes

It's important to know what temperatures are harmful to what plants and since we are talking about a fall garden we need to address the colder temps that can happen during this time of year.

When the air temperature is below 36°F a frost can occur. There are other factors that go into making a frost such as ground temperatures and humidity but you want to watch the air temperature so you can protect your crops.

A light freeze can happen when the air temperature reaches between 29°F and 32°F. Young and tender plants are susceptible to light freezes and can be killed in these conditions. If you suspect a light freeze is on the way you may want to cover your plants to protect them.

Air temperatures that fall between 25°F and 28°F help produce hard freeze conditions. A hard freeze will kill most summer vegetables in the garden.

Any temperature below 25°F will produce a killing frost and all your plants will be damaged or killed.

When To Plant

The best time to plant for the fall will be based on when the first frost date is for your zone as well as the days to maturity for your crop. Here, we are in zone 8 and our first frost date is November 20th. It is also best to allow a few days as "cushion" days between maturity and the first frost.

To find your first frost date you can visit www.almanac.com/gardening/frostdates and input your zip code.

Examples

Let's say we wanted to grow another crop of Honey Select Sweet Corn. This variety of corn reaches maturity in 80 days. We would take our first frost date of November 20th and subtract our 80 growth days. That will give us the date of September 1st. But we also want to have a few of those cushion days to have time to harvest before the frost so we will take off 10 more days. That gives us the date of August 22nd as our sowing date for our corn.

If we wanted to plant some Lola Banana Peppers, which have a 70 day maturity, we would want to add 20 cushion days to the equation. Peppers also take an additional 6 weeks to start indoors so those 42 days would be added on as well. All these days added together get you 132 day. We take 132 day from November 20th and get July 8th.

Gentry Squash is a summer squash that takes 45 days to get to maturity. As some of you know, squash can linger out past their projected maturity dates so we will give them an extra 20 days as our cushion days. That gives us 65 days from November 20th meaning we would need to plant our squash on September 18th.

Jade Bush Beans have 55 days to maturity and you need to add 15 cushion days. Add those together for a total of 70 days. Count that back from the November 20th first frost date and you have a planting day of September 11th.

Cucumbers do well in the fall too and we plan on planting Max Pack Cucumbers. They have 55 days to maturity and we'll add 20 cushion days for a total of 75 days. That means we will plant them September 6th.

Winter squash and pumpkins have 90 to 105 days to maturity and you'll and 20 cushion days which means you want to plant them around early July.

The last example is Sa Dandy Cream Pea. They have 65 days to maturity plus we'll add 15 cushion days for a total of 80 days from November 20th...

View Details

Our corn is finally coming in and ready for harvest. This year we grew the G-90 corn for the first time. The G-90 is an Su, or standard variety of sweet corn, such as Jubilee and Silver Queen. The drawback of the Su variety is the lower sugar content. They only have about 9% sugar which means a short shelf-life, only 1 to 2 days, so it is important to process them as soon as they are harvested.

Preservation

Once you’ve harvested your corn you need to either eat it or have a way to preserve it so that it doesn’t go bad or spoil on you. There’s nothing quite like watching your crops grow and flourish with high yield only to have it spoil because you couldn’t save it after harvest.

The best thing to do is to have a plan. Your plan needs to cover from planting all the way past harvest to include how you plan on using your crop. If you are growing corn to keep for your family then there needs to be a plan for preservation of your harvest.

There are 3 ways to preserve your corn; canning, corn-on-the-cob, and freezing.

When you can your corn you have to cut the kernels from the ear and either raw pack or heat pack them. If you heat-pack you will have to use a pressure cooker.

The on the cob method tends to lose texture and flavor after a few months so it is the least desirable method of preservation. It also takes up the most room in your freezer so the ease is typically not worth it when you end up with a freezer full of corn that has no flavor.

When using the freezing method you cut the kernels off, as with the canning method, or cream the corn.

Freezing Your Corn

The method that the folks here at Hoss prefer is the freezing method after creaming the corn. It's not the easiest way to preserve corn but it has the best results and will last much longer for you.

Once you have harvested your corn you need to shuck and silk the ears, meaning you need to remove the protective leaves and then remove the silky fibers on the end of the ear.

Silking brushes are the best way to remove the fibers and we have one for $7.99 that will make that job extremely easy. Use a back and forth motion along with the corn while slowly rotating it to make sure you remove all the fibers. Don't use too much pressure as you can burst the kernels.

Once you've silked your corn you'll want to wash the ears well and let the excess water dry off completely. You don't want extra water when you cream corn.

Next, you want to use a knife and barely cut the tops off the kernels, cutting away from yourself and into your pan or bowl. Once you've removed the tops off of the kernels you will use the back of the knife to scrape the cream out of the kernels.

Once you've creamed your corn you will need to blanch it. Blanching is important because it will stop the natural enzyme actions and promote a better flavor. This process can be done before you cream if that works better for you. Simply boil your corn for 10 minutes, let it cool, then cream it. For this process, however, we blanch in the microwave after the creaming step. You'll want to use 50% power for 10 minutes, stir, then repeat. When the corn is ready the color will be more vibrant.

Take the blanched corn, let it cool off, and place it in a freezer container. If done correctly, your freshly processed corn will last up to 2 years. Make sure to label your storage container with the date so you can keep track of its time in the freezer.

Product of the Week

Corn Silking Brush

Sweet Corn Varieties

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=q3wXleUYs5w

View Details

Wayne Odom from Lakewood Farms is back at Hoss HQ to discuss all things tomatoes. With the season going strong, tomatoes are one, if not the number one fruit that everyone likes to have in their garden. The varieties are endless and have the potential to produce a heavy harvest depending on many factors. One of the biggest issues for most gardeners with growing tomatoes is Blossom End Rot.

Garden Update

This year has been the best year for Wayne in harvesting asparagus. While it does take a couple of years to actually start producing heavily, asparagus is the vegetable that keeps on giving. The harvesting season for asparagus ends late spring/early summer. Wayne is also known as the "Bee Man", this year so far his bees have produced 100 pounds of honey (2 - 5 gallon buckets), which will provide enough honey for well over a year for his family. The Benary Giant Zinnia flowers have also been a huge success at Lakewood Farms reaching over 4 feet tall, as well as having success with several different varieties of peppers, okra, and his olive trees. One of the biggest issues that Wayne is having in his garden this season is with his tomatoes and fighting Blossom End Rot.

Blind Taste Testing

With tomatoes, there can be many different color variances and of course, sizes. For instance, the Purple Boy tomato has deep hues of purple tones which are derived from the "grandparent - Cherokee Purple". The purple boy has improved disease resistance for challenging growing conditions. The Lemon Boy, another indeterminate variety has a bright-yellow skin comparable to a lemon but will it taste different than the Purple Boy? Our Red Snapper (a great "slicing" tomato), determinate variety with heavy yields ranging from large to extra-large fruits. How will these three varieties compare to one another?

First tomato taste test - Purple Boy. While blindfolded, Wayne describes this variety as tasting like a "regular" tomato, not very acidic, the texture is mushy, overall taste - "average tomato taste. Second tomato taste - Red Snapper, the texture seemed better in Wayne's opinion, not as mushy as the first variety, the flavor was less acidic. The last variety - Lemon Boy, Wayne describes this variety as juicy, great flavor, and a little acidic - definitely tastes different than the first two. Rating from 1 (the worst) to 5 (the best) for taste, Wayne rates the Purple Boy as a 4, Red Snapper as a 3, and the Lemon Boy would be a 5.

Cherry Tomato Taste Test

Mountain Vineyard - still blindfolded, Wayne describes this variety as having a firm skin, chewy texture but packs a punch! The Rosy Finch Tomato was described as juicy, the skin was not as firm as the Mountain Vineyard but definitely a favorite of Wayne's. Rating these two varieties, Wayne gives the Mountain Vineyard a 3 rating and the Rosy Finch a 4.

Blossom End Rot

Many of our fellow gardeners on our Row by Row Facebook Page fight with blossom end rot quite often, we also get many customer service emails regarding this tomato issue accoring to Greg. There are a few misconceptions regarding blossom end rot that Greg has seen a lot and one is adding magnesium sulfate (Epsom salt), adding Epsom Salt doesn't help blossom end rot whatsoever.

What Is It?

Blossom end rot is a complex problem that you have, commonly what happens is the gardener does not have the calcium. Calcium is a molecule in the soil that has a positive charge. Magnesium is also a positive charge, having too much magnesium will repel and push out the calcium in the soil. Having clay or organic soils/good compost have a negative charge so they will attract calcium and magnesium. A lack of calcium is what causes blossom end rot in plants. Once blossom end rot sets in, there is no way to fix this issue. A good comprehensive plan/preventative plan is going to help you in getting your soils rich in calcium and magnesium before you start your tomatoes. Soil samples also help in determining what is ...

View Details

Homesteading

Homesteading has been growing in popularity in the US over the last several years. But what is homesteading? One definition says it is “a lifestyle of agrarian self-sufficiency as practiced by a modern homesteader or urban homesteader.” We invited Jason from Cog Hill to talk about his homestead and a little bit about the different types there are.

Garden Update

Cog Hill:

Jason has never been able to grow sweet onions and bell peppers; while it’s always been a struggle for him in the past, this year he has great success. Normally most people will cut up their potatoes before planting them, not Jason, he planted the whole potato (Red Norland), and even with all of the rain this season and planting later than he normally does, he had a big potato harvest.

Greg:

Along with Jason, Greg planted his potatoes later this year due to all the rain but had the best potato harvest he has ever had and he is still not sure how or why. We have our G90 sweet corn that will be ready to harvest in the next couple of weeks, we are excited about that. Our Purple Boy and Lemon Boy tomatoes are both new varieties to us but we love the taste of these. Both of these varieties would make a great Market Tomato with great flavor.

What is Homesteading?

While everyone has their own opinions or ideas on homesteading, more than likely you will agree with Jason. “Farming is for profit, while Homesteading is for yourself, family and friends. You have to depend on yourself for everything like food, meat, and being sustainable.” Although some homesteads can gain profit from selling their harvest or meat, most just want to be able to grow their own food. Jason and his family raised meat chickens for 5 years, along with quail, rabbits, and ducks.

Bring completely sustainable can be very hard to do and accomplish. You have to make things work for you. Everyone has different land and soil which plays a lot into starting a homestead. “Adaption is key” in homesteading. Many years ago, most people would think of homesteading as having to live off your land because you were considered less fortunate or poor but in reality, it was because most people enjoyed doing it. If you get a chance to watch Cog Hill’s YouTube channel, you truly get a sense that Jason and his family are enjoying life on the homestead. “If we didn’t love it, we wouldn’t do it” Jason states.

Advice:

Starting a homestead can be very stressful but the number one piece of advice Jason shares to Greg is that you should go slow! Starting out it can become very overwhelming. He also recommends that you shouldn’t get caught up in “fads”, if you see one homesteader out there and they are very popular, don’t think that that is the way it should be done. You have to be yourself because every situation is different and there may be so many others out there just like you. You have to figure out what works best for you.

There are many things you can’t depend on others to tell you when starting a homestead, growing your own food is very subjective. Your soil issues may not be someone else’s soil issues which would make your watering routines different and then in turn would make your fertilization regimen different.

Principles to Follow:

Do your research!! Planting onions for warmer zones is completely different for the cooler climates. The time of year, what type of onion to plant and when to fertilize all play a HUGE factor in being successful.

Be Flexible! If something doesn’t work, change it! If you fail at something, try again! Just don’t give up!

Crops for Beginners:

Summer Gardens

Summer squash would most likely be the easiest to start, you can direct seed them and not have to start them in seed trays. Most squash varieties are pretty disease resistant, the summer squash varieties have quick maturity dates and you can continue to plant them throughout the summer months. While tomatoes are the most popular crop to grow,

View Details

Our Beginnings

Greg and his business partner at the time launched Hoss Tools in 2009 with our signature product, the Single Wheel Hoe. When Greg was around 15 years old he enjoyed gardening at home and his mother bought him his first high-arc wheel hoe to use. He used the tool often but found he didn’t like the type because, as he says, the attachments were clunky and difficult to adjust. Later on, he found a Planet Jr wheel hoe online that he liked but the supply was very limited, making them difficult to find. As they say, necessity is the mother of invention and Greg decided to make his own wheel hoe from American parts in the USA. So the adventure began!

Newer Items

Since then Hoss has ventured out into other areas of farming and gardening to provide more quality products to you; from wheel hoes and irrigation products to the Hoss Garden Seeder, Premium Garden Seeds, and pest control.

The Hoss Garden Seeder is a USA-made product that is customizable to fit your exact needs. It has two wheels that are situated on the front and backside of the seed plate to ensure your seeds are deposited perfectly within your rows. Our innovative seed plate design makes planting easy and allows you to customize your planting to meet your exact needs!

We have 35 items in our irrigation options along with a few bundles that are available, such as Mainline Tubing, Mainline Tees, Valves for your Mainline Tubing, and 8 mil. and 15 mil DripTape, and everything else from a simple system to a complete irrigation array.

Under our Premium Garden Seeds tab, you will find 48 categories of flowers and veggies that are filled with many varieties of each. You’ll find almost anything you’re looking for from flowers, like our Chocolate Cherry Sunflower and Roselle Hibiscus, to herbs, like Thyme and Borage, and even our AAS winners, such as Red Burgundy Okra and Cinderella’s Carriage Pumpkin.

We also have both organic and synthetic pest control options for you. If you’re looking to have a more organic farming plan we carry several options such as Diatomaceous Earth and Monterey Garden Insect Spray. On the other side, we carry more potent options such as Garden Phos and Fungi Max.

Coming Soon

We are excited to tell you about a couple of new things headed your way. First is a line of micro-greens and growing kits. As more and more people have shown an interest in growing their own micr-greens at home for salads, garnishes, and stir fry needs, we are bringing products to help you get started growing these nutrient-packed plants from your own home.

Worm Farming

We are going to look at what goes into worm farming and even using worms in the garden. We will look at the pros and cons of worm tea, which is one byproduct of using a raised worm composter, as well as looking at using worm castings, or worm excrement.

Greg plans to visit a local worm farm and talk with the owner of the operation to find out what she has to say about the benefits of using worms in the garden and also any downsides that worms may have.

More To Come

We have many wonderful things going on here for you and can’t wait to bring more as it becomes available. And as always, we will be testing all of these new items and retesting our current stock to ensure we offer you only the best.

Products of the Week

Hoss Straw Hat

Hoss Pepper Bandana

Serrano Pepper

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rPUDZw0fp_c

View Details

Everyone knows what herbs are and what we use them for on a daily basis but these wonderful plants have more to them than just their flavoring properties. We spoke with Lauren Dorminey, the creator of Wild Herbs of Iolita (https://www.instagram.com/wild.herbs.of.iolita/), about how she uses herbs and some of the lesser-known things about a few of them.

Wild Herbs of Iolita

Lauren, who considers herself an herbalist and a forager, began her company a few years ago after beginning to work with herbs and foraging for local wild plants to use in her products. The name came a little later after she looked into her ancestry where she found the first recorded female ancestor in her family named Prudence Iolita Littleheart. Iolita was a member of the Cherokee and as such Lauren knew that local herbs and other flora would have played a larger role in the day-to-day lives of Iolita’s people. In that knowledge she found a deeper connection to her foreberrer and decided to honor her with the name.

In the early days of her business Lauren began looking into herbs and other plants that could be burned for their aromatic and cleansing properties, be it in a spiritual or medicinal application. She would go out into the local forests, forage for wild herbs and flowers, then bundle them together with cedars and other hardwoods along with sage. These bundles then could be burned for their beautiful aromas.

Soon, the directions of her business blossomed into other areas and she began to make teas and tinctures from the local flora around her. At times she found that she needed other ingredients for her various products and began growing a greater variety of herbs, like lavender and sage, in her garden. Lauren has even found a way to take the painful stinging nettle and use it for its natural properties; taking this ‘nuisance’ plant and turning it into a ‘beneficial’ herb.

Herbs

According to Wikipedia, herbs, in general, use, are “plants with savory or aromatic properties that are used for flavoring and garnishing food, for medicinal purposes, or for fragrances; excluding vegetables and other plants consumed for macronutrients.'' Interestingly, the world's largest herb is the banana plant.

We went over a few selections of the herbs we carry and asked Lauren to give us a little more insight on them and any alternate uses for them.

Bouquet Dill

The Bouquet Dill is the most popular variety that we carry. This plant will get to be about 30 inches tall with a 45-day maturity and grows well in zones 3 - 9. Dill is most famously used as a flavoring ingredient in the pickling process for dill pickles. Lauren also uses the clusters of little yellow flowers in her bouquets. It also has been used to treat stomach issues, headaches, boils, and helps with babies that have excess gas.

Basil

We carry several varieties of basil with Italian Basil, Thai Basil, Lemon Basil, and Genovese Basil are just a few.

Italian Basil, like most basil varieties, is known to have poor germination. It is typically recommended to sow several seeds and then when needed. This variety will reach 24 - 30 inches tall and does well in containers. Basil is mostly used in cooking with the food it is included in typically considered “comfort food”. This is with good reason as basils are known to have antidepressant properties as well as antiseptic, among others.

Thai Basil is excellent for cooking due to its high heat properties. Like its Italian cousin, it has antidepressant qualities and can help stabilize your mood.

Lemon Basil has a lemony taste to it, hence the name, and Lauren says it goes well in a cocktail or with cucumber.

Genovese Basil is highly aromatic and goes well on pizzas, in pestos, and other sauces.

Thyme

Thyme does well in zones 5 - 9 and will reach 6 - 12 inches tall. Lauren notes that bees love thyme and the plant will bring beneficial insects to your garden. She likes to take thyme and infuse it into honey to giv...

View Details

With so much of the crop coming in now, preserving the surplus is a great way to make sure that nothing goes to waste after all the work you have put into growing your food. Mama Hoss stopped by to talk about canning veggies and ways that she likes to make the most of the harvest she gets from the garden.

Canning

Canning vegetables has been around since the early 1900s with many people, especially in the rural parts of the country, using the process to save home grown goods. With Mama Hoss it was no different. Canning was done throughout the years as she grew up with the techniques and recipes being passed down from her grandmother and mother.

There are many different things that Mama Hoss enjoys canning, such as sweet pickles, bread and butter pickles, green beans, salsa, and tomatoes, but the one thing that everyone enjoys to have on hand is her vegetable soup. Making and canning soup is a perfect way to combine a smaller yield of many things into one meal that will last over a year if done properly.

Canning your own food is also a great way to offset the cost of grocery store bills. Because canned food lasts for a long period of time, if you grow your own foods and can them, you can enjoy them throughout the year and still have the same great flavors as when they were freshly picked. Foods grown in the summer will taste fresh in the winter and foods grown in the winter will be fresh for the summer.

Mama Hoss also tells us that when you preserve your own foods you control the amounts of sodium and other ingredients so you know what is going into your foods. If you can the crops you have grown yourself, you also know what you used in the garden on your plants and know what you’re consuming.

Boiling-Water or Steam Pressure

There are two ways to can fruits and veggies with the method you need use determined by one thing; acid content. If the food item you have has a high-acid content, such as tomatoes, apples, peaches, and citruses, you will use the boiling-water method. Foods that are lower in acid content, such as okra, carrots, and beets, you will need to use the steam-pressure method. The later method would need to be used for vegetable soups you want to preserve as well.

Resources

Don’t be intimidated or afraid to can your own foods as a way to preserve them. It can feel daunting at first for first timers or those just considering starting. There are many, many resources to help you get started. Mama Hoss recommends the book “Blue Book Guide to Preserving” by Ball as well as visiting the National Center for Home Food Preserving at https://nchfp.uga.edu/. The NCHFP has every tool on their site you will need for the type of preservation you plan on doing with a very user-friendly and intuitive website. Lastly you can speak with your county offices. There are many counties that have places that offer their equipment for you to use.

Food Preservation Products

Corn Silking Brush, Canning Jar Brush, Carrot and Potato Brush, Complete Fermentation Kit, Pickle Pebble Fermentation Weight, Pickle Pipe Fermenting Lids, Rust Proof Jar Bands, Chalk Top Jar Lids, Pickle Packer Jar Tamper, Multi Top Jar Lids, Tough Top Jar Lids

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=u2s7BVEtLck

View Details

Making sure that the plants in your garden are getting enough food is probably the most important thing to do, aside from watering, when you are growing your own fruits and veggies. Just as important is the type of fertilizer you plan on using; whether it be organic or synthetic. To get a better understanding on the different types of organic fertilizers out there we spoke with Andrew Samples who is the regional sales rep for Nature Safe.

Nature Safe is one of the largest organic fertilizer manufacturers out there as well as the largest recycling companies. Andrew explains that the company takes various inedible animal materials from the harvesting process of those animals and recycles that material into organic fertilizers for farmers and gardeners. This is a way to help ensure there is no waste so that all of an animal will be used.

Organics

Organics is a topic that many people are passionate about. Sometimes the passion can overshadow the facts causing confusion and leading to misinformation. One of the first things to come to mind when organics is mentioned is cost. When you are shopping in the grocery store you will notice that items labeled as ‘organic’ tend to be more expensive. Even though these items are at a higher price, we feel better about buying them because we feel as though we are doing the right thing for ourselves and how the item was produced.

As per the USDA website, “Produce can be called organic if it’s certified to have grown on soil that had no prohibited substances applied for three years prior to harvest. Prohibited substances include most synthetic fertilizers and pesticides. In instances when a grower has to use a synthetic substance to achieve a specific purpose, the substance must first be approved according to criteria that examine its effects on human health and the environment”. Organic gardening is the way most people want to grow their own food.

Ground Fertility

There are some differences, some similarities too, between growing your food organically or using conventional methods. You will find there are tradeoffs between the two as well.

When growing organically you need to think ahead and plan for the time it takes for the fertilizers to break down and become available to your plants. There are several types of fertilizers and each can take a different amount of time to break down.

Manures

Chicken manure, the “original fertilizer”, has been used for hundreds of years to feed crops the nutrients that they need. Our 5-4-3 Organic Fertilizer is a pelletized chicken manure that should be incorporated into the soil a few weeks before you plant your crops. This will allow the nutrients in the fertilizer to break down and become incorporated into the soil for your plants to use.

One of the highest nitrogen-containing manures is bat guano. We carry a 5-6-2 Fish and Guano liquid fertilizer that is rich in nitrogen but breaks down slowly, also giving you time to prepare your plots for planting.

Other common manure fertilizers are those from horses, cows, and pigs. These, however, have a lower nitrogen quantity than the chicken, fish, and bat varieties.

As mentioned above there are some misconceptions about the term ‘organic’ and that applies to manures. One organic manure you never want to use in your vegetable garden is Milorganite. This fertilizer is made from processing sewer sludge to extract nitrogen and phosphorus. While it is wonderful for landscaping and lawns, the metals and other contaminants it can contain can be absorbed by the plants in your garden.

Mined Minerals

Andrew also has experience with Chilean nitrate. This nitrate-rich, organic fertilizer is mined in Chile by blasting the crust of the earth, scoop the materials up, and leech out the salts. This process is carried out in the Atacama Desert, one of the driest deserts in the world.

This purely nitrate fertilizer is perfect for colder weather as the other fertilizers can have trouble...

View Details

Seed quality is extremely important to us here at Hoss Tools. There are many factors that go into the selection of seeds we offer to you in our store; germination percentage, disease resistance, grow time, crop yield, etc. Because we look for only the best seeds to offer, we get to know the companies we work with and like to help you get to know what you can expect from the products we offer.

We recently invited Tracy Lee from Sakata Seeds to stop by and talk with us about the company and their products that are newer for us and the ones we have had available.

Sakata

Tracy tells us that since 1913 Sakata has strived to be one of the top innovative creators and suppliers of top quality seeds. Their global network of breeders work diligently in accordance to the company's motto, "Quality, Reliability, Service", to bring superior performance and standards to the seed industry.

One of her main driving factors is the needs of the home gardener. Tracy says that she works with the breeders and tells them what gardeners want, what they are in need of, and what they are looking for. The breeders in turn will look at what they have, look at what's needed, and work to develop a product that will check the boxes of what growers are looking for.

The time and effort that has been put into the company's seed production and development is evident in the quality of the seeds we have to offer here at Hoss Tools.

One of the advantages to having the global network of growers and breeders is that each product is tested for yield in all kinds of conditions. In turn, you can trust that the seeds we offer are the best for your needs and your zones.

Quality

After focusing on horticulture and vegetable production in college, Tracy has spent her entire career in the seed industry, working at a few of the top named companies in trialing, product selection, and cataloging. All of this experience has given her a wealth of knowledge on what makes not just a good seed, but a quality seed and now helps suppliers, like Hoss Tools, bring amazing products to you.

Tracy goes on to explain that there was a tendency in the past for seed breeders to focus on yield over flavor as they engaged with the larger crop production companies. She says that Sakata has not given up on flavor in the products they provide; quite the contrary as flavor, disease resistance, and good performance are of extreme importance to the company. After all, those are the factors you, as a grower, are looking for in a product.

Varieties

For many years there were only a handful of options available to shoppers in US supermarkets when it came to vegetables. Then, not too long ago, the grape tomato was introduced. This was a tomato type that was unique in its shape and sweetness. Home gardeners had nothing like it to grow in their gardens which led seed companies, like Sakata, to begin breeding their own varieties.

Now there are many, many options of every type of vegetable out there. So much so that you can plan out extended growing seasons for a specific crop. For instance, if you want to harvest tomatoes until well past July, we have a few suggestions on what to plant and in what order as well.

Tomatoes

There are two main types of tomato; determinant and indeterminate. If you are not familiar with these terms they simply refer to how they grow. A determinant will grow a certain height and remain there for the duration of the season whereas an indeterminate will continue to grow as the season progresses. An interesting fact that has been discovered with testing is that indeterminate plants tend to have a better taste compared to their determinant counterparts.

One of the popular tomato collections we carry by Sakata is called Little Birdie. This line has three varieties of small tomatoes; the Yellow Canary, the Red Robin, and the Rosy-Finch. This collection makes for the perfect container gardener as these plants are smaller,

View Details

Within the last few years, more and more people are taking steps to grow their own food at home. Whether that's with a small home garden or larger homestead, growing your own food is an enjoyable way to get back to nature while being more self sustained.

One of the many ways to be an active part of your garden's success and experience the smaller things that have to happen for that success to happen is to add honeybees to your grow strategy. All flowering plants need pollination and while some handle this with closely clumped flowers, others need pollinators to help ensure pollination takes place.

We spoke with Wayne Odom of Lakewood Farm. Wayne is a local bee expert with years of experience in using bees on his 40-acre “hobby farm”. Wayne uses his bees to help with the vegetables and fruit trees on the property.

Starting

Starting a bee colony is easier than most people may think. There are many options out there from finding a local beekeeper to ordering a full kit online. It's even possible to trap bee swarms and move them into hives. The possibilities are nearly endless when getting started.

Should you decide to order an online kit to get started with your bees or trap your own and relocate them, it is still a good idea to find a local beekeeper, or "bee buddy", to help with any issues you will encounter in the future.

Strategy

In order to get the most out of your bee population and to keep them happy, it is important to have a strategy in your garden that has your bees in mind. This will help you not only have happy bees but also happy crops for most of the year.

One strategy to look into is rotating flowering plants along with your veggies and fruit trees. For example, you can plant wildflower mixes, sunflowers, zinnias, various clovers, and others that bloom in time with your fruit trees and vegetables and even when your crops are past their flowering cycle. Bees love to stay busy and keeping flowers available to them will ensure a healthy hive.

Benefits

The most obvious benefit of having bees to help in the garden is that they will ensure pollination of your crop. Some crops, such as melon, squash, pumpkin, gourds, and cucumber, benefit more when bees pollinate.

The next obvious benefit of having bees is honey. An average active bee box with ten cells can produce 5 gallons of honey. The honey your bees will produce can become a seasonal income as well.

Pesiticides

When you have important pollinators like bees, it is very important that you pay attention to the pesticides that you use and when you apply them. If at all possible, avoid any pesticides that contain imidacloprid or any plants that have been treated with it as it is a systemic pesticide. This means that it can be present in the flowers of the plant and when a bee goes to the flower it will kill that bee.

When spraying your pesticides it is best to spray either early in the morning or late in the evening when your bees are least active.

Don't be intimidated or afraid to fail at adding bees to your garden. Everyone fails from time to time. You'll be glad you tried when you see all the work they do and all the important benefits they add.

Product of the Week

Mardi Gras Blend Sunflower

Mardi Gras Dwarf Blend Sunflower

Watch the Complete Show on YouTube Below:

https://youtu.be/1OXkF3sVyD4

View Details

Roselle Hibiscus

Nowadays you hear about various berries and plants from around the world that have numerous health benefits such as being anti-aging and anticancer. You find these wonderful plant products in pills and creams to be used daily as part of your health routine. Some plants have their vitamins and minerals infused into drinks such as sports drinks and teas.

Most of the same benefits you find in these other plants can actually be found in roselle hibiscus. Roselle is native to central and west Africa but is now widely grown as an ornamental plant around the world but it is edible and this plant can be grown in your own garden. There are a number of ways to extract the benefits of this beautiful plant that will give you an ample supply of helpful vitamins and minerals.

Uses

Roselle is a highly versatile plant that is used around the world in many different ways. The leaves can be used fresh or dried and made into various items. Traditionally, some cultures have used the plant as a natural diuretic and even a mild laxative. But roselle has many more uses apart from direct medicinal applications.

In many places around the world, roselle is used as a vegetable in cultural dishes such as chutneys, soups, and salads or simply used to add a mild sourness to other dishes. For example, the Anhdra people make a dish called gongura pachadi which uses the leaves of the plant cooked with red chilies, coriander, and other spices for a dish that is traditional for their festivals.

Some cultures, such as those in the Caribbean, use the fruit to make teas. These teas are often made from the fruit or leaves, dried or fresh, mixed with cloves, bay leaves, and sugar. In other places you will find the tea mixed with rum for celebratory cocktails for social events. The fruits can be made into a lovely, flavorful wine as well.

If the inner bud of the flower is boiled, you can obtain pectin from the plant and make jams, jellies, and preserves just by adding sugar to the mixture. The jelly has a similar flavor as plum with a bit more acidity to it and pairs well with cream cheese and crackers.

Using the edible parts of the plants adds the medicinal benefits of roselle such as anti-aging, anticancer, hypertension control, and the various vitamins and minerals to your diet. The inedible, woody stem of the plant is used by several cultures to make cordage and burlap in place of jute fibers. The entirety of this plant can be used in some form or another.

Growing

Roselle should be planted from April to May in an area that has plenty of room as these plants get to be 7 to 10 feet tall. It is recommended that you plant them at a minimum of 3 feet apart to allow enough room for their foliage.

This plant can take heat as it is a tropical plant, however, if used as an ornamental in a pot it will require daily watering. They also tend to become root-bound when planted in pots.

Roselle has a 3 to 4 month growing cycle and does well in zones 7 through 10. Those living in zones 6 and down would have difficulty as it is a plant that requires more tropical environments to thrive.

Harvesting

You should expect to be harvesting your roselle crop up into October or until the first frost in your area. Nearly all of the plant can be harvested.

Depending on your needs from the plant, you can harvest leaves and flowers early on. If you are interested in more homeopathic uses for the plant you can also harvest the roots near the end of the season.

Once you have harvested the leaves, flowers, and pods of your roselle, and the plant dies back, you will be left with a woody stalk. The fibers in this can be harvested as well to make cordage for rope and other items.

Once the growing season has ended, be sure to remove all of the roots and stalks. Avoid planting another type of hibiscus in the same plot as it may attract nematodes to the soil that will harm the plants.

Product of the Week

View Details

Anyone who has been farming or gardening for any amount of time can tell you that the 2nd biggest problem in the garden is pests, namely the bug population. There is nothing more disheartening than walking out to your vegetables that you have watched sprout and grow and seeing holes in their stems or huge sections of leaves eaten away.

It can be easy to become discouraged by the task of keeping garden pests under control, especially for new gardeners. Luckily we know a few experts on the subject and today Greg spoke with Wendell Flowers of Monterey Lawn & Garden about some products and tips to help with your garden infestations.

Chewing Bugs and Sucking Bugs

There are two main types of bugs you will find in your garden; chewing insects such as flea beetles and worms, and sucking insects like stink bugs and boll weevils. According to Wendell the most damaging and difficult type of insect to control is the chewing varieties. This, he says, is because they destroy the leaves of the plants; causing them to lose their ability to photosynthesize.

Even though bugs are a problem we never want to eliminate them, we simply need to control their population and keep their damage as minimal as possible.

Good and Bad Bugs

If you are new to gardening it is important to note that there are beneficial bugs you will see in the garden such as ladybugs, wasps, bees, and butterflies. We need these insects to help control the bad, destructive bugs.

In order to eliminate the bad bugs we find and not harm the beneficial ones we need, Greg says to be "pre-active" in the garden to mitigate the bad bugs so that later there isn't an explosion of bad bugs that require stronger steps that can also kill the beneficials. This means to take a preventative approach early on in the garden with the right chemicals and applications.

Wendell showed several options, many of which are organic and could be used up to the day before harvest, that Monterey Lawn & Garden have available in their lines of pesticides and fungicides.

Chewing Insects

Worms such as hornworms are a big problem with tomatoes as they will eat the leaves and then any fruit that is produced. To combat this pest and other worms, Wendell had four Monterey pesticides to recommend; Bug Buster II, Bug Buster-O, Garden Insect Spray, and Monterey B.t.. Bug Buster II is a synthetic pesticide but the other three, Bug Buster-O, Garden Insect Spray, and Monterey B.t., are organic options.

While B.t., or bacillus thuringiensis, is most commonly used to control worms and caterpillars in farming and gardening, Wendell recommended the Garden Insect Spray. The Garden Insect Spray has a broader range of pests it can eliminate including thrips, beetles, borers, and fire ants. Neither of these options will harm your beneficial insects in the garden as they must be ingested to work.

Another major problem insect is the Colorado potato beetle. This little beetle can quickly defoliate your potato plants leaving nothing in their wake and no crops to harvest. Again, Wendell recommended the Garden Insect Spray. There are other options for ridding your potatoes of this beetle such as Sevin, however, Sevin is very rough on the bee population.

While the Garden Insect Spray will work on 200+ pests in the garden, there are some smaller bugs that need a different approach. One of these is the flea beetle. This beetle is incredibly tiny yet does a tremendous amount of damage for its size. To deal with this little pest Wendell recommends using the 70% Neem Oil; another organic product. The neem oil will not only kill these smaller bugs in the garden but also stave off any bacterial and fungal diseases they may carry with them by coating the plant in a protective layer.

Neem Oil and pyrethrin can be used together to create a stronger defense to help protect your plants from infestations. The pyrethrin acts as a quick knock-down agent and the neem oil acts as the last protective barrier...

View Details

On April 15th we spoke with guest Jennifer O'Neal of Fancy Girl Farms in Hahira, Georgia. Fancy Girl Farms is a flower farm where Jennifer grows a wide variety of flowers for all occasions even if it's just a simple centerpiece for your kitchen table.

Before we share what we spoke with Jennifer about we would like to take a moment to talk about our product highlight, Wynne Peanuts, and the new Hoss Breast Cancer Campaign.

Wynne Peanuts

Wynne Peanuts are a large variety of peanut that are perfect for roasting or boiling and make a great addition to those game day parties at the house or watching at the ball field.

This variety was developed in North Carolina and have some disease resistance to help the crop reach harvest with minimal chemical usage. While most peanuts cultivated in the south stay low to the ground, the Wynne variety grows up to a foot tall.

You can purchase Wynne Peanuts from us in either 1lb or 5lb bags.

Hoss Cancer Campaign

At Hoss Tools we feel like everyone that works here is family. Very recently we have had three ladies that have been impacted by cancer. We have launched a fundraiser to help our ladies with any additional expenses that have or will arise from their battle with their cancer.

Introducing the Hoss Team Fundraising for Francis Fundraiser Collection. This collection is a selection of flowers picked out by one of our ladies, Ms. Francis, that comes in a packet to plant in your garden. In this collection you will find Teddy Bear Sunflowers, Marigold Sparky Mix, Autumn Sunflower Mix, and Sungold Dwarf Sunflowers.

Individually, these four packets sell for $3.99 but the entire collection only costs $9.99 giving you a total savings of about $6. When you purchase this collection 100% of the proceeds will go to our ladies that are battling cancer or have other needs as a result of their fight with cancer. Please consider purchasing this collection and helping our ladies while adding beautiful flowers for your garden.

Fancy Girl Farms

Jennifer has always had a love for flowers and has used them to bring in beneficial insects into her vegetable garden for years. It wasn’t until a few years ago that she started Fancy Girl Farms after a friend showed her another flower farmer’s Instagram page and she realized she could take her love for flowers and create a business from it. With her flowers, along with her chickens and pigs, her business has grown to be a successful venture for her.

As for the name Fancy Girl Farms she says that comes from past interactions with her grandfather who would playfully tell her that her garden was “too fancy” with its flowers, to which she would respond with, “papa, I'm a fancy girl.”

Jennifer reminisces about time with her grandfather and the differences between her farming techniques and those of his. While her grandfather had large fields with dedicated rows, her raised beds have a mix of veggies, herbs, and flowers; bringing in the benefits of the herbs and flowers to help the growth and success of the veggies.

Apart from her raised bed garden she has her flower farm; plots with rows that are similarly dedicated as the large areas her grandfather would farm. However, instead of rows of cotton or corn or peanuts you’ll find snapdragons and sunflowers, lavender and gomphrena.

Companion Planting

In Jennifer's garden she uses a gardening technique known as "companion planting" which has been used for centuries by people around the world. This practice utilizes the strengths of several varieties of plants to help each other to be more successful in their growth and production. One of the most well-known examples of this is the “Three Sisters” technique used by the Native American peoples which uses corn, beans, and squash.

Other examples include using flowers with varying blooming schedules and growth cycles alongside vegetables with a similar growth cycle. Some of the plants attract pollinators and others repel pest inse...

View Details

Integrated Pest Management Strategies for Squash Pests

Integrated Pest Management (IPM) is defined as an ecosystem-based approach for long-term management of pests. These approaches usually include a combination of strategies that include biological controls, rotation, sanitation practices, and growing pest or disease-resistant varieties. This way of managing garden pests considers the life cycle and biology of the pest so that populations are managed to an acceptable level that will minimize damage to plants or fruits. Below you'll find IPM strategies for managing a couple of the most difficult squash pests in the vegetable garden.

Squash Vine Borer

Squash Vine Borers are one of the most problematic pests for summer squash plants. The adults exist as a clearwing moth, but the larvae is the life stage that does the damage. Eggs laid by the adult will hatch in 10-15 days and the newly hatched larvae will begin to "bore" into plant stems. The affected part of the plant will usually die quickly as the vascular tissues are damaged by the larval feeding.

Squash Vine Borer eggs can overwinter in soils and hatch the following spring when temperatures warm. Tillage is one method to minimize the damage by the overwintering eggs, as it will disturb the eggs and reduce the hatching success rate. Sanitation is also an important practice to manage SVB populations. Be sure to remove all the crop debris from squash plants each season. Only compost the debris if your compost pile gets hot enough to kill any eggs that may remain.

Modifying planting times will also help to control Squash Vine Borer. In the southern states, planting early will help to get strong plants growing before the egg-laying window occurs. In the northern states, planting later and after the egg-laying window will minimize damage. Try not to plant summer squash in the same location in consecutive years, and practice a three-year rotation if possible. If your insect pressure from squash pests is very high, you may consider skipping planting in a given year to reduce the pressure for following years.

Chemical treatment options include spinosad and pyrethroids. Spinosad is an organic option and works well to kill any worm or insect larvae that feeds on plants or fruits. Start spraying when plants are small and at least once a week to kill the larvae before they enter the plants. Once the larvae are inside the plant, they're tough to kill because they're shielded. A pyrethroid like our Bug Buster II is a conventional option for controlling squash pests. It will actually kill the adults and keep them from laying more eggs. With either option, be sure to apply late in the evenings so that pollinators are not affected.

Squash Bugs

Squash Bugs can be problematic on a wide range of cucurbit species including summer squash, winter squash, melons, and more. As opposed to Squash Vine Borers where the larvae do all the damage, mature adults are the culprits within a Squash Bug population. The adults have piercing mouthparts that they use to feed on the stems of the plants. They suck the sap and inhibit the vascular tissues of the plant, often causing eventual demise. One adult will lay 15-40 eggs at a time and the eggs usually hatch in 1-2 weeks.

As with all cucurbit pests, sanitation is an easy-practice to minimize damage in future years. Remove all crop debris and burn it if possible. Try to practice a cucurbit crop rotation so that you're not planting any cucurbits in the same spot in consecutive years -- a three year rotation is best. Tillage will also help to reduce the impact of overwintering eggs in the soil where cucurbits were planted the previous year.

Hand removal of eggs is an easy way to reduce Squash Bug impact on a small scale. The copper-colored eggs are easy to identify and are usually found on the underside of the leaves. Use a piece of tape to remove the eggs from the leaves prior to hatching,

View Details

Why use Drip Irrigation?

There are several different reasons why we prefer to use drip irrigation instead of overhead watering in our vegetable gardens. One of the most important reasons for using drip irrigation is we are able to feed the water right where plants need it most --- plant roots. Another reason for drip irrigation instead of overhead watering is the overall reduction of the amount of water you are applying in the garden. By reducing the amount of water we are also able to decrease weeds because we do not have excess water sitting on top of the soil leaving it a breeding ground for weed pressure. Another benefit to using drip irrigation is the option to easily fertilize plants while watering which saves you time and energy in the vegetable garden.

Frequently Asked Questions: Drip Irrigation

We've compiled a list of some of the most frequently asked questions regarding drip irrigation. So we can answer them all for you right here in this blog post.

Does it work like a soaker hose? Much more reliable and controlled output than soaker hoses0.48 gallons per hour per 100 feet of drip tape or 0.00048 gallons per hour per emitterWhat are the pressure/flow requirements?0.5 - 8 gallons per minute15 psi to 90 psi max50 - 60 pounds max of pressure for the Filter Regulator ComboFigure out your flow rate by calculating how long it takes you to fill up a 5-gallon bucketHow big of a system can I run at a time?100' row max with 5/8" mainline tubing250 feet of tape per 1 gallon of flow rate8 gallons per minute = 2,000 feetCan I use it with a gravity-fed system?Yes, if you can generate enough pressure4.3 psi per 10 feet of elevationNeed 35' off the ground for 15 psiHow deep can it be buried?6 inches max2-3 inches is ideal for vegetablesAre the holes pre-punched? Can I punch holes in it?Yes, our drip tape is pre-punchedStandard emitter spacing is 12 inchesIf you have a smaller garden we recommend using our Container Gardening KitEmitters up or down?UpHow many lines to run in a 4' wide raised bed?One line per row3 lines per 4' bed if planted denselyCan drip tape be reused?8 mil -- 3-4 growing seasons 15 mil -- several yearsPlant on top or to the side of drip tape?You can do both!Double rows we like to plant to the sideHow long do you run it?Lots of variables - temperatures, soil type, crop, plant spacing, etc.No rainfall, 1-2 hours every other day is sufficient

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Greg and Travis share a little update on what's happening in the greenhouse and garden right now. Even though the weather conditions have them a little more behind than usual, the guys are staying positive and looking forward to better weather coming soon to South Georgia. Travis and his family just got back from Pine Mountain, Georgia on a little camping trip and while he was there he picked up some pickled okra for the guys to try on the show. Travis has a 162 cell seed starting tray full of several different okra varieties. The guys mention that okra is one of the last crops you will plant in your garden, due to the fact that okra does not like cool climates.

Viewer Questions

For the Q & A segment this week, the guys answer some viewer questions about sourcing seeds from the south, eating peas early, using inoculate on snow peas/purplehull peas, and planting zipper peas on double rows. Greg and Travis mention that the seed trade is international, however, in the United States, the west coast is ideal for growing seeds due to the climate. Greg mentions that you can eat peas with the shell on them just snap them in half. You do not necessarily need to add inoculate if you have grown peas in that certain area before, however, if it is a new garden spot it needs to be added to that garden spot. If planting zipper peas on a double row in a 4x12 raised bed the ideal spacing is 1 foot off the side of the bed and 2 foot in the middle.

Product of the Week

View Details

English Peas vs. Field Peas

What's the major difference between English peas and field peas? Field peas are more commonly known to be called either southern peas or cowpeas. In the South, field peas are a popular cuisine that most individuals grow in their gardens. However, in the North, field peas are not really popular and most people do not grow them in their garden area. Field peas actually originated in African and were bred to tolerant hot and humid climates. Unlike field peas, English peas do not like warm weather therefore we plant these peas during the cooler months in the garden. Another difference between English peas and field peas is the flavor profile. Field peas tend to have more of a nutty flavor profile, while English peas have a sweeter taste to them.

Types of Field Peas

Crowder - darker, brown to red pea

Mississippi PurpleHull PeaDixie Lee PeaRed Ripper Pea

Cream - light green pea

Top Pick Pinkeye PeaTexas Cream 40 PeaLady Cream PeaSa Dandy Cream PeaWhite Acre PeaZipper Cream PeaTexas Big Boy Pea

Blackeye - tan pea with black spot

California Blackeye Pea

Growing Field Peas

When it comes to growing field peas they tolerate sandy soils the best and growing regions that have dry and hot weather conditions. In order to get germination your soil temperatures need to be at least 65 degrees, in the South we wait till around early or the middle of April before you direct seed field peas. If your soil pH is above 6.5 we do not recommend trying to grow peas in your area. Since peas have lower germination you should plant them thick in the vegetable garden. We recommend planting peas on double rows with buried drip tape irrigation. However, if you tend to have a lot of weed pressure we suggest just planting peas on a single row. Unlike other crops, field peas do not need a lot of fertilizer at all. We recommend giving peas some garden inoculate at pre-planting and then a complete fertilizer at planting.

Harvesting Field Peas

When it comes time to harvest peas you will know by looking at the pods on the plants. For purplehull varieties, the pods will turn purple which means they are ready to harvest. While the zipper peas will turn yellow when they are ready to harvest. After you harvest the peas you do not want to wait long before you shell them. If you wait too long to start shelling the peas they will get too hot and start to ruin on you fast.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Greg and Travis share some general tips for seed starting. When it comes to bottom watering transplants it is not the best option until the roots are able to reach the bottom of the seed starting cell. We recommend using the bottom tray as a reservoir to catch the excess water and then you drain it off often. The guys mention a new Giant Pumpkin Growing contest that we hosting alongside our friends, 4 Kids and a Farm. However, with any contest, there are some rules that you must follow. The first rule is you must grow one of Hoss's giant pumpkin varieties such as PrizeWinner, Mammoth Gold, Atlantic Giant, or Big Max Pumpkin. The next rule is you must share a picture on either Facebook or Instagram with the pumpkin on a scale and the variety you grew listed on a notecard. In order for us to see your post, we need you to tag Hoss Tools and 4 Kids and a Farm on Facebook or Instagram. You also need to use the hashtag, hosspumpkinboss, to ensure your entry into the contest. The individual that has the heaviest giant pumpkin will win a $200 gift certificate to Hoss Tools. The guys share a few new varieties that were just added to the site this week. The first new variety is the Nirvana Sweet Corn which is a supersweet variety that contains high eating quality and exceptional taste. This variety also has superior plant vigor and excellent storage potential once harvested from the vegetable garden. The second new variety we've just added is the Speckled Hound Squash that is a hy...

View Details

Why Start a Community Garden?

For Farmer Fredo, volunteering at his son's school was the first step in seeing the need to help others learn how to simplify growing healthier food. By helping out at Fredo's son's school he saw the need that the Department of Nutrition was trying to implement a system for providing healthier food in school districts across the counties they just didn't have someone that really knew technically how to grow their own food. As Farmer Fredo started getting more involved with growing food in the school garden he began to see that need spread to the local community where there were other healthy initiatives that were taking place but needed someone that really understood gardening.

Where to Start with a Community Garden?

The main goal for Farmer Fredo when he starts a community garden is to teach individuals how to grow their own food and have them understand how to manage, plant, and harvest a garden by themselves at the end of the day. So by teaching individuals in the community how to grow and when to grow their own food allows the community to be more sustainable. In order to simplify teaching kids or individuals, Farmer Fredo fell in love with gardening in raised beds and container gardens because you can simply the math for how many pounds of compost or fertilizer you would need for the area. If you are interested in starting a new school garden, you should first see if the school system has funding in place for starting a garden for growing their own food due to all the healthy benefits. Overall the first tip for getting started with a community garden is getting the community on board with seeing the need for establishing healthier food and sustainable living. For Farmer Fredo in order to keep everyone on board they find local groups that want to contribute and need an extra-circular activity to keep them engaged.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Travis is joined with Farmer Fredo, executive director of a non-profit organization known as Flint River Fresh. Farmer Fredo just added some potatoes to the ground and plant his last round of cabbage, broccoli, collards, and kale. He is preparing his community garden beds for spring planting that is just around the corner. Travis gives an update on field peas that are coming available in the next couple of weeks. However, we are limited to the supply that we are able to get due to the bean and pea shortage in the seed industry. As far as new products we have two new inoculants that can help boost the performance and nitrogen-fixation of your legume plantings in the garden. We also have a couple of new varieties of seeds that are now available. We've just added three new varieties of squash such as Autumn Gold Butternut, Grenade, and Green Griller Squash. Plus two new pumpkin varieties, Casperita Pumpkin and Porcelain Doll Pumpkin which are both very unique varieties to grow in the vegetable garden.

Viewer Questions

For the Q & A segment this week, the guys answer some viewer questions about growing watermelons with grow lights, maturity dates, and leaving heating mats on germinated plants. The grow light kits will work fine for growing watermelons in the 12-cell seed starting trays. The maturity date on seed packets is just an estimated planting guide for when plants should be harvested, but there are weather conditions and other factors that can push those dates back a couple of weeks in the vegetable garden. Travis and Farmer Fredo both recommend leaving the germination mats on once plants have germinated.

Product of the Week

Granular Garden Soil Inoculant

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=386fm5ZAn3Y

View Details

Benefits of Using Indoor Grow Lights

When it comes to growing indoors under grow lights there are many benefits that will make gardening easier for you. An important benefit is the quicker harvesting cycle that can be caused by using LED lights which enables you to change the daylight hours to maximize overall plant growth. Another benefit is growing healthier plants when using LED lights they aren't putting off harsh heat or other elements that will make the plant feel like it's overworking itself. You are also saving a lot more energy and water on growing vegetables indoors which is an overall plus any gardener.

Kitchen Garden Grow Light Kit

The Kitchen Garden Light Kit was developed to allow you to grow your own salads and microgreens in your home or office. This grow light kit is ideal for growing lettuce and herbs such as arugula, basil, garlic chives, Italian oregano, thyme, and many more. You can easily sit this grow light kit in the window seal and begin to have herbs and microgreens at arm's length in the kitchen homestead.

Indoor Seed Starting Grow Light Kit

The Indoor Seed Starting Light Kit allows you to grow your own vegetable transplants indoors. This kit can be used to grow any vegetable, herb, or flower transplants. You can densely plant lettuce or greens in the base tray so plants can be cut and harvested multiple times for a continuous food source inside your home.

Grow Light Growing Instructions:

Step 1: Fill the trays with seed starting mix and wet the soil so the entire tray is moist.Step 2: Sprinkle seeds on top of the wet seed starting mix and lightly press the seeds into the seed starting mix.Step 3: Use a light dusting of seed starting mix to cover the seeds.Step 4: After seeding, gently water over 1 to 2 times a day with a spray bottle. You should continue to do this until seeds sprout and produce roots that extend to the bottom of the tray.Step 5: Once seeds germinate, turn on the lights and lower the light canopy so that it sits a few inches above the plants. As the plant begins to grow, raise the light canopy so that it sits a few inches above the plant vegetation. Maintain a daily light schedule similar to your outdoor conditions. (Morning= Lights On, Evening= Lights Off)Step 6: Once roots are established, you can use the reservoir tray and wicking mat to "bottom water" the trays. Wet the wicking mat and place it between the platform and trays, black side up. Keep the water reservoir full so that the wicking mat can draw water from it. The plant roots will obtain as much water as they need, which will prevent over-watering.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Greg and Mrs. Hoss share what's happening in the greenhouse and in the vegetable garden. Greg mentions that he is behind in the garden due to all the rainfall we've had in the South recently. He wasn't able to plant potatoes on time this year and he just now getting watermelon transplants going in the greenhouse. Although, we are running behind we are pushing forward in the garden and hoping for some better weather conditions in the future. Mrs. Hoss has her raised beds ready to go once the weather is nice for spring planting. She has harvested all of her carrots, beets, cabbage, and Brussel sprouts. They discuss some new varieties that have just been added to the site this week. The first new variety is a hot pepper known as Trapio Serrano Pepper which is a hybrid that produces abundant yields of extra larger peppers. The next new variety is Grenade Squash which is a hybrid zucchini squash that produces egg-shaped fruits on prolific plants. Another new variety is the Flatso Pumpkin that produces unique oval-shaped pumpkins that are great for eating or decorating. Two of the newer bean varieties we just added are the Roma II Bush Bean and the Pink Half Runner Bean which are both productive old heirloom varieties. Another new heirloom variety is White Acre Pea that produces compact pla...

View Details

Controlling Tomato Diseases

There are a couple of different tomato diseases that can be very hard to control in the vegetable garden. However, if you know what causes these diseases and the symptoms behind them you can have better success with controlling and treating these pesky diseases. Depending on where you live you may experience more issues with certain diseases than somebody in a different area or zone.

Bacterial Wilt (aka Southern Bacterial Blight)

The main cause of bacterial wilt happens usually overnight and takes out two or three plants. This is a bacterial soil-borne disease that will happen when temperatures are humid and wet. One way to avoid bacterial wilt is by planting disease-resistant varieties such as Invincible. Another way to decrease your chance of avoiding this virus is to have at least a 3-year crop rotation. By implementing crop rotation in your garden you not only improve your soil health but also improve your chances of not dealing with these soil-borne tomato diseases. You should also remove crop debris as soon as those tomato plants are done producing. The quicker you remove all the crop debris from the area the faster those soil-borne diseases will be eliminated in the vegetable garden.

Early Blight

One of the more common tomato diseases that we hear a lot about is early blight. Early blight is caused by fungi that live in the soil and will start up when temperatures become hot and wet. You can identify early blight by looking for brown circular lesions on older foliage and yellowing of the plant tissue as well. The best way to treat early blight is to use drip irrigation to reduce leaf moisture, fertilize monthly with Calcium Nitrate, and treat plants with Mancozeb or Liquid Copper Fungicide.

Late Blight

Similar to early blight, late blight is also caused by fungi that live in the soil. However, late blight is triggered when temperatures become cooler and wetter in the vegetable garden. You can identify late blight on plants when dark and water-soaked spots pop-up on the tomato leaves. Once these spots become visible on the plants soon after the leaves will begin to fall off. The only late blight disease-resistant variety we have available is Invincible Tomato which is a determinate paste variety. Treating both early blight and late blight is very similar, you will need to use drip irrigation, remove crop debris, and use Liquid Copper Fungicide to help control this tomato disease. Also, the most common host for late blight is potatoes, therefore you need to have at least a 3 to 4-year crop rotation so you can avoid planting tomatoes after potatoes.

Septoria Leaf Spot (Gray Leaf Spot)

Septoria Leaf Spot is also known as Gray Leaf Spot is another fungal tomato disease. In order to identify gray leaf spot, the leaves will start forming tiny black specks or small circular spots with dark borders and a beige center. This tomato disease becomes problematic when temperatures reach 68 to 77 degrees and high humidity or heavy leaf moisture. We have several disease-resistant varieties such as Bella Rosa, Red Snapper, Summerpick, Mountain Vineyard, Big Beef, Florida 91, Invincible, Southern Ripe, Roadster, Jolene, Chef's Choice Pink, and Lemon Boy Tomato. Even though these varieties all have disease-resistance to gray leaf spot it does not mean they are 100% susceptible to getting this tomato disease.

Tomato Spotted Wilt Virus

When it comes to Tomato Spotted Wilt Virus this is spread by thrips that feed on the weeds in the garden. Once one plant gets this wilt virus it spreads quickly and spraying treatment is almost ineffective. Once the plants are infected they will be stunted with bronze or dark spots/purple veins. While the upper foliage will be twisted and cupped with yellow spots on fruits. Like other tomato diseases, the best way to treat this virus is by planting disease-resistant varieties like Bella Rosa, Red Snapper, Summerpick, Tachi,

View Details

Things to Consider When Growing Corn

Before deciding whether to plant corn in the garden, there are a few important isolation requirements you need to follow in order to avoid cross-pollination of sweet corn. If you do not want cross-pollination of sweet corn you should either plant a synergistic variety or stagger your plantings 2 to 3 weeks in your garden. You should also consider whether you have time to process and harvest the corn once it's ready. If you don't have time to process and put away some of the standard varieties all in one day, you should probably consider growing some of the sweeter varieties that leave you a 10 to 15-day window to put up on the homestead. Another important factor to consider is whether this is your first time growing corn. If it is your first time growing corn, we recommend growing a standard variety such as G90, Jubilee, or Silver Queen. We recommend a standard variety due to the longer growing period which allows you more time to apply plenty of fertilizer and water.

Growing Corn in the Vegetable Garden

The key factor when growing corn is to plant corn in a square plot with at least three rows side-by-side. If you are growing in a raised bed you can still plant corn just try and squeeze in three rows if you can. The major reason why we plant corn in square plots is that corn is wind-pollinated therefore in order to get full ears of kernel those tassels need to side-by-side. The ideal pH for growing corn is between 5.8 - 6.5, however, if you get above 7 you may run into some trouble in the garden. For older corn varieties, you can get them germinating at 55 degrees. However, for the sweeter varieties, the soil temperature should be around 60 degrees. As far as, row spacing we recommend spacing them between 30 to 36 inches. While seed spacing is a little different based on whether you are planting sweet or field corn. We suggest planting sweet corn seeds around 6 to 8 inches apart on drip tape in the vegetable garden. While field corn seeds should be planted anywhere between 8 to 12 inches apart. Since corn is a heavy feeder, drip irrigation is more effective and way easier to supply the plants with the needed amount of water directly at the plant roots.

Fertilizing Schedule for Corn

When fertilizing corn, Nitrogen is the key component to accomplishing great success when growing corn in the vegetable garden. The standard corn recommendation is five pounds of Nitrogen per 1,000 square feet or 300-row feet. Once corn plants reach 6 to 8 inches tall, we suggest using our Fertilizer Injector to apply 2 lbs of 20-20-20 and 1 cup of Micro-Boost per 1,000 square feet. Then, once they reach 12 to 18" tall at our first hilling we apply 10 lbs of Chilean Nitrate. Next, we will side dress again with Chilean Nitrate once the corn reaches around "hiney high" which will also be our last cultivation. When the corn reaches around "titty high" we will inject 4 lbs of 20-20-20 and 1 cup of Micro-Boost per 1,000 square feet. The last time we fertilize is when plants start tasseling and we give them another 4 lbs of 20-20-20 and 1 cup of Micro-Boost to top them off in the garden. So in total if you have a 1,000 square plot of corn with no nutrients in your soil already you will need a bag of 20-20-20, one quart of Micro-Boost, and 2 bags of Chilean Nitrate. The most common pest problem when growing corn is earworms. The best pest control product to use when dealing with earworms is to use Spinosad and apply it on the silks.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Greg and Travis talk a little bit about the weather conditions that have caused several issues for gardeners this year so far. The guys also show off a new product which is our Hoss Germination Mats that are offered in 3 different sizes. Travis goes over some new pumpkin and sunflower varieties that are now available on the website. The two new heirloom pumpkin varieties are both giant or larger type pum...

View Details

Sweet Corn Genes:

There are five different sweet corn genes that have very different characteristics from one another. When it comes to growing a standard sugary variety those are the oldest cultivars which in return makes them have the lowest sugar content (10% - 15%) at harvest. For sweet corn the lower the sugar content the lower storage time so these varieties will not store for very long after harvest. The advantage of growing these lower sugar content varieties is they can germinate in colder climates (55 - 60F).

Standard Sugary (su) Varieties:

Silver QueenStowell's EvergreenJubileeG90

When growing sugary enhanced varieties they can also germinate in colder climates (55 - 60F). However, they only have slightly higher sugar levels and storage ability compared to the standard sugary. What sets the sugary enhanced varieties apart from the standard sugary is the super tender kernels. If you have sensitive or tender teeth the sugary enhanced varieties are ideal to grow for you.

Sugary Enhanced (se) Varieties:

Peaches & CreamAmbrosiaIncredibleBodaciousSilver KingArgentKandy Korn

The supersweet varieties are very different from the sweet corn genes, standard sugary and sugary enhanced. When growing a supersweet corn variety they produce shrunken kernels in the vegetable garden. With these shrunken kernels, they have very high sugar levels which means they will have a long harvest window and store longer on the homestead. However, the supersweet varieties will need a little warmer germination temperatures (60F).

SuperSweet (sh2) Varieties:

ObsessionPassionDevotionGlacial

When it comes to growing a synergistic variety it contains the standard sugary, sugary enhanced, and supersweet kernels all on the same cob. Therefore it contains the flavor profile of the su, tenderness of the se, and the sweetness of the sh2. The storage life is excellent due to the synergistic containing the supersweet gene. The synergistic can also germinate in cooler weather temperatures (55 - 60F).

Synergistic (syn) Varieties:

Honey SelectTemptressPrimusProvidenceAvalonSerendipity

One of the newest sweet corn genes is the augmented supersweet type. This sweet corn gene is simply just an improved version of the supersweet that contains the supersweets and sugary enhanced gene types. When growing the augmented supersweet they produce sweet and tender kernels. You need to wait till temperatures are around 60F for successful germination. This sweet corn type has excellent storage life after harvesting.

Augmented SuperSweet (shA) Varieties:

YellowstoneEdenNirvana

Sweet Corn Genes: Isolation Requirements

Which sweet corn genes will cross-pollinate in the garden? The sweet corn types that will need isolation from one another are the standard sugary, sugary enhanced, and supersweet varieties. The augmented supersweets should also be isolated from the standard sugary, sugary enhanced, and supersweet types for a true variety. We highly recommend if you are worried about corn cross-pollinating you should stagger/succession plant your corn 2 to 3 weeks in the garden. The best variety to grow that does not require isolation is the synergistic sweet corns.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Greg and Travis have been experiencing some wet and cold climates which have made it harder to get out in the garden recently. Travis has some fermented carrots to try from the vegetable garden. Although Greg thought there was a little too much dill in Travis's fermented carrots, it was still good. The guys also explain the sudden "seed shortage" that is being talked about which really isn't true at all. The seed suppliers said there really isn't a seed shortage only one or two varieties that did not produce enough crops for seeds. The main problem is transportation which means due to the pandemic the seeds are taking longer than normal to get to seed distributors in return taking longer to s...

View Details

Seeded Watermelon vs. Seedless Watermelon

How do you get a seed from a seedless watermelon? There is a little bit of science behind getting these seedless watermelons. As humans, we have one set of chromosomes from our father and mother which makes us diploid. In vegetables/crops, the seed itself is diploid. When you have 3 sets of chromosomes which makes you triploid, in nature, it can cause some issues or sterile plants. If you have 4 sets of chromosomes also known as quadraploid in watermelons they use colchicine which doubles the set of chromosomes. To grow seedless watermelons, you need a seedless variety that is quadraploid and a diploid which is a seeded watermelon to make a triploid a sterile or seedless watermelon.

Seedless Watermelon Varieties

We have four seedless watermelon varieties that are all improved hybrids that are ideal to try out in the garden. The Tailgate Seedless Watermelon and the Summer Breeze are both known to have outstanding sweetness. While the Harvest Moon is an heirloom variety. that is the seedless version of the popular Moon and Stars Watermelon. The Triple Play Seedless Watermelon is an early maturing, "icebox" variety that makes personal size watermelons and has a super sweet flavor profile.

Tips for Growing Seedless Watermelon

When it comes to growing seedless watermelons we recommend always transplanting and using a good seed starting mix to ensure you have good aeration. We also suggest topping the seeds with perlite that will help with water retention for seedlings. You should grow seedless watermelon transplants on a germination mat in order to reach the ideal temperature of 85 degrees. When transplanting you need to plant them 3 to 4 weeks old with 2 to 3 true leaves. If you let them grow too long in the seed starting trays they will become root-bound and will experience significant transplant shock. Another important factor when growing these seedless watermelon transplants they will need more babying than other diploid varieties, but once they get going they can be much more vigorous. We also highly recommend using drip irrigation and fertilizer injection when growing seedless watermelons in the garden.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Travis has some carrots that he fermented using the Complete Fermentation Kit. The guys also received a little gift to taste test from Doug and Marilyn Smith loyal viewers of the show. The viewers sent some Pool Hall Slaw to try on some sausage dogs. The Pool Hall Slaw is also great with club-style crackers as a snack. The guys also have been busy in the greenhouse getting transplants ready for the Spring garden. We also have a few new varieties that are now available on the website. The Firecracker Sunflower is a hybrid variety that is a branching pollen-less flower that can get up to 8 to 10 blooms at a time. We are also now carrying some 10 seed options for tomatoes such as Roadster, Summerpick, Sweet Hearts, Tachi, and Rosy Finch. We just added two new seedless watermelons, Triple Play and Harvest Moon, which are both excellent watermelon varieties to try out in the garden this year.

Pool Hall Slaw Recipe:

Mix and set aside the following:

2 gallons of chopped cabbage (approximately 8 - 9 heads = 17 lbs)10 medium onions chopped6 - 8 medium bell peppers chopped 1/4 - 1/2 cup of ground hot pepper

In a big pot, bring to boil and stir until sugar dissolves:

6 cups of sugar2 cups of white vinegar

Add cabbage mixture and bring back to a boil then add 2 quarts of mustard.

Let simmer for 15 minutes, stirring often.

Pack in hot jars and process in boiling water bath for 10 minutes. (Makes 16-20 pints.)

Viewer Questions

For the Q & A segment this week, the guys answer some viewer questions about using phenology as a planting time guide, the difference between pumpkins, and composting nightshade varieties. When planting by phenology it means that you are waiting on certain qu...

View Details

Guide to Categorizing Potato Varieties

When deciding on which potato varieties to grow there are a couple of different factors that can play into your decision. There are three different categories that are based on maturity dates -- early-maturing, mid-maturing, and late-maturing. However, like most other crops the maturity date is just a suggestion because weather conditions can play into how fast they will mature. The early maturing varieties will on average mature around 85 days. While the mid-maturing varieties will be mature around 100 days and the late-maturing potato varieties will mature around 115 days.

Early Maturity Varieties:

Red NorlandIrish CobblerVikingAdirondack BluePurple Majesty

Mid-Maturity Varieties:

Yukon GoldKennebec WhiteFrench FingerlingAustrian Crescent

Late-Maturity Varieties:

German Butterball

Potato Planting & Fertilization Schedule

When it comes to planting potatoes, every zone has a different planting time. The general rule for planting seed potatoes is to plant them two weeks before the last frost date. For us in South Georgia, zone 8b, our planting time is anywhere between late February to early March. Another factor that can affect when you plant potatoes is depending on how much rainfall you get in your garden. When it comes to fertilizing potatoes you need 5 lbs. of a balanced fertilizer (Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium) per 1,000 square feet. Also, 0.5 lbs of balanced fertilizer per 30' row assuming you have 3' row spacing. We recommend using 10 lbs of Complete Organic Fertilizer per 30' row and 2.5 lbs of 20-20-20 per 30' row. You should apply potato fertilizer half prior to planting and apply the other half at first hilling. We recommend hilling potatoes because it will reduce weed suppression, better root development, and overall will have better success with planting potatoes.

Last Frost Dates:

Zone 10 - no freezesZone 9 - mid to late February Zone 8 - early to mid-MarchZone 7 - mid to late MarchZone 6 - early to mid-AprilZone 5 - mid to late AprilZone 4 - early to mid-May

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Travis has some carrots that he harvested from the garden. Now it's time for Greg to taste test the different varieties to see which variety has the best flavor profile. The four different varieties that they are taste testing are Purple Haze, Bolero, Envy, and Yellowstone. Ranking them based on their flavor profiles -- Envy was 1st, 2nd was Yellowstone, Bolero was 3rd, and in 4th place was the Purple Elite. The guys also share some new varieties that have been added to the site this week. We've added four new hybrid sweet corn varieties that are all excellent for planting with our Hoss Garden Seeder. The Glacial Sweet Corn is a supersweet variety that produces bright white kernels and is considered one of the best tasting white corn varieties. The G90 Sweet Corn is a standard sugary (su) variety that is an old homestead staple to grow in the vegetable garden. While the Serendipity Sweet Corn is a triplesweet that is widely-adaptable and can grow well in many different zones. The last new sweet corn variety is Kandy Korn which is one of the first sugary-enhanced hybrids ever developed and is still known for being one of the best tasting sweet corn to date. We also have two new hybrid carrot varieties, Hercules and Olympus which are both great new varieties to try on the homestead this year.

Viewer Questions

For the Q & A segment this week, the guys answer some viewer questions such as how to fertilize carrots, adjusting the watering schedule based on weather climates, and advice about gardening. When fertilizing carrots we suggest using 20-20-20 and Micro Boost to make sure we have solid carrot tops and roots. The next question was wondering if we change our watering schedule when we have cool weather vs. warm weather. We do change our watering schedule based on the weather climates. With cooler weather,

View Details

Rapid Viewer Questions & Answers

This week the guys did a rapid Q & A session to answer some viewer questions from the previous Row by Row shows. The first question is wondering which attachments are better the sweeps or oscillating hoe. The oscillating hoes are tougher and work best in hard soils or thick crabgrass weeds. However, the sweeps are a lot more versatile but there are not as strong as the oscillating hoe. The next question is asking what it means when we talk about plants and mention "come off". When talking about coming off we use it as a verb and it means that the plants are growing off or reached their maturity and ready to be planted in the ground. Another question we get a lot from viewers is whether we make our own compost pile for the vegetable garden. We do have a compost pile on our homestead but making your own compost is very complex. Greg has made his own compost in the past, while Travis usually buys his compost from a gin nearby. The next viewer question is wondering if we use 20-20-20 for seed starting and if so how often. Our schedule for using 20-20-20 in the seed starting trays is to use this fertilizer when the plants get their second set of leaves also known as true leaves. We suggest mixing one tablespoon of 20-20-20 per gallon of water and do it at least two times a week. When growing hybrid tomatoes you can save the seeds, however, they more than likely won't be true to variety because of the bred hybrid genetics. The last viewer question is wondering about our pruning, spraying, and fertilizing schedule for fruit trees. Greg mentions that for fruit trees we typically prune in the late afternoon. We suggest spraying dormant oil on the fruit trees to help break down that pest cycle and prepare your trees for Spring.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, a viewer named Momma J sent a little care package to Greg and Travis which included a nice card, two scarves, and some homemade "Call the Fire Department" hot sauce. Travis harvested two cabbage varieties, Bobcat and Cheers Cabbage, which both are known for producing large heads of cabbage. He also has some freshly harvested carrots from the vegetable garden that are known to be some of the best producing varieties. These four different carrot varieties are Bolero, Yellowstone, Envy, and Purple Haze. Next week, the guys plan on doing a blind taste test on the show to see which carrot tastes the best out of those four varieties. A couple of new varieties have been added to the site and are now available. The first variety is the Camaro PMR Pumpkin which is a jack-o'-lantern type with improved powdery resistance. The second new variety is the Ambrosia Cantaloupe which is a popular backyard gardener variety and is also resistant to powdery mildew. The next new variety was requested by some viewers which is known as Armenian Striped Cucumber, it is an heirloom Persian-style cucumber that originated in Armenia. Then, we have a set of three new pepper varieties which are called Right to Red, Orange You Sweet, and Yes to Yellow pepper. The last new variety is Caveman's Club Gourd that is great for making dipping spoons or other crafts.

Product of the Week

New for 2021 Varieties

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d-wK_TBfGeY&t=1723s

View Details

Preparing for a Spring Garden

Spring is around the corner, and all gardeners can focus on is starting a successful Spring garden for the new year. To begin preparing for a Spring garden we like to clean out our garden for any weeds or leftover debris from other plants. We also like to plan out what we want to grow by drawing up layouts and determining which crops are going where in the vegetable garden.

When Should I Plant a Spring Garden?

With all the Spring garden talk going around, Greg and Travis decided to talk a little bit about their seed starting schedule. Here in South Georgia, the guys are located in plant hardiness zone 8b. If you do not know which zone you are in you can check with the USDA Plant Hardiness Zone Map or search by your zip code. If you are a letter above zone 8b, in other words in zone 8a we suggest planting two weeks later than we do in the garden. If you are a number above we recommend planting approximately a month later. However, this is just a general rule it can be a little off depending on your weather in your area. Another thing to consider when to start planting is how big of a transplant would you like to put in the ground. In other words, it takes longer to grow a dixie cup size tomato plant than it does a little transplant plug grown in 162 cell seed starting tray. You should also consider how well you will be able to fertilize or push the seedlings to be ready for planting in time for a Spring garden.

Spring Garden: Seed Starting Schedule

For us in zone 8b our seed starting schedule will be a little different if you live in another zone. Around mid to late January, Greg and Travis plan on starting a second round of cool-season crops like cabbage, cauliflower, broccoli, lettuce, and rutabagas. After the cool season crops are started we can start on nightshade varieties. For the nightshades, we can start tomatoes, peppers, eggplants, and tomatillos. Since we starting all these crops in mid to late January, our goal is to have the transplants ready to go in the ground early to mid-March. In early February, we like to focus on getting our herbs started in the greenhouse. Some of the herbs we plan on planting are basil, cilantro, parsley, borage, sage, and tarragon. Then, closer to mid-February we will start growing flowers such as ageratum, cosmos, celosia, roselle hibiscus, nasturtium, zinnias, and calendula. However, for the celosia and roselle hibiscus, you may need to wait a week or two to ensure you have warm temperatures when planting in the soil. At the end or late February, that's when it is time to start transplanting sunflowers, okra, pumpkins, and winter squash. Greg mentions that in zone 8b you can transplant watermelons around the 15th of March till the end of March.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Travis has some mini cabbages that he harvested from the garden. He did a little experiment with no-tilling in his garden this year and with not a lot of nitrogen feeding the plants in return, he grew personal-sized cabbage. Greg shows off an exciting new product that will be available on the website closer to the end of February. This new product is a LED Grow Light Kit that will be ideal for growing indoor lettuce, herbs, and microgreens. Travis mentions a few new varieties that have been added to our website this week. We have two new sweet corn varieties, Yellowstone Sweet Corn and Eden Sweet Corn. Both of these new sweet corn varieties are known as supersweet augmented which means they have been bred with the sugary enhanced and supersweet genes. Another new variety of corn is the new Strawberry Popcorn which is great to grow with kids and to use as a Fall decoration. The Avalanche Beet is another new variety that is a white beet that has a sugary flavor profile. The last new variety is the Gold Mine Bean which is known to be the most popular and best producer of all the golden wax beans.

Viewer Questions

View Details

2020 Garden Resolutions -- Did we stick to our goals?

Every year before the new year, Greg and Travis evaluate how well they did on their garden resolutions from the previous year and set some goals for the upcoming new year. Some of Greg's resolutions for 2020 included not eating meat at every meal, let some garden plots rest, and personal goal to lose around 40 lbs. Greg did really well on one of his 2020 goals which was to let some garden plots rest and even farmed in a new plot. A few of Travis's 2020 garden resolutions was to eat more from the garden every night, grow more beans, and a personal goal double to double our YouTube subscribers. For the most part, Travis did good on accomplishing his goal of growing more beans and Hoss Tools reached our goal of doubling our YouTube subscriber count.

2021 Garden Resolutions

As we enter the new year, Greg and Travis have four garden resolutions that they would like to accomplish during this year. One of Greg's first goals for 2021 is to encourage new gardeners start up their vegetables garden and be more successful. Travis mentions that one of his garden resolutions is to store up more butter beans. Greg's next goal kind of goes along with his first goals, but he wants to create more content for newer gardeners. Another new garden resolution Travis has is to try and grow field peas once again in the garden. His main struggle with field peas is dealing with the pest pressures during the growing season. The next goal Greg has is a personal goal which is to lose a little weight. Travis's third goal is to grow his own popcorn in the garden in the new year. The last two resolutions that Greg and Travis have is to do more fishing and run a half marathon in 2021.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, the guys discuss the unusual colder weather climates down here in the South and just how much these cold snaps are effecting the vegetable crops in the garden. Greg talks about his multiplying onions that are growing pretty good in the garden right now. We have seen a little bit of a seed shortage starting out this new year. Some of the known shortage of crop seeds is beans, English peas, and open-pollinated varieties. As of right now, hybrid seeds seem to have no shortage just some small delays as far as getting them to Hoss HQ. The guys share some new varieties that are now available on the site. The first one is the Mountain Vineyard Tomato, which is known as a compact indeterminate tomato. The next new variety is the Roselle Hibiscus which is an heirloom with edible calyces that has a tart flavor profile and can be used to make delicious jams, sauces, and drinks. The Chinese Okra is a great variety to grow on a trellis and when they are really young is the best time to harvest them if you plan on eating them. Another new variety is the Robust White Popcorn which is a hybrid that is a high-performing and high-quality popcorn variety. The last new variety that we have available on the site this week is the ProCut White Lite Sunflower which produces white petals and has a greenish/yellow center.

Viewer Questions

For the Q & A segment this week, the guys answer some viewer questions from last weeks show. The first question is asking which wheel hoe package we recommend for a beginner gardener. Greg and Travis both mention that the most popular package we sell is the Double Wheel Deal which includes the Double Wheel Hoe, Plow Set, and a set of Sweeps. The next viewer question is wondering what the guys recommend for planting in a high tunnel in North Louisiana. Greg mentions that during the winter months is had great success with growing lettuce and succession summer squash in the high tunnel. The last question wants to know which winter squash variety is the best for growing in a raised bed. The best winter squash to grow in a raised bed include the Algonquian Squash, Delicata Squash, Sweet Dumpling, and Reno Acorn Squash.

View Details

Only One Variety to Grow in the Garden

If we only had to grow one variety of each crop in the garden, what would we choose and why? Imagine if you had a small 20 x 20 garden and could only pick one variety out of a list of crops, which would you choose to grow in your vegetable garden. The guys go over a list of ten different crops and the one variety they choose to grow if they were in this hypothetical situation. The first crop they discuss is tomatoes. Greg chooses the most popular tomato variety that we carry which is the Bella Rosa, while Travis decided on the SummerPick variety because of its impressive productivity and disease resistance in the garden. The next crop to only choose one variety to grow is peppers. Greg decided on growing the Mama Mia Giallo since he prefers to grill and stuff his peppers once harvested. While Travis decided on the Aruba Cubanelle Pepper which is a hybrid variety that is very productive and excellent to cook with on the homestead. As for cucumbers, Greg enjoys growing pickle varieties so he decided on the Calypso Cucumber because it's a little more versatile. However, Travis decided on the Olympian Cucumber which is a slicing variety that produces dark green uniformed cucumber. The next crop that they could only choose one variety to grow is summer squash. If Greg could only grow one variety of summer squash he would grow one of his favorites the Gentry Squash. As a crookneck squash, it is one of the easiest summer squashes to grow and matures fast in the vegetable garden. Travis also decided on a crookneck variety, the Gold Star has exceptional disease-resistance and is a heavy producer which makes it great for late spring/early summer plantings. As for the sweet corn, Greg went back and forth on a few different varieties, but he ended up choosing the Silver Queen Sweet Corn which is an older variety that has always performed well in the garden. Travis likes to grow the super sweet corn varieties, so he decided on the Temptress Sweet Corn which is one he grew recently and really liked with the overall production, harvesting, and storing. For greens, Greg went with the Savanna Mustard while Travis chose the Top Bunch 2.0 Collard. When it comes to choosing only potato variety to grow the guys both chose the Yukon Gold because of its exceptional flavor profile and storing ability once harvested. Moving along to onions, Greg decided on growing the Sweet Harvest which is another old school favorite of his since it is a flatter style onion variety. Travis chose another recent favorite of his which is the Plethora Onion. It is also a flatter style onion that has produced well in the garden this year. The last two crops left to choose from are lettuce and okra. For lettuce, the guys decided if they could only grow one variety it would be either the Coastal Star Romaine Lettuce or the Tehama Lettuce. For okra, Greg decided to switch up from his favorite variety and instead chose a newer variety which is the Jing Orange Okra. However, Travis stuck with his all-time favorite the Jambalaya Okra which he has tested against other okra varieties and it always outperforms them.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Greg has harvested some Bule Gourds from the vegetable garden. All gourds can be shaped a little bit differently, some can be smooth or some can have warts. You can make several different crafts out of gourds, one of the most common is bowls. The guys also show off some great stocking stuffers for the holiday season this year. The first stocking stuffer is our Corn Silking Brush which is a great tool to use for easily removing silks from corn cobs. Another great stuffer is the wooden garden labels which work perfectly for labeling plants in your seed starting room or greenhouse. The third product is the Hoss garden planner which includes information on plant spacing, row spacing, and companion planting suggestions for multiple crops.

View Details

What Should I Get The Home Gardener For Christmas?

Since Christmas is right around the corner the guys put together a list of ideal gifts to give the home gardener in your life this year. These gifts are ideal for any home gardener and won't break the bank either. Don't struggle any longer trying to find the perfect gift for the home gardener with this list of great gifts.

48-Cell Seed Starting Kit

The 48-Cell Seed Starting Kit is the perfect kit for any home gardener that is growing in-ground or raised beds. It includes everything you will need to start growing your own transplants for the vegetable garden. We recommend growing your own vegetable plants because it will allow you to get a jump start on the growing season by having plants ready to go in the ground when the weather is just right.

Seed Tin Collections

The Seed Collections is an excellent way to give the gardener in your life a variety of different plants without having to decide between all of our varieties. We have six different themed tin collections that include six seed packets that can fit perfectly as a stocking stuffer. Our six themed collections include Herb Garden Collection, Pollinator Garden Collection, Cool Season Garden Collection, Heirloom Garden Collection, Sunflower Garden Collection, and Fresh Salad Garden Collection.

Complete Fermentation Kit

The Complete Fermentation Kit includes everything you need to start fermenting your own vegetables that you harvested from the garden. You can easily make your own sauerkraut, pickles, and so many other goodies from your vegetable garden. Fermented foods are a probiotic food source that's rich in beneficial bacteria that can improve the overall health of your digestive and immune systems.

Over-the-Shoulder Harvesting Bucket

One of our most popular gardening tools is the Over-the-Shoulder Harvesting Bucket. This harvesting bucket is kidney-shaped for ultimate comfort against your body. This bucket also has adjustable straps that are made from seat belt material which means they are durable and won't cut into your skin while harvesting. Overall it allows you to be "hands-free" while maximizing time and effort in the vegetable garden.

Hoss Garden Gloves

The Hoss Garden Gloves are the most comfortable and durable working gloves for around the homestead. They provide a padded suede palm cushion that will help with grip and protect your hands from even the dirtiest jobs. The fingertips also have additional reinforcement to protect those pressure points from blistering. Unlike bulky leather gloves, the Hoss garden gloves won't become stiff if they become wet.

Garden Hod

Another popular harvesting tool is our Hoss Garden Hod is a wire mesh bottom that allows for several ways to wash your harvest from the vegetable garden. This basket is constructed with weather-resistant wood and heavy-duty mesh wire. This harvesting basket can be used daily to harvest your veggies, fruits, and herbs.

Old Hickory Knife Combo

This set of Old Hickory knives is great for use in the garden and kitchen for all of your harvesting and food preparation needs. Each blade is made of 1095 high carbon steel that has been heat-treated and tempered for easy sharpening. Not only is this Old Hickory Knife Combo an American favorite but they are also made in the USA!

Digging Tool

The ultimate hand trowel is the Hori-Hori style, Digging Tool which is ideal for planting in small-scale gardens or raised beds. You can use this tool in your greenhouse or grow room for making potting mixes. It is also perfect for making divots to put in transplants such as eggplant, peppers, or tomatoes into your vegetable garden.

Micro-Boost

Another great gift for the home gardener is a quart or gallon of Micro-Boost. The Micro-Boost is made up of a micronutrient blend that is specifically designed to improve the yield potential of your vegetable plants by maximizing nutrient uptake which in return promotes ...

View Details

Growing Vegetables in Colder Climates

As the cold weather made it to South Georgia it's only right for the guys to discuss how to garden in these colder climates. This week they discuss just how cold tolerant some vegetables really are in the vegetable garden. Depending on where you live your average first frost date can depend based on your zone. If you do not know your zone the USDA has lots of tools that can help you determine your Plant Hardiness Zone. In South Georgia, Zone 8b, our average first frost date can come around 20 to 25 days later. Therefore this year, our average first frost date is closer to December 2nd.

Ideal Growing Temperatures for Colder Climates

Some of the really cold tolerant vegetable crops include onions, carrots, garlic, collards, etc. To begin garlic can handle temperatures below zero degrees Fahrenheit. As far as leeks, collards, Brussel sprouts, and parsnips they can all take down to zero degrees Fahrenheit. Kale depending on different varieties can only take temperatures down to 10 degrees Fahrenheit. While chard, beets, and kohlrabi can only handle temperatures down to 15 degrees Fahrenheit. However, carrots can be a little tricky when it comes to cold weather. Supposedly the carrot tops can take down to 18 degrees Fahrenheit, but the roots can take temperatures closer down to zero degrees if you have them mulched well in the vegetable garden. For both spinach and onion varieties, they will take about 20 degrees of colder climates. However, the Walla Walla onion is the most cold-tolerant and will take temperatures down to zero. While cabbage is good down to 25 degrees and rutabaga is fine down to 28 degrees Fahrenheit.

As far as cover crops the most cold-tolerant is winter rye it can take temperatures down to -40 degrees. The frosty clover is supposed to be good in colder climates down to -20 degrees Fahrenheit. When it comes to hairy vetch it can handle temps down to -15 degrees Fahrenheit. While both crimson clover and winter pea will be fine in cold temperatures down to -10 degrees. If you live in the North you can grow some of these cold-tolerant cover crops especially if you start them in the Fall.

When it comes to some of these cold-tolerant vegetables there are a few that you need to be more careful with when growing in the vegetable garden. If you just have plants and no heads showing on your broccoli and cauliflower they should be alright, but if you have heads if they get a freeze on them they will be ruined. The best way to avoid getting a freeze on those heads is either cover them or harvest them early from the vegetable garden. For turnips and mustard, they will take a light frost that will burn them back a little bit but they usually will come back. As far as radishes they are pretty much burnt with a good frost. The last crop you need to be somewhat careful with is lettuce. When you experience frost on your lettuce we recommend not touching or disturbing that crop at all just let the frost melt off naturally.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Travis has some Primus Sweet Corn that he harvested from the vegetable garden recently. The guys also talk about the cold snap coming in. Which is beneficial to break up that insect pressure, and with a really cold winter, it can help the spring garden not have such a bad insect pressure.

As we getting closer to the new year, Travis has some new varieties to share that will be ideal for your vegetable garden next year. The first variety is the Pepitas Pumpkin. This pumpkin variety is a hybrid and has hull-less "naked seeds" that are supposed to be nutritious and have a great flavor profile. Next is the Long Island Cheese Pumpkin which is an heirloom variety that has excellent storage once harvested from the garden. The Long Island Cheese produces around 6-10 lb fruits that are great for soups or pies. The third variety mentioned is the Snow Mass Melon which is a large honeydew melon...

View Details

What is the Best Vegetable Garden Size?

How much space do I need to grow a garden? What vegetable garden size will feed my family? What is the most manageable garden size? All of these questions are important when deciding what the ideal vegetable garden size you need for your homestead. Even if you have been gardening awhile sometimes you need to reevaluate and determine if your garden size is serving you well. There are a lot of opinions out there that mention a garden size for a family of four should be anywhere from 100 to 200 square feet. However, it's subjective to how intensely you're going to garden, how much time you are going to spend out there, what all you want to grow, and so on. With all this information Travis and Greg are going to lay down a guideline that can best fit you and if you need to alternate it a little bit you can.

Ideal Vegetable Garden Size Based on Row Lengths

So the first way to determine what size garden a family of four needs is to figure out the row length for every crop you plan on growing. For beans the suggested row length is a 40-foot row, Travis mentions that depending on which variety you grow that will be plenty of row length to eat some and store them. When it comes to broccoli a 30-foot row is recommended, but with broccoli, you harvest all at one time so you do need some type of preservation method for it when it comes out of the garden. On carrots, you can plant them on a single row which is a 40-foot row, or a double row which is a 20-foot row in the garden. Cauliflower is the same row length as broccoli, you just need to find a way to preserve them once you harvest them all. If you like corn like the guys, you should grow around 400-600 row feet of corn in square plots. The recommended row length for cucumbers is 20 feet, if you have a productive variety that should be plenty of length for a family of four. When it comes to lettuce, others suggest growing a 50-foot row which is a little too much for the guys. They usually have a row length of 20-30 foot row for lettuce and succession plant in the vegetable garden. For okra, the suggested was a 10-foot row which is really low considering how much Greg and Travis love their okra. The guys usually plant 20-30 foot row and have plenty to cook and eat. The row length for onions in the vegetable garden is a 40-foot row and if you have a place to store them in a dry/cool place you can easily do an 80-foot row. Depending on how many different varieties you plan to plant, peppers need around a 10-foot row. The recommended for summer squash is a 20-foot row, while winter squash is a 40-foot row just because they store so good once harvested. Typically Greg plants around a 50-foot row of tomatoes which is beyond plenty for a family of four.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Greg and Travis have some satsumas from a local farm in South Georgia. Travis made some kale frittata using some kale that he harvested from the garden. What's happening in the garden right now? Travis mentions that his corn still has not made ears and has got him worried. With the cold weather and shorter day lengths, it could be messing up the growth of his corn in the garden. With the first frost approaching soon, the guys harvested their rattlesnake pole beans just in time. They mention that you always play a little gamble growing those beans near the first frost. Travis shares some new varieties this week -- such as PrizeWinner Giant Pumpkin, Orange You Sweet Pepper, Bristol Cucumber, Vulture Beet, and Tailgate Seedless Watermelon.

Travis's Kale Frittata Recipe

Night Before: Cook bacon and wilt down kale, then place in the fridgeNext Morning: 12 eggs, three tablespoons of heavy cream, kale, and tear bacon into small pieces, then mix togetherThen, mix in either fetta cheese or goat cheese Cook in the oven at 400 for around 15-20 minutes -- then it's ready to eat!

Viewer Questions

View Details

Dealing with Cool Season Pests

When it comes to dealing with cool-season pests it can be a little different than those pesky warm-season pests. The biggest way to control the cool-season pests is to have a spray program early in the vegetable garden. During the cool season, there are four different kinds of species that can cause the most trouble such as the diamondback caterpillar, cabbage lopper, cabbageworm, and the cutworm. Although most people like to identify these species there really is no need to because the treatment to control them is the same except for cutworms. Another insect that a lot of people deal with during the cool season is slugs. We recommend using Sluggo Plus which is a bait that you sprinkle along the ground to kill them off. The last set of cool-season pests that you will have to deal with in the garden is the flying insects such as aphids, whiteflies, and earwigs.

In order to control these cool-season pests, you need a spraying schedule that is best suitable for your garden and the pest you struggle with. Travis goes over his top cool-season pest control products that he has found to work great in his garden. The first week, he mixes B.t., Neem Oil, and the Complete Disease Control. The next week he will use the B.t., Horticultural Oil, and Liquid-Cop. However, if his worm pressure increases for any reason he switches the B.t. out for Spinosad in order to knock them out of the vegetable garden.

In Greg's garden, he switches it up a little bit and mixes the Fruit Tree Spray and Complete Disease Control one week. Then, the next week he doesn't play around with his bad worm pressures so he uses B.t., Liquid-Cop, and Spinosad. The B.t. works only on worms and hits them as a feeder. The Spinosad works as a stomach poisoning or for direct contact. While the Liquid-Cop is ideal for controlling the blights and some of the disease pressures in the garden.

General Pest Control Practices

If you had a problem last year with a certain pest, you can guarantee you will have a problem this year. So control that pest early in the vegetable garden this year.Spray early and at least weekly in the garden.Don't be afraid to make cocktails and rotate your pest control products.If you do a good job controlling your pests this year, then next year it will be a lot better.Maintain a clean garden.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Greg and Travis talk about a hurricane which means lots of rain/wind getting ready to hit South Georgia and the surrounding area. They also talk about all the vegetables they got planted this week such as elephant garlic and onions. Greg has a bit of a problem with rabbits in the vegetable garden, but he is getting ready to solve that issue soon.

Travis shares a couple more new varieties for 2021 that we are carrying now. The first variety is the Better Boy Tomato which is a popular indeterminate that makes huge, tangy tomatoes that are ideal for slicing and making sauces. Next, is the Purple Boy which produces deep purple fruits with an exceptional flavor profile. Another new variety is the Lemon Boy that makes a bright yellow tomato with higher-yielding compared to other varieties. Also, we now have the All American Selections winner, Big Beef Tomato available. This is a large, beefsteak tomato that is considered to be the gold standard for fresh market tomatoes in many areas of the country.

Viewer Questions

For the Q & A segment this week, the guys answer some viewer questions that were asked on last week’s show. If you have an Earthbox can you use our Container Watering Kits? Greg mentions that you can use our container kits for Earthbox and should work with no problem. The next question is whether you should order spring seeds now or wait until fresh seeds are available. All the seeds we have available now are fresh and have been germ tested based on the State of Georgia laws. There are a few varieties that we will sell out of thi...

View Details

Container Gardening vs. Fruit Tree Watering Kits

While we have an excellent drip irrigation kit available for the in-ground vegetable garden. We found there was a need for a container gardening kit that can help individuals with easily watering rows of containers or even just a few pots on your porch. This easy to set up container kit comes with everything you need to start watering your plants effectively on the homestead. If you are limited on your space or do not have great soil on your homestead then container gardening is ideal for you to grow your own food. The only problem with container gardening is the containers can dry out quickly so it's very important to keep them irrigated in order for the plants to survive and not stress. A lot of the actual components work the same as our drip irrigation kit, but they require a little bit different set up for container gardening.

The fruit tree watering kit is similar to the container watering kit but comes with different quantities of some items. The fruit tree kit allows you to easily water the fruit trees on your homestead by simply just turning on a spigot. The kit is ideal for watering multiple figs, apples, plums, pears, blueberries, and more trees. The kit includes enough fittings to water 20 trees on your homestead. We also have the items in the kit available individually on our website if you need to water a little more than 20 trees or just need extra.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Greg and Travis have some Scarlet Emperor Runner Beans fresh from the vegetable garden. These runner beans are an heirloom, open-pollinated variety with excellent beauty and taste. This variety typically produces large 8 to 12" pods that have a slightly fuzzy texture. Another fresh harvest from the garden is the Tehama Lettuce which is a spring crisp variety that has exceptional heat-tolerance. This lettuce performs best when transplanted which allows for consistent plant spacing and prevents seedlings from competing with weeds in the early stages of the plant.

Greg also shows off a Sungold Dwarf Sunflower that has grown a big and beautiful head on it. This dwarf sunflower variety gets around 3 to 4 feet tall in the garden and has a soft texture similar to the Teddy Bear variety. Lastly, the guys give a sad update about the popular Brickyard tomato. Unfortunately, the Brickyard Tomato variety has been discontinued by the breeder which means we will no longer be able to carry these tomato seeds. The replacement to the Brickyard Tomato is the SummerPick Tomato which actually produces more than the Brickyard.

As we get closer to 2021, Travis shares some new tomato varieties that are coming to the website. The first variety is the SunSugar Tomato which is supposed to taste like candy and is similar to the SunGold Tomato. The next variety is a popular indeterminate known as Big Beef which makes really big tomatoes and excellent disease resistance. The Flordia 91 is another great tomato variety that is known to be one of the best to set fruits in the heat which in return allows you to grow this one a little longer during the summer. The last variety the guys share this week is the Southern Ripe Tomato which is determinate that also has really good disease resistance qualities.

Viewer Questions

For the Q & A segment this week, the guys answer some viewer questions that were asked on last week's show. The first question is how to take care of heavy clay soil in the garden. Travis mentions that dealing with awful soil is tough but with cover cropping and adding heavy compost he was able to get his soil manageable for growing vegetables. It does take some time but if you stay consistent with adding compost and cover cropping your soil will get better. The second question is referring to seed potatoes and whether you should save potatoes or just buy new seed every year. From doing a little research,

View Details

Sharing Onion Knowledge

This week on the show Greg and Travis answer some viewer questions and share their onion knowledge that they have gained over the years of growing in the garden. The first question answered is in regards to onion growing zones -- short day, intermediate day, and long day. When it comes to short day vs. intermediate day onions, the major difference is the day lengths between the two zones. The short day zone will trigger the bulbing phases when the day length reaches 10 to 12 hours. While the intermediate day zone will trigger the bulbing phase at 14 to 16 hours. If you are in between two zones like the viewer the guys share their onion knowledge that it is best to grow short-day onion varieties because you not going to ever reach the day length required for intermediate day onions. The next question refers to Greg growing onions in raised beds. His conclusion is that although they have grown off okay in the raised bed, he is having a little trouble with weed control which is easier to maintain in seed starting trays.

Similar to onions, when it comes to growing leeks Travis treats them exactly like onions initially. However, when it comes to planting leeks you need to plant them deep unlike onions. When it comes to onion and leeks fertilization schedule it's the same in the vegetable garden. Next, the guys share their knowledge about using a pre-emergent like Prowl for weed control. Greg mentions that there is no problem with using Prowl for weed control in the market garden situation. Also, if you want to add a humic acid powder to your soil when growing onions and garlic there is no problem with it, but it can be difficult to find in larger quantities that will make a huge difference for the home gardener. Here in the South, when growing onion transplants typically we don't put them on heat maps in the greenhouse because of our roll-up door that allows for temperatures to vary which hasn't caused any major issue in germination.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, the guys discuss the brand new website launch which we are very excited about. Travis has Primus Sweet Corn growing in the garden currently that has reached around "hiney high" as the guys like to say. Hurricane Sally affected his corn pretty bad earlier but is doing a lot better and growing fast. If you are growing fall corn, the guys mention that is important for you to get a spraying program down earlier so your not taken over by the worms. Greg says the most effective way to control those worms in your fall garden is to rotate between Spinosad and B.t. by spraying weekly in the garden. Travis shows off some broccoli transplants that are ready to plant in the ground. Greg also has some transplants that are in a 24-cell seed starting tray which is ideal if you have a smaller garden and just need a few plants. Greg shares an update on his multiplying onions that are growing in the vegetable garden.

Product of the Week

Green Magic Broccoli

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=x8bFnmoKa5U&t=610s

View Details

Does It Matter Where Seed Varieties Are Grown?

We often get the question "will this grown in my region", the answer, for the most part, is yes and it generally does not matter when growing plants in your vegetable garden wherever you live. However, there are a few minor crops that need to be planted correctly if you want to have better success growing those certain seed crops in your region.

Which Seed Varieties Are Regional?

However, there are a few seed varieties that may matter where they are grown regionally. The first crop that it does matter is onions because of the three different types of onions that can be grown. The three types are short, intermediate, and long day onions which all have different day lengths which alter what seed varieties can be grown based on your location. Another example is English peas and field peas. Field Peas grow way better in the south, in which English Peas grow better with more moderate temperatures such as mild summers in the North. Okra is another crop that does better growing in the South because of our long summer temperatures. Overall, maturity dates can matter if you experience a shorter growing season. Some varieties are also designed for certain climates due to the heat-tolerant characteristics. For example, Green Magic Broccoli, this is the most heat-tolerant broccoli we offer and if you live up North you need to start seeds earlier than we do in the South. Top Bunch 2.0 is another crop that will do great no matter your region just know it will take some heat. A few more varieties that are heat-tolerant varieties are the Cherokee Lettuce, Tehama Lettuce, Sun Angel Spinach, South Anna Butternut, Seminole Pumpkin, Cherokee Tan Pumpkin, Bella Rosa Tomato, and Red Snapper Tomato.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Greg and Travis have a few more fig varieties to taste test on the show. Greg also has some hibiscus roselle that he has harvested from the garden. He has made juice, tea, and jam out of the hibiscus which has a tart flavor that will need a little sweetener to get it just right. Travis has harvested some sweet potatoes and this year Hurricane Sally did get to some of them in the garden. In the greenhouse, the guys have tons of transplants popping up and getting ready for planting in the vegetable garden soon.

Viewer Questions

For the Q & A segment this week, Travis and Greg answer some questions from last week's show. Travis mentions that when planting onions they plant them 3 to 4 inches apart and before they start bulbing they will go through and pull every other one for green onions. Another question the guy's answer is whether or not minerals such as high levels of iron in water can be harmful to garden plants. Greg mentions that he does not know of any harmful natural minerals in water that can affect your plants negatively. However, he has experienced where pH levels can harm plants negatively.

Product of the Week

Premium Garden Seeds

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OMJB3TGYFwU&t=2087s

View Details

Why Should I Fertilizer in my Garden?

There are five major reasons we recommend having a fertilization system for your vegetable garden. Whether you prefer liquid or granular fertilizer there are pros and cons to both. The first reason we recommend using fertilizer in your garden is the ability to use less fertilizer and irrigation which will allow you to be more cost-effective. The second reason we like to use fertilizer is the abiltity to have better timing when irrigating plants. You can fertilize exactly when the plants need it and don't have to rely on rain or overhead watering cycles. The third reason is overall less labor meaning it requires less time and effort unlike side-dressing plants. The next reason we recommend fertilizing is the ability to reduce soil compaction because there is less traffic on the soil than when side-dressing plants in the garden. Lastly, fertilizing can reduce transplant shock because the plants are quickly feed with the fertilizer and won't have to wait for the slow release from side-dressing.

Liquid vs. Granular Fertilizer

When it comes to overhead fertilizing this method is ideal for container gardening, raised bed gardening, or just fertilizing seedlings. For larger plots, this method is only really useful if the intention is to feed the entire plot. It can be wasteful to do overhead watering on row crops because there is no need to fertilize between rows in the vegetable garden. For drip fertigation, micro-dosing or spoon-feeding are the best options. This method needs to be applied at frequent intervals sometimes daily or weekly in some instances. It can be used in conjunction with a pre-plant fertilizer or side-dressing in commercial farming. Slow injections are the best when it comes to drip fertigation because it provides the evenest distribution of fertilizer.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Travis has three different fig varieties to taste test on the show. Although all the figs look similar they have very distinctive flavors that set them apart from each other. Greg and Travis also have some transplants that are almost ready to plant in the garden soil. They discuss ways in which you need to start fertilizing the transplants and how you know when they are ready to plant in the ground.

Viewer Questions

For the Q & A segment this week, Greg and Travis discuss the best cover crop to use for root-knot nematodes, information about BioChar, and how to plant/grow micro-greens. The best cover crops to use for controlling root-knot nematodes is to mix with any brassica or pea variety. Greg mentions that BioChar is basically like a big sponge that is great for the garden soil in the vegetable garden. When it comes to growing micro-greens there one cut type of crop, therefore if you plant some every two weeks you will always have a supply of them. The form of lighting to grow them under is led lights that are close to the plants to start with.

Product of the Week

Hoss Fertilizer Injector

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TSX4ed0vX9E&feature=youtu.be

View Details

5 Benefits of Using Cool Cover Crops

Why grow cool cover crops in the garden? Not only does it keep something growing year-round in the garden, but they add tons of benefits that help improve and better our soil too. The first benefit to growing cool cover crops is the nitrogen fixation which will add nutrients directly to the soil roots. Another benefit is the amazing soil building they can do by adding organic matter, scavenging nutrients, and reduces compaction. Along with building up the soils, cool cover crops will help improve erosion control and weed suppression because of the dense cover weeds aren't able to germinate as much. Lastly, cool cover crops are ideal for controlling some of those pest pressures you may experience in your garden. When adding cool cover crops to your garden, you are breaking the pest cycles because they don't have anything to eat on which allows you to cut out the reproductive cycle of those pests.

Best Cool Cover Crops

When it comes to the cool cover crops there are four different types that will add different benefits to your soil based on what you grow in your different garden plots. The three different clover varieties we carry are crimson, white dutch, and frosty berseem. The Crimson Clover is OMRI inoculated which means it is coated to make it easier for seeding/broadcasting in the garden. This variety is cold-tolerant that has kind of the densest biomass which will help with weed suppression. The White Dutch Clover is a new variety that we offer that is heat and drought tolerant. However, the white dutch is less ideal for pollinators which can be a disadvantage in the vegetable garden. Another new variety is the Frosty Berseem Clover which is extremely cold tolerant and is known for being one of the heaviest nitrogen fixers of the clovers.

As far as legume cool cover crops we offer the Austrian winter pea, hairy vetch, and the marvel chickpea. The Austrian Winter Pea is ideal for planting with another cover crop as a cocktail in the garden. This cover crop is another heavy nitrogen fixer variety that will have a solid ground cover and great for livestock grazing. Another great cocktail cover crop is the Hairy Vetch which is great for weed suppression and improves erosion control. The new legume variety that we offer is the Marvel Chickpea that can be harvested and ideal for making hummus on the homestead. This variety is also ideal for adding into the garden after growing heavy feeders like corn.

Brassica cover crops include varieties like broadleaf mustard, Kodiak brown mustard, African forage cabbage, impact forage collards, and tillage radish. The Broadleaf Mustard is the best cool-season cover crop for suppressing and reducing nematode populations for harmful soil fungi. Unlike the Broadleaf Mustard, the Kodiak Brown Mustard is fine to eat. The Kodiak Brown Mustard is the best biofumigant for the soil which is great for controlling bad nematodes. The next two new varieties are both forage crops which are ideal for livestock to graze on over the garden to feed the soils naturally. The African Forage Cabbage is an open-leaf cabbage that is ideal for hard soils because it's an excellent nutrient scavenger for hard soils. The Impact Forage Collards is another cold-tolerant variety that offers heavy biomass production. Another brassica variety is the Tillage Radish which is great for hard compacted soils and for scavenging nutrients in sandy soils.

The last cool cover crop to discuss is the Winter Rye which is also very cold-tolerant and can germinate in cooler temps. The rye provides a dense mat of vegetation and roots that helps with scavenging nutrients in the soil. However, the winter rye is harder to eliminate because of the really dense vegetation that is tougher to remove from the garden soil.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment, a viewer sent Greg and Travis some apricot habanero pepper jelly and apricot ghost pepper jelly to taste test o...

View Details

Ideal Time for Planting Onions

It is time to start thinking about planting onions in your vegetable garden. However, depending on your location there are certain onion varieties you should consider planting based on your zone. For short day onions, the ideal planting time is fall or late winter. The best time to plant intermediate day onions is around late winter or early spring. While long day onions work best when planted in early spring in the garden. Since onions take a little longer to germinate we recommend planting onions in seed starting trays to have better success at healthier plants. Another reason we like planting onions in a raised bed or by transplanting is that they prefer to be spaced around 6 to 8 inches apart in order to make those big onion bulbs that you want in the garden. Here in the South, we look for planting onion transplants anytime in November or early December. The best fertilizer to use on onions initially is a complete fertilizer because onions need to take up a lot of fertilizer during the vegetative phase. Once the bulbing phase starts, cut off the fertilizer to avoid any issues with blight which can happen when too much fertilizer is given to the plants.

Planting Onions: Short Day, Intermediate, Long Day

Which onion zone are you in? That is the number question to ask yourself when deciding what onion varieties you should be planting. To determine which type of onion you should grow it's best to look at the day length in your location. When growing onions they have two different phases -- vegetative and bulbing phase. Once the onion plants are ready to be planted in the garden that will start the vegetative phase. The vegetative phase is mainly just growing the foliage at the top, the bulb is not enlarging during that first phase. Once your day length hits a certain number of hours then the bulbing process will begin. With short-day onions, the bulbing phase will begin start when day length reaches around 10 to 12 hours. Intermediate day onions will start bulbing when day length reaches 12 to 14 days. While long-day onions will trigger bulbing when day length reaches 14 to 16 hours. Therefore, if you are trying to grow a long day onion variety here in the South it will never start the bulbing phase because we never experience 14 to 16-hour day lengths. Another issue that will most likely happen if you plant a short day variety in the North is as soon as you plant it in the ground it will start bulbing really quickly and you won't have enough foliage that is needed to grow a large onion.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Greg has a new variety to share from his microgreen project. The microgreen varieties he tried growing this week were Premium Greens Mix, Lacinato Kale, Detroit Dark Red Beet, and Ruby Fresh Swiss Chard. The microgreens are great for growing year-round on your homestead and are perfect for eating in salads or used as a garnish.

Just like last week's show, Travis has new varieties to share this week. There are quite a few new cool-season cover crops that will be coming soon to the website once we get them to our warehouse. However, Travis does want to share some new varieties that are now on the website. The first new variety is Minuteman Cauliflower which is a hybrid that performs well in the heat for late spring and early fall production. It usually matures in just 65 to 70 days after transplant which makes it one of the earliest maturing cauliflower varieties available. Then, we have a new lettuce variety known as Brave Heart Romaine that produces large and tall heads. It is also a downy mildew resistant variety making it an excellent choice if you experience high heat and humidity in your area. Lastly, the Envy Carrot is known to produce well in clay or muck soils, unlike other carrot varieties. This variety is an imperator type that averages around 10" to 12" long carrots in the garden.

Viewer Questions

View Details

Why is Seed Starting Mix so Important to Grow Seedlings?

Before we discuss how to grow seedlings in a seed starting trays we must first understand the difference between seed starting mix vs. potting soil. It is important to use a seed starting mix to successfully grow seedlings because of the fine texture and smaller granular perlite which is more suitable for growing seedlings. We do not recommend using potting soil to grow seedlings because it contains a more coarse texture that is too chunky for growing seeds.

Tips: Grow Seedlings in a Seed Starting Tray

When growing seedlings, you first need a good sturdy seed starting tray like our 162 or 338 seed trays. These trays are ideal for seed starting because of the internal design of vertical root training ribs which allow for better aeration and root ball drainage. Investing in good quality seed starting supplies will help your plants succeed in the long run too. To begin planting seeds you should start by indenting the cells, then drop one seed in each cell. The general rule of thumb for how big the hole or indention for planting is twice the diameter of your seed. One of the most common mistakes that we see when seed starting is watering. The seed starting mix needs a lot of water initially to keep the soil moist. If you are bottom watering with our Heavy-Duty Bottom Trays it's important to water from the top until the roots can reach the bottom, then once they reach the bottom you can have a reservoir to feed them that way. In the beginning, you want to water the seeds until you can see water dripping from the bottom of the tray. Another mistake that people can make when seed starting is the lighting. If you are growing seeds inside you need to have a light directly on top of the plants and as the seedlings start to grow raise the light. Lastly, when fertilizing new seedlings once you see the first set of true leaves you will mix 1 tablespoon of 20-20-20 per gallon of water twice a week.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Travis went to North GA for Labor Day weekend and came back to South GA with a 35 lb Cushaw Squash. You can make several different things out of the cushaw squash but most people make pies or use the squash for fall decoration. Travis also shows off beautiful zinnias that he has harvested from the dream garden on his homestead. These are the Benary Giant Zinnias which is the most popular cut flower variety for vegetable gardens. Not only do zinnias create wonderful bouquets of flowers but they also attract beneficial pollinators that are really helpful for the garden.

Travis has three new varieties to talk about with the first being a new onion variety called the Plethora Onion. This onion is a short day variety that produces jumbo/colossal sweet type yellow onion. The second new variety is another short day onion known as the Carta Blanca Onion that produces globe-shaped white onions in the garden. The last new variety the guys mention this week is the Gold Lite Sunflower which is a ProCut hybrid type sunflower. ProCut varieties produce a single stem with one flower per stem and are pollenless which means it won’t drop pollen on your table once cut and placed into a vase.

Viewer Questions

For the Q & A segment this week, Greg and Travis answer some popular questions from their viewers on last week's show. The first question this week is discussing Irish potato season and whether or not it is too late for starting this spring. Travis shares his advice that as long as you have around 90-day temperatures you can still start Irish potatoes this spring. The next viewer question is what causes pumpkins to rot off the vine. Greg explains a couple of different scenarios that can cause pumpkins to rot. First, if the pumpkins are just coming on and they rot/fall off the vine it's a pollinator issue. If the pumpkins are larger and have already had fruit set it can either be too much water or too much fertilizatio...

View Details

Which Crops Should I Transplant?

How do you know if you should transplant or direct seed a certain crop? When trying to grow a successful garden one of the most important factors is deciding whether it is best to transplant or direct seed crops. The difference between transplanting seeds vs direct seeding is with transplants you are starting the seeds in a seed starting tray which allows you to better control the overall environment when they first start growing. While direct seeding plants you are allowing the plants to be exposed to a riskier environment because you can not control the weather conditions and possible pest pressures.

Transplant vs. Direct Seed List

Beets - BothBroccoli - TransplantBrussel Sprouts - TransplantCabbage - TransplantCauliflower - TransplantCarrots - Direct SeedChard - BothCollards - BothEnglish Peas - BothKale - BothKohlrabi - TransplantLeeks - TransplantGarlic - plant from clovesLettuce - BothMustard/Green Mixes - Direct SeedOnions - TransplantRadish - Direct SeedRutabaga - BothSpinach - Direct SeedTurnipsDirect Seed: Purple Top and White TurnipsTransplant: All Top Turnips

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment this week, Greg has edible hibiscus that is known to be easy to grow and drought-tolerant which is ideal for the summer heat. The hibiscus is native to Africa and kin to the okra family (Malvaceae). Hibiscus produces a seed pod that is wrapped with capsicum which is a flower that is self-pollinating. Once you peel the capsicum away you can find the seed pod that you can save seeds for next year. Then, the petals are known as the good part as Mr. Greg likes to say. The petals can be boiled down and make tea, syrup, jam, or regular food coloring. Greg also has a new update on his experimenting with the Microgreens project. He has recently grown the most popular microgreen from his research which is sunflowers. The sunflower microgreen is supposed to have the best flavor out of all the microgreen crops you can grow. The sunflower has more of a nuttier flavor and a little better texture which works great for a garnish or in a salad. With microgreens, it is a one-time cut harvest which means they won't grow back once you cut the plants.

Viewer Questions

This week Greg and Travis answer lots of viewer questions to help you succeed in growing your own food. The first question they answer is asking for more information related to monocots and dicots. There are several different characteristics between monocots and dicots but it basically just sums up two different types of plants. Cot stands for cotyledon which is in the seed, monocots have one cotyledon, and dicots have two cotyledons. Another way to tell the difference is the two different leaf veins such as monocots have parallel veins and dicots have branching veins.

The next viewer question is can you plant a greens mix and leave it to overwinter as a cover crop to help break up hard soils. Greg believes that a cocktail mix like daikon radish and a mustard green would work better to help break up tougher soils. The daikon radish will help bust up those deeper soil levels that are common in clay soils. While the mustard is going to give plenty of foliage at the top and great nematode suppression.

Can you start seeds in raised beds then transplant them in the garden? To answer that question, yes you can. Greg mentions that is the best way to grow onions is in a raised bed then transplant them in the ground. When discussing the best way to fertilize carrots, Travis plants his carrots thick on double rows and feeds them pretty well with irrigation especially once the start germinating well. Travis fertilization schedule for carrots is usually just 20-20-20 fertilizer about once a month.

Product of the Week

Silage Tarp

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ln9mhWMZ9FU&t=897s

View Details

Crop Rotation- Why is it Important?

Crop Rotation is key to having a successful garden for many years. The act of crop rotation means to change up what type of crop you plant in a particular area. If you plant lettuce, lettuce, lettuce, multiple times in one season, you will be prone to more pests and problems because the insects that feed off lettuce will continue to come back. You will also strip your soil of all its nutrients since one crop family has different needs than another crop family.

So, you need to know what crops are in what family. Knowing the crop families will help you in the Fall garden planning. What you want to succession plant and where you want to plant is something that needs to be planned before you start your Fall garden. The following families are the cool-season crop families:

Alliums- Onions, Leeks, Garlic, ShallotsBrassicas- Broccoli, Brussels Sprouts, Cabbage, Cauliflower, Kohlrabi, Turnips, Radish, Rutabega, MustardAmaranths- Beets, Chard, SpinachUmbellifers- Carrots, Cilantro, Parsley, Dill, ParsnipsLegumes- English PeasDaisy- Lettuce

Ensuring that you follow Alliums with a Legume or Brassicas all garden season will ensure that you have a bountiful harvest. It will also keep your soil in top-notch shape, and you will have less of a need for cover crops.

Things to Consider When Planning Crop Rotation!

When you sit down to consider your Fall garden schedule, there are many things you need to consider. One of those being the maturity dates of things, it would help if you tried to schedule crops with similar maturity dates together. You also want to think about a plant's needs and plant those with similar needs next to each other. Don't plant carrots that barely need any water next to something that requires a lot, same with fertilization.

Also, when planning your crop rotation, you want to think about which seeds are a one-time harvest and which ones are multiple harvests. Of course, this depends on your preference and how many yields you would like to get off each plant, but these are the ones we get multiple crops out of:

CollardsKaleMustard & Greens MixesAll Top TurnipsBaby Lettuce MixEnglish PeasSpinachChard

Any Fall garden crop that isn't on that list is something we only get one harvest off. Those crops include Beets, Leeks, Garlic, Carrots, and many others. Speaking of carrots, we suggest planting all of those together since they take so long to mature.

Another little top is to plant all of your Allium family plants together at once. They all have similar nutrients needs, and this will be the easiest way to feed and water. After you harvest them, you can then follow it up with a Legume or Daisy family crop.

Show and Tell Segment

As we are gearing up for our Fall garden, we want to make sure you have everything you need for yours too! So, the Seed Starting Kits are back in stock! One big question many of you have with the seed starting kits is, how long do I keep the domes on top of the kits? Our suggestion is to leave on the domes until all of the seeds germinate.

Figs, Figs, Figs, we love eating them, and we got some exciting things coming for them! Be on the lookout in the next few months for an irrigation system, much like our drip tape for fruit trees! We are also working on an irrigation system for those gardeners that have everything in pots. This irrigation system will cut down significantly on your watering time.

In order to keep all our items in stock and have the ability to keep adding new products, Hoss Tools needs to expand! We are currently building a new warehouse, quadruple our size! Making these expansions will give us space and tools we need to help you grow your own food!

Product of the Week

Deluxe Seed Starting Kit

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=T50uFUEBkes&t=36s

View Details

Our Experience with Selling Produce

Market farming, or selling your produce to others, can come in many different forms, whether that is a roadside stand, a U-pick agritourism model, or your traditional farmers market. The way we have found success with selling produce is a weekly bag model. Travis and his wife have been successfully market farming for over five years now, and they want to share what they have found to be the best way to do it.

What their model looks like is posting on Facebook that they have a vegetable bag for sale for $25. The post will include a list of what they have harvested and tell them that they will get a mix of five products—not letting people choose cuts down on the time it takes to pack the bags. For each product, let's say okra, you will get enough in the bag to feed a family of four.

Once people have claimed their bag, which there is no subscription, this is an every week model. They then either Venmo or Paypal to pay for their vegetable bag. Having this cashless transaction also cuts down on time. People can choose to either pick up or have it delivered, and they will receive their vegetables at the first of the week.

This model works well for a family that does market farming on the side. Selling an average of 20 bags a week at $25 a bag isn't too shabby. It all comes down to making sure people know about your bag and making that bag appealing to them. That's is where marketing comes into play.

How-To Market your Produce

Marketing your vegetables is essential when becoming a market farmer. If people do not know about your products or don't understand why it can benefit them, then there is no need for you to waste your time and labor. One significant component of marketing for Travis is Facebook. Creating a Facebook business page will allow everyone who follows it to see the post, which does not happen with Facebook groups.

You also have to learn when you should post about your vegetable bags. For Travis, this was on Sundays; this day is when people start thinking about what they will do for dinner for the week. If these working moms see a way to get fresh food delivered to them, they will buy into it, no matter the price.

When choosing what vegetables to grow and sell, it is also important to remember to grow staple items. Staple items include summer squash, cucumbers, okra, things people are familiar with, and know-how to cook. You also want to have vegetables that store well to be as fresh as possible when getting to the final consumer. Choosing vegetables that store well will help you market the products and keep customers returning.

Show and Tell Segment

After trying different methods, we have figured out the best indicator when deciding when our Canary Melon is ready to be harvested, and it's not the curly-q. Our Halo Canary Melon turns a bright yellow, and to assure that they are ripe when you pick them, you want to make sure they have turned that pretty yellow color. When mature, these Canary Melons have a canteloupe texture and are sweet but not as sweet as a watermelon. These melons are powdery mildew resistant making them easier to grow in the heat of the summer.

Hoss Tools is excited to announce we have new seed bags that will be used for shipping. These bags are lined with foil and have a ziplock at the top, making it the best option when storing and shipping seeds. We will also be able to offer larger quantities in our seeds with these bags.

Some more exciting news, we have new dwarf sunflower varieties in stock! Including, Mardi Gras Dwarf Sunflower, Sunspot Dwarf Sunflower, and Sungold Dwarf Sunflower.

Viewer Question Segment

As always, we love the questions our viewers bring to us. After last week's video on market farming, we had a few more questions. One viewer asked if we think non-vegetable items would do well with a market farm. Our answer was simple, YES! If you can put the planning into it and figure a way to get it to th...

View Details

Things to Consider Before Diving into a Market Farm

Growing food for your family and friends is one thing but turning it into a profitable business is another. A market farm can be a very successful business if the right components come together, but if not, it may not be worth your time or money. Travis of Hoss Tools has run a market farm business for six years and wants to share a few of his tips for making sure this business is for you.

Before you dive into this market farm headfirst, there are some things you need to consider. First, make sure that you have already mastered gardening just for your family. If you cannot garden successfully for your family alone, you don't need to worry about feeding others.

Another thing you want to have a good grasp of before you begin is knowing your customer. For Travis, that is catering towards the middle-class, working mom types. Because Travis delivers a vegetable bag to people's homes, his reliable customers want fresh food but don't have time to grow it themselves.

Understanding your customer is also understanding what vegetables are popular among your community. It would help if you grew the things that are going to sell, which can differ for each region. Down here in South Georgia, some of the easiest and profitable vegetables include:

KaleOkraSummer SquashCucumbersPeppersEggplant

Also, remember to be cautious of only growing things that you are good at growing. If you aren't good at growing Kale, don't waste your time and money.

Ways to Make Your Market Farm Profitable

When market farming, you need to remember the grocery store is not your competition. You can not base your prices on what the grocery store does. Understand why your produce is superior and sell that to your customers; they will then justify the expense.

Figuring out how you would like to structure selling your vegetables will help a lot too. Do you want to sell retail or wholesale, or a mix of both? It is always a good idea, whatever you can't sell directly to customers, to ask butcher shops or local country stores if they would like some of your produce. It is important to remember to have a plan from the beginning, start small, and be okay with change.

Marketing your products online is a great way to make your business more profitable. Showing future customers recipes and cooking demonstrations with the vegetables you are selling that week is a great way to advertise. Facebook and Instagram are great places to do this. To get your name out there, you need to utilize social media.

Show and Tell Segment

There are many crops in South Georgia that we can't enjoy that the northerners can, but there are also many things we get to grow that they cannot. One of those items includes Muscadines. Muscadines come off in August, which is a perfect time with it being a break between our summer and fall gardens. Muscadines are a staple homestead item and an ideal garden snack, and you can find them all over South Georiga.

As mentioned above, it is a quiet time around the garden as we are finished with our spring garden and waiting until it is time to plant for the Fall. Right now, our cover crops are getting pretty tall, and it's about time to work them back into the garden. This year we tried many combinations of warm-season cover crops, known as cover crop cocktails. When mixing cover crops, you need to look at the growth rate and how tall each one gets and plant those similar together. Not doing this will have one plant overpowering the other, leaving one with no sun to keep growing, therefore, missing the benefits that crop could bring to the garden.

If you aren't following Hoss Tools on Instagram or Facebook, make sure you check it out. We are currently doing a question of the day series only on those platforms to help answer some of the most frequently asked gardener questions. Also, don't forget to submit your recipes for the Row By Row Cookbook.

View Details

List of Crops to Replant in the Fall

Many of us home gardeners enjoy our spring garden but become unsure as the summer months heat up, and it is time to replant for the fall garden. So what are the best crops I can carry over to my fall garden? The men of Hoss Tools came up with a list of vegetables that your Fall garden is going to love!!

Christmas Lima Pole BeanRattlesnake Pole BeanHalo Canary MelonAmbrosia Sweet CornTexas Creme 40 PeaGold Star SquashOlympian CucumberPascola Zucchini

There are a few other crops we believe can thrive in a Fall garden, such as Okra, Peppers, and Eggplant. With the right irrigation and spraying program, these crops can beat the Fall heat!

Things to Remember if you are Going to Replant in the Fall

As mentioned, you have to stay on top of your Fall garden to make sure you can get a plentiful harvest. That begins with picking an excellent disease-resistant variety like the ones listed above. You also need to pay attention to the maturity dates and know if the crop is a one time harvest, like corn, or multiple harvests such as our cucumbers. You would not want to plant your cucumbers with only enough time before the first frost for one harvest because it would not be worth your time and resources. If you have that short window before frost, you need to plant something that would only have one harvest.

For different crops, different varieties may mature faster than others. For example, the Pepo species of summer squash is much quicker to develop than the Machado varieties.

There are some vegetable plants you can let go dormant to come alive again in the Fall. They might start to look a little raggedy, but they will come alive again and give you harvest if you continue to spray and take care of them. Some of those crops include our lima and pole beans, peppers, and eggplants.

However, a crop like Okra is better to succession plant throughout the spring and Fall to get the best harvest. Doing the succession planting with our Silver Queen Okra like that will give you Okra till the first frost date.

Show and Tell Segment

Growing new things you have never tried before is one of the highlights of gardening. Travis has never tasted, let alone grown a Canary Melon until now, and it was a hit! Our Halo Canary Melon is a winter melon meaning that it can store a lot longer than most of your Muskmelons. Of course, with growing anything new, the guys had to do a taste test. The results came back good, with the texture of a watermelon and the refreshing taste of cucumber, I believe we will see more of this Canary Melon.

Speaking of Cucumbers, they are still kicking! As long as you have a disease-resistant variety like our Olympus, you can grow Cucumbers well into August. To avoid the bitter taste that comes with the heat stress, make sure they are on drip tape or getting adequate water!

Our Sweet Potatoes are coming along and different from the Cucumbers; it is time to back off on our Sweet Potato plants' watering. Once they get on up, this drought-resistant crop does better with a lack of water.

Another crop that loves the hot, dry weather of South Georgia in August is Sunflowers. Our Sunflowers are not only a pretty sight to see in the garden, but they are doing their job as a cover crop as they help cleanse the soil.

Viewer Question Segment

Our viewers are always challenging us to dig deeper and help answer some of their tough gardening questions. This week our first question asked us, did we think there will be a food shortage, and should we be saving all of our heirloom seeds? From the looks of the thousands of acres of commercial produce farms near us and the way they are still steadily out there every day, we don't see a food shortage in our near future. Saving heirloom seeds can be a neat thing to do if your variety is hard to get your hands on, but if it is one you can find easily, it might not be worth your time to save those seeds.

View Details

What Crops can I Plant in the Cool-Season?

The Fall garden seems to become more popular as each year passes, but the question that lingers with most gardeners is what cool-season vegetables can I plant? At Hoss Tools, we enjoy planting a Fall garden more than our Spring garden, as we think there is more variability with what you can plant in the Fall.

Some of our favorite cool-season crops consist of Broccoli, Cabbage, Collards, Lettuce, and Cauliflower. Kale is a great Fall plant many gardeners don't think of but is one of our favorites to cook in a soup. The best variety to make into a soup is the Lacinato Kale. Kohlrabi is also a favorite crop of ours that intimidates the beginner gardener but is very easy to grow.

The Purple Elite is our new variety of carrots that we are excited to begin planting soon! Carrots also tend themselves well to the Fall. Another delicious snack for the Fall garden is Brussel Sprouts, picking them straight out of the garden and putting them in some olive oil is a Hoss favorite. We can't forget about Onions because down here in South Georgia, Onions are a must as a cool-season crop.

The following list is a few more crops that will work well with adding variability to the Fall garden.

BeetsGreensLeeksEnglish PeasRadishesRutabagasSpinachTurnipsSwiss Chard

Preparing for a Cool-Season Garden

Now that we have what we want to plant, when are we suppose to start planting the vegetables? Planting is very dependent on where you live and the frost date. Once you figure out which zone you are in, that will help tremendously.

With our Fall garden, everything except Radish, Carrots, Greens, and Spinach starts as transplants. So the difficulty comes when knowing when to plant them, here is what we have found to be the most accurate dates. If you are in part A of your zone, you will be towards the beginning of those days, and if you are in part B, you will be towards the later dates.

First Frost Date:

Zone 4: Early-Mid OctoberZone 5: Mid-Late OctoberZone 6: Early-Mid NovemberZone 7: Mid-Late NovemberZone 8: Early-Late DecemberZone 9: Mid-Late DecemberZone 10: No Freeze

When to Start Transplants:

Zone 5: Mid JulyZone 6: Late JulyZone 7: Mid AugustZone 8: Late AugustZone 9: Mid SeptemberZone 10: Late September

In-Ground Transplanting:

Zone 5: Mid AugustZone 6: Late AugustZone 7: Mid SeptemberZone 8: Late SeptemberZone 9: Mid OctoberZone 10: Late October

Show and Tell Segment

The guys are back again with some tasty snacks from the garden. Today they are trying the many types of figs Travis and Greg have in their yards. They both agreed that the best one in flavor was Black Malta. The LSU purple and gold don't fall far behind.

Travis brought in his South Anna Butternut it was HUGE! Greg then showed his winter squash, a Cherokee Tan pumpkin. The Cherokee Tan is a great pumpkin pie, and we will be carrying the seeds next year!

Another thing we're excited to carry next year is seedless watermelons! But, while we wait for our new seeds, we have to enjoy what we are gardening now. Our Fall garden is getting ready as we prepare for our onions. Greg and Travis both enjoy Fall gardening and hope every gardener takes advantage of this season to grow their own food.

Viewer Question Segment

On the topic of knowing when to plant certain crops, a viewer asked the question of is it too late to plant corn? Travis and Greg reassured him that it is not, early august on into September is ideal for planting time for corn in his zone. Corn only takes anywhere from 70-100 days to mature, so the time is still there. You may want to feed it with more fertilizer as the disease pressure may be more persistent with this hot weather.

Now the next question raises a little more thought, were some heirlooms once hybrids themselves? Yes, that is true. A seed can be stabilized after many years, so if a hybrid was created from two heirlooms,

View Details

Crops We Don't Struggle Growing

Like any long-time gardeners, we have our crops we consider ourselves experts at and those we struggle growing. There are many factors in determining what you are good at growing—things like your location, soil conditions, and the variety of seed. But sometimes, even in the perfect setting, you just can't seem to get a grasp on how to make a good crop.

The following crops are some of the few things we at Hoss Tools consider ourselves pretty dang good at growing! For Travis, on that list is Carrots, Lettuce, Beets, Rutabagas, and Collards. For Greg, that consists of Tomatoes, Watermelons, Winter Squash, Corn, and Onions. In South Georgia, we are thankful to have weather conditions that allow us to grow this wide array of crops.

Tips to Help you Not Struggle Growing these Crops!

Over the years, we have learned a few tips and tricks as we became experts in those vegetables. Carrots, we have learned that growing them in a double row on drip tape seems to work best. Rutabagas also do great on drip tape because you can inject fertilizer directly to them. For lettuce, there are a few things you can do to make sure you have a crop on into April, such as using drip tape, stacking them in tight, and succession planting.

Beets do best if you transplant them because that will give you a more consistent size. The last tip Travis had was with collards as they are easy to grow with the right variety you can grow for nine months out of the year. One type we recommend is the Top Bunch.

Greg's tips were also simple ones, including feeding your tomatoes and corn hard with fertilizer in the beginning. With corn, you also want adequate watering, and knowing your timing, when you see that leaf has just a little bit of burn, you are doing it right! Watermelons and winter squash, make sure you plant them where they have never grown before, so they have the correct soil they need. Both of those crops are prone to get many soil-borne diseases. Lastly, with onions, you want to understand their lifecycle, so you know when to stop fertilizing them as they start to bulb.

Crops We Do Struggle Growing

Now that we have talked about what we are good at growing let's talk about the things we struggle growing. Opposite of Travis, Greg struggles growing carrots as his soil has a high weed seed bank, which leads to many problems. Another difficult one is Fordhook Lima Beans, these set of beans are super yummy but just something Greg can't figure out.

English Peas are definitely worth the while when it comes to flavor, but you have to understand the timing, or like Greg, you won't be too good at growing it. Now, peppers struggle in Greg's garden because the insect pressure is high, and he admitted that he doesn't pay enough attention to fertilizing them because he and Mrs.Hoss don't eat that many.

Brussel Sprouts have an extended date to maturity, and because of this, both Travis and Greg lose interest and end up not doing too well with this crop. You also need cold weather to trigger sprout growth, and that is something we don't get much of in South Georgia.

Some other things Travis struggles growing because it's not cold enough is Shallots. English Peas need in-between weather also to do well and again we don't get much of anything but hot here!! When it comes to field peas, we do a good job growing them as a cover crop, but when we raise them to eat, they get eaten up, and we can't seem to put enough fertilizer on them.

The last thing Travis admitted struggling with was herbs. Herbs are something he wants to get into but just don't know enough about them yet. Growing herbs is one of his goals for this next year!

Show and Tell Segment

If you weren't already hungry, hearing about all the delicious things Hoss Tools has coming out of the garden will surely make your mouth water! For example some homemade pasta sauce, with the use of our vegetable garden tomatoes, onions, peppers,

View Details

Tomato Taste Test

This year we decided to grow over eight different tomato varieties, and they are finally slowing down on production. Hoss Tools is always looking for ways to improve and making sure we are offering the best seeds to our customers. After this extensive trial, we learned many different things about our tomatoes with one of those being none of our varieties are losers. We compared everything from heirlooms, Open-pollinated, and paste tomatoes.

With a blindfold around his eyes, Mr.Hoss himself taste-tested every tomato. Based just on taste, he gave our Black Krim tomato the best score. The Black Krim is an heirloom tomato, and though it is not a dependable plant because of its lack of resistant characteristics, it is still one of the best-tasting tomatoes.

Red Snapper, Summer Pick, and Homestead follow closely behind Black Krim when it comes to taste. Where they lack bold flavors, they make up for it with their beneficial characteristics. The Red Snapper is an all-time favorite for Travis, but one Greg has never grown before. The Red Snapper makes a meaty tomato with a significant disease-resistant package and is one vigorous plant.

The Summer Pick Tomato is another seed that makes one big tomato. This variety is known for its high productivity as it made the second-largest harvest out of all the tomatoes. Our Homestead Tomato is our most vigorous plant and can withstand many things and taste pretty dang good.

Ranking Our Tomato Varieties

Though in Greg's eyes, those were the four best tasting tomatoes, we still have many varieties that give you excellent flavor and useful characteristics. One of those being the Chef's Choice Orange Tomato, this is an orange tomato that is rather large and is perfect for those BLT's.

Bella Rosa is a remarkable all-around plant. On a scale based just on taste, Greg gave it a 3.9 out of 5, but where it doesn't compare to the others is its productivity. The Bella Rosa is our most productive tomato, with its plant staying at a manageable height. For our gardeners that enjoy growing tomatoes in a container, this one is for you!!

The Brickyard tomato is one of our new varieties, but one we will grow again. This plant produced a large size tomato following behind the Red Snapper.

Show and Tell Segment

This South Georgia heat may be getting too hot to garden, but our crops are still producing. This week there is plenty to snack on between our okra, tomatoes, and figs. One of the things we trialed in the garden this year was the Jambalaya Okra right next to the Heavy Hitter.

The Jambalaya is one of our tried and true varieties, but we are always wanting to compare it to other types making sure we can offer the best seeds to our customers. The Jambalaya is one of our most expensive seeds, but it proved itself once again. This Heavy Hitter is an open-pollinated variety many of our customers enjoy growing. Still, compared to the Jambalaya, it just didn't hold a light when it came to productivity, the size of the pod, or how fast it germinated.

Also, don't forget Hoss Tools is looking for customer testimonial videos to use, and we would love to hear from you about how you enjoy our products or videos! Another thing you can do to help us out is to submit recipes to see if they make the cut for the Hoss Tools recipe book, which is in the making. You can send those recipes to our e-mail or mail them in!

Question and Answer Segment

As always, we are here to answer your questions, and today we were asked some good ones. The first question one of our viewers asked was about something we just started doing this year. Succession planting sweet corn, he asked if it was too late to do one more crop? Though we are waiting until late August for another crop, the guys at Hoss Tools believe you can plant sweet corn throughout the summer as long as you have adequate irrigation and fertilizer.

Back to tomatoes, we had someone ask about leaf curl and what cou...

View Details

The Benefits of Cover Crops

Being in Zone 8, we must plant warm-season cover crops to ensure that we will have a successful vegetable garden. Zone 8 contains South West Georgia, which is where Hoss Tools is located. With our warmer temperatures throughout the year, we can push our soils to the limits. Pushing our land creates a greater need for adding that nutrients and pH back to the ground, and warm-season cover crops are perfect for that job.

As many gardeners know, it is essential to rotate your crops in one plot. For example, if one season you plant peppers, you don't want to follow it up the next season with peppers because they will not do as well. The soil will be missing the specific nutrients those peppers need. With planting cover crops, they will add those nutrients back into the ground in between plantings. Cover crops make crop rotation less critical.

A rule of thumb we at Hoss Tools like to go by is making sure we put as least amount of input into our cover crops. Cover crops are meant to be an easy crop planted between you Summer and Fall vegetable gardens that will give you a higher output with less input. You don't want to add a lot to something that is supposed to be benefiting you. Such as, we don't fertilize our cover crops or put them on drip irrigation. We save those things for our cash crops!!

Our Favorite Warm-Season Cover Crops

There are four warm-season cover crops we believe will take your soil to the next level. Each cover-crop focuses on adding something different to your land and can be combined to make sure they meet your garden's specific needs.

Sorghum Sudangrass- This cover crop is a monocot that is easy to mow and improves soil drainage. It also provides nematode suppression and adds excellent green manure.Brown Top Millet- This is our other monocot cover crop that matures in 60-70 days. This Brown Top Millet is excellent for sandy soils and is heat and drought tolerant.Sunn Hemp- A perfect nitrogen-fixer!! This specific cover crop is great for following heavy-feeding crops like corn, and it also suppresses nematodes.Buckwheat- Buckwheat is the fastest maturing out of the following as it grows in 30-50 days. Bees love this crop, and it helps break pests and disease cycles!Iron Clay Peas- These peas are easy to incorporate, and they attract beneficial insects to the garden. Maturing in 80-90 days, it also is a nitrogen-fixer and suppresses weeds.

Show and Tell Segment

It has been a season of excitement around Hoss Tools, and on this week's Row by Row show, we announced another reason to continue watching, we are creating a cookbook!! This recipe book will contain our customer's recipes and a mix of our own. Each submission will center around something that we can grow in the vegetable garden! It wouldn't be a Hoss Tools announcement though if we weren't snacking on something yummy! This week it was the Sangria Watermelon, Greg picked these earlier this week, and this variety might be one of his new favorites.

One recipe we want to add to the Hoss Cook Book will be our famous BLT! This week our Chef's Choice Orange Tomato is at the perfect ripeness, and we cut some big juicy slices to make the BEST BLT! This tomato variety offers many other colors, and we look forward to adding them to the site soon since these were such a winner!

Question and Answer Segment

As always, we want to answer some of our viewer's questions. We understand that gardening can be intimidating, and even if you've been doing it for years, there will be things where you need help. This week one of our questions asked about curing winter squash. Greg explained that not all winter squash has to be cured and stored. The ones that do, though, you want to place out of the sun in a cool, dry area, just as you would potatoes and onions.

We then had two viewers ask for some seed recommendations. Joy Rocks wanted to know if we had a speckled butter bean,

View Details

Answering All Things Tomatoes Whether you are a first-time gardener or have been doing this for years, you're always going to have questions. Tomatoes are a popular vegetable in the garden, and this week Travis and Greg wanted to take some time to answer some of those viewer questions about tomatoes and other popular crops to help you better grow your own food.

Our first question was simple, How does it taste? One of our viewers wondered what the flavor was like on our Red Snapper Tomato. Travis and Greg both agreed it was delicious even before it is all the way ripe. Another benefit of the Red Snapper is its size, growing as big as the palm of your hand.

Tomatoes are great for our backyard gardeners who are working with a small area. Compared to corn that needs many plants to achieve the cross-pollination, tomatoes and peppers do great for our small-scale customers. Doing just a few plants of these will still give you a plentiful harvest.

Taking care of tomatoes can be very simple if they are trellised, there are many different options with trellising and one we like is this netting called the Hortonova Trellis. This trellis is excellent for smaller crops such as tomatoes and cucumbers but probably won't do the best holding up things such as a Butternut Squash; you might want to leave those to the cow panels. When growing cherry tomatoes, one common question is should you prune or leave them alone, and our tip is to leave them alone! Cherry Tomatoes down here in the South face a lot of heat and disease pressure anyway towards the end, so we just let them run their course! Other Vegetable Garden Tips There is a lot that goes into growing a successful vegetable garden besides throwing some seeds in the ground. Cover crops are one of those things that help take your garden to the next level. Cover crops are things you plant in between Summer and Fall gardens to treat your soil. Every soil has different needs, but one cover crop you can't go wrong with is Buck Wheat. Backyard gardeners, you are doing your soil a disadvantage if you aren't planting this in your offseason.

For our gardeners that plant in raised beds, you may think cover cropping isn't for you, but it is still possible! Plant your cover crop as usual, and when it is time to get it up, go in there with a weed eater and take it down. You can then tarp it or go in with a digging fork to mix it in with your soil. This little trick will help your garden even in raised beds.

Another way to take your garden to the next level is fertilizing; for example, one of our viewers wanted to know how they should feed their corn. For Sweet Corn, going in with Micro Boost and 20-20-20 will help, then right before it tassels give it a little Fish and Guano, and you should have one of your best corn harvests yet!

Now, how do you apply that fertilizer? There are two main methods, soil drench, and a foliar feed. Foliar feeding is applying the fertilizer to the leaf and plant directly, which is great for short-term and cosmetic problems. Soil drenching is where you apply the fertilizer to the soil around the plant; this method is great for the long term health of the crop and is our favorite method. Show and Tell Segment At Hoss Tools, we believe in getting the most out of our gardens by succession planting. That means seeing which plants we can push to the limits as we get into these hot summer months. During our show and tell segment this week, we discussed some of the things we have been succession planting, such as Slick Pik Yellow Squash! This variety is a hybrid that produces early, often, and with high yields—making this squash great for your trying Summer months.

The Algonquin Squash is a very rare winter squash. The guys at Hoss Tools have been growing. Because there isn't much information out there on it, they were very excited to finally be able to harvest it and give it a taste test. Mr.Greg let everyone know that it passed the test with flying colors,

View Details

Travis's Vegetable Garden Winners Since Hoss Tools has been in the seed selling business, and even way before, we have seen many seeds that we consider vegetable garden winners and many seeds we do not. Over the years, we have had opportunities to try all kinds of vegetable garden seeds, and as this year's summer garden is coming to an end, we sit down and talk about what has blown us away this year. We based these top 6 on how well they produced and how we benefited by having them in our garden, whether that was by looks or by just tasting good!!

Gold Star Squash
Avalon Triple Sweet Corn
Red Snapper Tomato
Marigold Sparky Mix Flowers
South Anna Butternut Squash
Max Pack Cucumber Greg's Vegetable Garden Winners For Greg's chosen winners, he decided by basing it on, would he grow it again? For all of the following, the answer is YES! Two of his top 6 are seeds that Hoss Tools doesn't offer yet as we like to trial everything ourselves before selling them to our customers. The Algonquin Squash and The Gold-lite Sunflower passed the test.

1.Calendula Prince Mix

Guinea Onion
Black Krim Tomato
Algonquin Squash
Marketmore Cucumber
Gold-lite Sun Flower Show and Tell Segment It is a great time to live in South Georgia as our weather has been perfect to finish out our Summer season. These cool afternoons and mornings make for some enjoyable harvest time. One thing many of us have been busy harvesting is corn, Greg brought in some of his Hickory King White Corn which is field corn he enjoys eating. Though many don't think of field corn as a snack, it can be quite tasty, another benefit of field corn is that it isn't as prone to get worms.

After checking out Greg's snack Travis brought out his Max Pack Pickles. This recipe was different from his last batch of fermented cucumbers because he used spheres and flavored it with hard spice and garlic cloves. He also only left them in the crock for six days, these few changes led to the pickles being a lot crunchier! Viewer Questions On this week's show, we had some excellent questions from our viewers. Our first question centered around what would be the best crops to grow in raised beds? This viewer explicitly needed for a fall garden, and a few of our suggestions include Beets, Broccoli, Cabbage, Collards, Kale, Onions, Radishes, and especially Elephant Garlic. These Fall crops will do great in raised beds because of the lack of space they take up, compared to vining plants such as Pumpkins.

One plant that has a lot of vines are Sweet Potatoes, and our viewer Jeremy wondered, was he suppose to let the vines run wild or try and contain them in a row? Speaking from experience, our guys let Jeremey know that he does not need to hassle with trying to keep them in a row but instead trim on the edges, keeping them contained to their plot.

The next question asked, do you need to fertilize cover crops? Our answer was simple, NO! As Greg put it, you want to get the most gain out of a cover crop. Therefore, you don't want to worry about fertilizing it. Just give it some water and let it go!

Many of our other crops do need fertilizer, and one of our best sellers is Micro Boost, but how do you apply it to individual veggies in a small backyard garden? For a foliage spray, we suggest 2 ounces per gallon. You can mix that up and use a simple sprayer or cup. We want our growers to understand you don't need a watering system to fertilize!

With some of our summer crops having such short harvest windows, it can be tricky making sure you get everything picked the day it's supposed to and at the correct time. Our gardeners wanted to know Travis and Greg's opinion on what can be harvested mid-day? One of our rules of thumb is if you can get it in the shade soon, then it doesn't matter what time of day. Travis even suggests for things like beets and carrots you wash off outside, to pick them mid-day and then let them dry a little in the sun.

View Details

Simple Tips to Grow a Sweet Potato Plant Many people will say that a sweet potato is the easiest plant to grow but won't include the steps to make it the successful maintenance-free crop it's meant to be. Here at Hoss Tools, we want to help you grow your own food, so this is what we do to make sure we have a successful sweet potato harvest. With any crop, it starts from the beginning. At Hoss Tools, we order sweet potato slips, which are different from a draw. A draw grows from the vine where a slip gets picked from the sprout of a sweet potato plant.

We have to make sure our soil is ready to have plants in it by digging our rows, and we suggest planting sweet potato rows three feet apart and 12 inches between each seed. You want to plant these slips in soil that has been tilled well and has good drainage. The pH is always essential, and we have seen that they do best in soils with a pH level of 5.8-6.

For fertilizing your sweet potatoes pre-plant or post, it is vital that you keep it low in nitrogen and high in phosphorous and potassium. Keeping the nitrogen down will help you grow fewer vines and instead focus on the roots. Travis likes to put complete organic hen manure on his sweet potatoes about a week before he plants and then thirty days after when he is hilling the potatoes. Our Favorite Sweet Potato Varieties We have grown many varieties of sweet potatoes, including the Centennial, the Covington, the Bearugaurd, and the Georgia Jet. We have seen many benefits in all of them, including the Georgia Jet, being the tastiest sweet potato with a short growing season, the Bearugaurd having excellent nematode resistance, and the Covington being the prettiest plant.

Picking a variety that works for you depends solely on what you are looking for and how your growing season is. For someone up north looking for a quick potato that Georgia Jet might be best, whereas someone just looking for a pretty plant would choose the Covington. Show and Tell Segment Sweet corn is ready to harvest, so Travis brought in some for Greg to try, and if you don't like watching them eat on the show, you might want to skip the first half. With just some butter and salt, this sweet corn was delicious!! Greg didn't want to praise it too much until Travis gets some of his though, but Greg's is about ten days behind Travis's. We all love some friendly garden competition.

If you watched any of our social media videos this past week, you might have heard Travis talk about his Tomato disaster that occurred from all the rain. Travis's tomatoes fell slap over on to the next row when his T-posts started to move around in the wet soil. It's not a bad problem to have such a big harvest that your posts can't hold up. Thankfully Travis was able to save the row with not many tomatoes lost.

Hoss Tools has some exciting things coming in the next few weeks, including a product that is frequently asked for, T-shirts!! Be on the lookout for a Row by Row Garden Show T-shirt on the website soon and maybe even some more designs. As the guys wrapped up their first segment, they ask our viewers for some help! Hoss Tools wants to use real customer testimonials to compile a video to use as promotion, help them out by checking out the link in the latest Row By Row show! Viewer Questions Tim Jones started us off with a mind-boggling question of how do seeds know up from down?? Travis had to think back to his botany class days but then taught us that it has to do a lot with gravity and sunlight. When the seed is in the ground, it tells by the gravitational pull, and once they get blooms on them, they will grow towards the sun. After that we had a viewer ask us why we aren't growing Dahlias, Greg then informed us that he has a current trial going on with Dahlias trying to learn more about them as they are hard to grow down here in the southern heat. Along with that question, we had another viewer ask about flowers. Randy asked the guys how long does it typically take ...

View Details

Attracting Pollinators with our Flowers in the Garden As we are all starting to wind down the spring garden and begin preparing for the fall, most of us don't consider planting flowers in the vegetable garden. Besides their outward appearance, flowers can bring many benefits to the garden. With the weather right now, Greg suggested that though you can still plant Okra and Sweet Potatoes and get a good harvest, that's about it. The time has come to begin planting our cover crops and preparing our soil for the future.

One of the apparent benefits of Flowers is there ability to attract pollinators. If you already have a hive planting fresh flowers for them will feed them well. If you don't have a colony, this flower garden will draw in the natural ones. Flowers also bring in beneficial insects such as butterflies. These beneficial insects will then help keep down your pest pressure and keep away the harmful insects. Remember, not all bugs are bad.

Flowers of any kind can lift anybody's spirits when needed. If you are having a bad day or you and your woman are fighting, all you have to do is take a walk around the garden or cut you a lovely bouquet, and that will put a smile on anyone's face. Favorite Varieties of Flowers for the Vegetable Garden Growing flowers in the vegetable garden are something we never leave out. One of our tried and true flower varieties is our ProCut Sunflowers. These are perfect for the bouquets and anything you want to take inside because they are pollen-less. Pollen-less means that even when you shake them around, no yellow specks will fall, making them great for indoors. Also though they are pollen-less, that doesn't stop the bees from swarming all around. If you want a sunflower that isn't as expensive and doesn't have to be planted as meticulous, some of the varieties we suggest are Chocolate Cherry, Autumn Beauty, Teddy Bear, and Santa Fe Sunset. These few sunflowers are gorgeous and can be mixed to grow a plot full! Sunflowers are perfect for a warm-season cover crop.

Our next favorite flower is the Benary Giant. The seed is a Zinnia and is one of the biggest blooms in any variety. Not only is it big and beautiful, but it makes for a perfect cut flower because of its plant structure. At Hoss Tools, we sell many of the Benary Giant Zinnias separately, but we also sell them in mixes. Putting the Benary Giant Zinnia Mix in your garden will bring it life like never before. When you are done and picked all the flowers, you would like you can cut them down and mow it into the plots giving it proper nutrients. Show and Tell Segment On the Row by Row Garden Show, we love starting with something to eat. This week Travis brought in several mason jars full of his freshly fermented pickles. Fermenting vegetables is very popular, but something the guys at Hoss Tools haven't tried a lot. With the use of a big crock and many cucumbers, Travis topped them with some seasoning and let them sit. Both the guys loved the way they tasted and decided they will be doing this a lot more. They explained how this is simpler than canning because you don't have to steam or boil anything but instead let it sit and then pour into jars. If you are overflowing with vegetables in your garden and want to try something new, you can start fermenting with our simple Complete Fermentation Kit.

After the guys stuffed their bellies with pickles, they started talking about the tallest thing in the garden right now, Sweet Corn. Our Sweet Corn varieties, Avalon and Hickory King are almost ready! Our pollen is dripping all over the newly formed silks meaning we will have corn real soon. Besides Sweet Corn, Hoss Tools also offers Field Corn seeds, and we got some new ones on the way. Lancaster Sure Crop Corn is one of our new varieties that is an heirloom with huge ears. The other new Field Corn variety is Reids Yellow Dent Corn, which is also an heirloom, but this one is drought-tolerant. Viewer Questions

View Details

Preparing for your Pest Control Program As it is starting to warm up, preparing for pest control is a hot topic. Knowing what pest control program you should use is all about knowing was insect and disease pressures you face. Even Greg and Travis, who live in the same county, face different pest pressures and problems.

It is essential when getting rid of pests to be proactive and start spraying before they show up. Some of the main pests the guys see here are Squash Bugs, Pickle Worms, Leaf-footed bugs, and Corn Earworm. Both Greg and Travis like to spray once a week, and if it starts to get worse, go in twice a week.

They each pick a specific day and stuck to that schedule like Travis sprays every Sunday night. It would be best if you sprayed late afternoon or early morning, so your bees are not affected by the spraying. They both agree that their bees are active in the morning, so they choose to spray right as its getting dark, and the bees are going to sleep.

Insects and their eggs like to stay under the leaf, so it is crucial that when you spray, you get under the foliage and over the top for good coverage. With our organic sprays, you must get excellent coverage. A question a lot of gardeners ask is, when do I know I have sprayed enough per plant? Greg likes to use the run-off method. If you are spraying the plant and it is starting to run-off the leaves, then you have sprayed plenty, and you need to move on, or you are wasting money. What Should your Pest Control Program Include? For every good pest control program, it is vital to have a combination of insecticide and fungicide. Many people do not realize not only can you mix the two, but it is terrific for your plants to do so. All of the chemicals here at Hoss Tools have no problem mixing, but like always, it is imperative to read the pull-off label on the back. That label will also tell you how you are required by law to mix it and by what ratio.

Both Greg and Travis have two different combinations they alternate on their gardens. For week one, Travis goes in with spinosad, Garden Insect Spray, this chemical takes care of crawling and flying insects. He mixes in with that spinosad the Liquid Copper Fungicide. He notes that when mixing, he does them each individually then adds them together.

For Travis's week two, he goes in with Monterey B t Spray to help take care of worms, moths, and caterpillars. The Bt gets mixed with the Take-Down Garden Spray, which will help take care of squash bugs and their eggs. The last chemical he adds in there is Complete Disease Control, which is a comprehensive organic fungicide.

Greg's pest control program consists of Liquid Copper Fungicide and Spinosad Garden Insect Spray for his first week, which is similar to Travis's. The Garden Insect Spray sticks to the leaf perfect, which is important if you spray before a rain shower. The Liquid Copper is great for early and late blight, which is something Greg's garden struggles having.

For week two, Greg goes in with a fungicide that is good for leaf spots and can be used to treat soil born diseases, Complete Disease Control. He mixes that with a not as well known spray named Fruit Tree Spray, don't let the name fool you though it works wonders on vegetable gardens as it is a combination of pyrethrin and neem oil. One last tip to remember if you are spraying something with oil if you are expecting to have a hot afternoon and you sprayed in the morning, you have a high likelihood your plants are going to burn. Show and Tell Segment Exciting things are happening at Hoss Tools, including giveaways, T-shirts, new video segments, and new seed varieties. The giveaway will only happen if we hit 100K on Youtube by May 30th, and if we do, Hoss Tools will be selecting three winners to win gift cards up to $500!!

The new video segments Travis spoke about are called Garden Goodies, which will be short videos on various things Greg or Travis want to show you or teach you around the gard...

View Details

Comparing our Onions The guys were comparing onions and potatoes in this week's show, as Travis brought in three different types of onions. Red, yellow, and white, and they took a bite out of each! The red onion was the Red Creole onion that Hoss Tools carries, it was direct seeded into the ground, and it came up about a week before the other ones. The guys explained that they loved this type of onion on salads to give it some color.

The next onion they compared was the Savannah Sweet onion, which is a yellow one and has more of a sugary taste compared to the other two. After looking at the onion, Greg and Travis agreed that they thought it was a semi-round. The last one they tried had the most bite to it and would have been a perfect pairing with a chili dog, and that was the white onion. Comparing our Potatoes After Greg's joke on Travis's potato growing abilities last week, Travis brought a bucket full of his potatoes in. They have been all about comparing their onions and potatoes. Travis's Yukon Gold potatoes were some of the biggest ones he has ever grown! Travis explained that he didn't put any fertilizer on his potatoes this year, but it was all about the cover crop cocktail he mixed up. The cocktail consisted of Hairy Vetch, Radishes, and Austrian Winter Peas, that mix fed his soil in just the right way to give him a bountiful harvest.

Now that he has all these potatoes, they discussed how he was going to store them. If you go back to the video, you can see a shelf design Travis drew up that is perfect for storing and adding other layers too. You want to make sure that you are keeping your onions and potatoes in a cool, dark, and dry space as well as making sure they have plenty of room not to touch. If you have them too stacked on each other, that will cause them to rot. Show and Tell Segment If you are not a fan of good eating, you would not have enjoyed the first part of this week's show. Travis and Greg both brought in some great things to taste test, which even led to Travis being blindfolded and spoon-fed!! Greg made Travis try some of his pickled vegetables, including pickled squash. Greg also shouted out one of Mrs.Hoss's favorite Southern Living books and where she had gotten some of these recipes. The book was titled Little Jars Big Flavor. Pickling is a great resort to turn to when you have an abundance of harvest or want to save that taste for later.

Travis also brought in some of his Max Pack variety of cucumbers and talked about how awesome they were doing and their excellent disease resistance. The guys also announced some new varieties were hitting the website, including Dewlectable Melons, Halo Canary Melons, and Alexandria Squash. Viewer Questions Segment Here at Hoss Tools, we focus a lot on vegetables well our first viewer question was centered around our thoughts towards fruit trees. Travis and Greg listed the many fruit trees they both have at their homesteads, including a Granny Smith Apple tree, lime and lemon trees, a muscadine vine, and many fig trees. Greg then talked about his PlumCot tree, which is a cross between a plum and an apricot that was developed at the UGA research station.

The next question we had a viewer ask about tips on Kohlrabi, Greg said that this was one of his favorite things to grow. He told her that it does not like the heat and does better in the cooler times of the year, he also said that Kohlrabi goes great in coleslaw as a substitute for cabbage.

One of the last questions had to do with raised beds/container gardens and what mixture you would use in them. Travis urged not to use only compost because you need something just a little bit denser to hold the water, but instead to fill it about two-thirds of the way with topsoil, then top it off with compost. Then Greg reminded him that if you don't have access to good topsoil, you could even use peat moss. Product of the Week

Japanese Hulless Popcorn

Watch the video below about comparing onions and potatoes...

View Details

Travis's Maintenance Free Picks After a viewer asked the question, "What is the best maintenance free vegetables to grow in your garden?" Travis and Greg both came up with their list of five easiest to grow annual vegetables. As they answered this question, they realized that this is subject to change with every gardener, and that is why even in their two lists, there is deviation. When Travis was answering this question, he considered the following.

Pest Pressure Disease Pressure Weed Pressure Harvest Frequency Water Needs Fertilizer Needs

After considering all of the above, the number one maintenance-free crop Travis came up with was sweet potatoes. Their lack of need for fertilizers or water is what made him rank this one number one. Another bonus of sweet potatoes is down here in South Georgia. There are very few pests for them. Number two was collards, Travis explained how you get the most bang for your buck with this plant right here. Collards can be harvested six-seven times on one stalk, and each bundle of collards can sell for around five dollars, meaning that you could make almost forty bucks with just one plant. With our weather in South Georgia, you can also get around eight to nine months of growing time. Winter squash was Travis's number three, mainly the Cucurbita Machado species. This species is resistant to the squash vine borer, making it very easy to maintain. The fourth vegetable was okra, though it does have to require multiple harvests, it only has to be watered overhead around once a week. The last one on Travis's list was radish. This one was considered on the list because of its ease when direct seeding it and its very little water need. Greg's Maintenance Free Picks As Greg began to answer this question, he didn't think near as deeply and specific as Travis. He just responded to the question of what causes him the least amount of effort? After twenty-five years of growing this crop, Greg decided this would be his number one maintenance-free pick, Irish potatoes. Potatoes do not need a lot of water because of the time of year they get planted. His next two went hand in hand, summer squash and cucumbers, he explained that these are only maintenance free if you plant them early though. As you plant them early and keep them healthy, they are more likely to fight off diseases. He emphasized that every beginner gardener should be planting these two crops. They also both have a quick turn around with cucumbers only falling ten days behind the squash. Bush beans came in at number four because of their lack of disease and insect pressure. They also get ready to harvest pretty quickly. Now Greg's fifth choice was left up to the viewers to see what they knew about this highly confidential crop known as vine okra. Show and Tell Segment These weeks show and tell segment started with a little snack after lasts week pickled cucumber recipe Travis brought his sliced pickles for Greg to try. This simple recipe calls for flavored olive oil, salt, pepper, and a heavy dose of Cavender's Greek seasoning. Travis then talked about how he is going cucumber crazy! He showed one of his Diomede cucumbers out of his garden that some commercial guys would have considered a cull. They discussed even though the cucumber might look different; it still eats well. That conversation led to Mr.Greg explaining that he is trellising his cucumbers with a hog panel this year and how you have to kind of train your cucumbers up the board compared to the Hortonova Trellis. Two new cucumber varieties were uploaded to the site this week that will be great for our urban gardeners, Mercury and Olympian. One neat thing about Mercury is that it is a parthenocarpic, meaning it only produces female flowers. These varieties will be awesome for our gardeners with no pollinators or a lack of pollinators nearby. Viewer Questions Segment In this week's viewer question segment, our first question asked about last week's episode.

View Details

Benefits of No Till Gardening No-till gardening can have its advantages and disadvantages, and as Greg put it in this week's episode, it would work out great in a perfect world. Though Greg nor Travis use this Back to Eden style gardening, they discussed the benefits it may have. The first one they discussed was how no-till gardening builds up the earthworm population that could then lead to natural aeration and drainage. The second benefit is that it can save water, the reason behind this is because if you have some mulch covering your garden, you are going to have less evaporation. The third benefit of no-till gardening is that it helps soil retain carbon. Retaining the carbon is an undeniable benefit of no-till gardening because as you cultivate the soil, you can smell the carbon in the atmosphere. Many other bloggers say that no-till gardening also saves time and energy as well as reduces the need to weed. Travis and Greg both disagreed when they compared it to their gardens in which they do. They disagreed because of the fact you have to plant by hand if you don't cultivate your soil, and no-tilling also appears to add weed pressure. Benefits of Tilling a Garden After explaining the benefits of not cultivating your soil Travis and Greg went on to explain the reasons they choose to do so. The first reason was how they saw fewer weeds with tilling, and if they did have weeds, it was easier to get rid of them. The second reason is that it provides oxygen to the soil, cultivating that plot is going to remove that crust and aerate that soil. Another benefit of tilling is that when you are adding compost or manure, it works better if it is integrated within the soil, really getting it mixed within. With tilling, you also don't have to plant everything by hand, but instead, you can go in there with a seeder since you don't have wood chips or another type of mulch over the beds. One last benefit is that with tilling, you can turn-over your beds a lot quicker, and here in South Georgia, this is very important. Down here, we are turning beds over every 30-50 days meaning that to get the most efficient production tilling works best for us. So Which One is Better? Till or No Till Gardening Overall, deciding which method of gardening is all about knowing your climate, the scale of your garden, and the resources you will have at hand. Resources and the size of your garden will differ with every gardener, so there is no right or wrong. We all want to be good stewards of our soil, and if we are growing our food, we are doing just that. Show and Tell Segment Exciting things happened in this week's show and tell segment as we discussed a surprise Greg had show up in his garden for his 55th birthday. Greg then shared one of his favorite Mrs.Hoss recipes for the Calypso Cucumber. The procedure insisted on cutting the cucumbers up long ways, putting them in a zip lock bag, and adding some dill, elephant garlic, and salt. Then let it sit overnight, and they will be delicious come morning. Travis then explained an exciting competition that is taking place now until July 31st between Hoss Tools and some fellow gardening channels that will all be trying to grow the biggest American Giant Sunflower. There may even be some friendly father-son competition. Viewer Questions Segment This week's viewer questions answered a wide array of problems. One focus was on squash plants and if Travis and Greg thought they were better grown through transplants or direct seed. After a great fall winter squash harvest Travis had through transplants, he discussed how he might even do that with his summer squash though they germinate fine with just a seed. Another question centered around squash bugs and how to get rid of them without any chemicals, a tip was shared about using duct tape to remove them manually. One viewer than asked what do they do in regards to weeds, use the "Chop and Drop" method, or do they burn them? It all just depends on the type of weed.

View Details

Row by Row Garden Show To celebrate the 100th episode of the Row by Row Garden Show, Greg and Travis share some of their favorite most memorable moments from the show. Travis mentions that his first moment was when Greg harvested some Honey Select Sweet Corn that tasted terrible however Greg ate the entire bowl of corn. Another moment was when Greg and Travis did their tomato taste test show which is when they tried different tomato varieties and compared them to one another as well. While another memory was when the power all of a sudden went out during the garden show and the guys had to come back the next day to shoot the show. The last favorite memory was during this fall/winter when Greg and Travis had a debate on who grew the biggest and tastiest cabbage in the vegetable garden. Giveaway Questions For the 100th episode of the Row by Row Garden Show, Greg and Travis are giving away a box full of goodies to the three most loyal viewers that can answer all five questions correctly. The first question is how far apart in years and days are Greg and Travis. The second question is what year was Hoss Tools started and Travis gives a little hint that it's an even number. The third question is what is the name of the heirloom winter squash that the guys are growing a seed crop of this year. The fourth question is what is the title of the most viewed Row by Row episode on YouTube. The last and fifth question is what is the name of the book that we carry that has Greg's favorite pickled okra recipes in it.

Show and Tell Segment

On the show and tell segment, the guys celebrate the 100th episode of the Row by Row Garden Show. Greg has the prettiest crop of sweet corn he has ever grown, however, his field corn seems to be struggling right now in the garden. Travis showcases some of his Gold Star Squash which is a crookneck type and some of the Goldprize variety which is a straigtneck type of squash. He also mentions the new patty-pan varieties that are available which are Total Eclipse, Partial Eclipse, and Moonbeam Squash. Viewer Questions Segment On the question and answer segment this week, the guys answer questions about trellising certain crops, growing gourds, finding good quality compost, and when to harvest garlic from the vegetable garden. Although there are several different ways to trellis such as the Florida weave or Hortonova it can vary depending on what crops you are growing. Greg mentions that gourds are really fun to grow in the garden and we have multiple varieties to choose from such as Birdhouse Bottle Gourd, Bule Gourd, etc. Travis suggests the best way to find good quality compost in your area is by simply talking to other gardeners to see what they use in their garden. When it's time to harvest garlic, Greg says the garlic leaves will start to turn yellow or a little bit brown meaning it's time to dig them up. Product of the Week

Austrian Crescent Potato

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=koEvpnNNe2U&t=20s

View Details

Determining the Best Fertilizers for Your Garden When discussing what the best fertilizers are to use on certain crops and how much to use on plants there are so many variables that can play into this decision. Depending on what type of soils you have in your own garden can help indicate what type of fertilizer is the best for you to use on vegetable plants. For example, if you have sandy type soil and somebody else has clay-like soils the recommend fertilization program is gonna change drastically because of the different nutrient requirements in those different soil types. Best Fertilizers to Use on Certain Crops The first type of fertilizer that they discuss is the organic fertilizers that you can put down at pre-plant in the garden. The first one is our Complete Orangic Fertilizer which is pelleted hen manure that can be added at pre-plant and then four weeks after in the garden area because it is more of a slower release process. The recommended rate on this is one and a half cup per square feet, for example, could be about five-row feet depending on what you have planted. The next fertilizer that is suggested is the Liqui-Fish which can be used to feed the soil by either soil drench or injecting it through a sprinkler system. However, this fertilizer works better in warm weather than it does it cool weather. The third fertilizer discussed is the 20-20-20 Garden Fertilizer which is used on almost everything grown in the vegetable garden. If you prefer to hand water you should put about one to two cups in a five-gallon bucket and then pour it alongside your plants. Travis has a 64-ounce mixing cup that is basically a half-gallon that he will fill up 3/4 of the way with the 20-20-20 and then take a cup or two of Micro Boost on top and that's what he puts in his injector every time he runs it. The 20-20-20 is ideal for spoon feeding which means just giving the plants a little bit at a time with the injector. Another great fertilizer is the Calcium Nitrate which works well on all your nightshades such as tomatoes, peppers, and eggplants. There two grades to this nitrate which are soluble and non-soluble which means it can either be water-soluble or not. The only one we carry is the water-soluble Calcium Nitrate which works great in the injector as well. The rate on this fertilizer is a pound per hundred-row feet or if you are injecting on a big plot put out five pounds per thousand square feet. When it comes to organic calcium like Gypsum Soil Conditioner it is great for helping in clay-like soils that need a quality soil conditioner in the area. Then, we have Chilean Nitrate which is a go-to fertilizer for corn that adds a natural source of nitrogen into the vegetable garden. The rate on the Chilean Nitrate for side dressing corn is a whole 10-pound bag per thousand square feet. Next, is our go-to Allium fertilizer known as Ammonium Sulfate which is used on plants like onions, garlic, leeks, or shallots. This fertilizer has a recommended rate when side-dressed of one cup per 20 feet row and when injecting it's one cup per 40 feet. Lastly, one of our most popular fertilizers is the Micro Boost which is a blend that is specifically designed to improve the yield in your vegetable garden. Show and Tell Segment On the show and tell segment, the guys compare their SunBurst Squash varieties to see just how well they grew in the vegetable garden. Travis mentions that we have several new colors of the patty-pan type squash such as MoonBeam, Total Eclipse, Partial Eclipse, and Bennings Green Tint. Greg shows off some purple asparagus that he harvested from the garden. Since a lot of customers have been wanting some half runner beans, we finally got some Mountaineer Half Runner Beans which is an old heirloom that is supposed to be the best variety out there. The guys also discuss the difference between crowder and pink-eyed pea types. Viewer Questions Segment On the question and answer segment this week,

View Details

Small Beginner Gardener If you are a small beginner gardener that only has room for a 20x20 vegetable garden, what can you plant in that area? Although that seems like a simple question to answer there is actually a couple of different factors that play into that like weather temperatures, soil types, certain crop nutrients, etc. Small Beginner Gardener with 20x20 Area The 20x20 small beginner gardener diagram that we discuss is subject to change depending on what vegetables you like to eat or plant in the garden. However, this plan is designed to get the most out of the area you have and we suggest planting thick and incorporating some vertical gardening to achieve maximum space. In the 20x20 garden area, Travis sectioned it into 4 foot wide quadrants for row spacing. Along the first row in the diagram, we suggest pole beans because they can be grown vertically on a trellis and easy to maintain along the edge of the garden in that beginning row. If you are planting one row of pole beans we recommend planting Kentucky Blue which is extremely productive and has sweeter flavor profiles than traditional pole beans. On the second row, is where we can plant some nightshades such as tomatoes, peppers, and eggplants. Within a 20-foot row, you can get about 10 plants in the area that are 2-feet apart. Therefore, you can plant five tomato plants of the Brickyard variety, three pepper plants like a Bell Pepper or Cubanelle, and two eggplants of the highly productive Purple Shine variety. Next, along the third row a great crop to grow is Jambalaya Okra. However, if you do not like picking okra every other day the jambalaya variety may not be for you because it is best picked at around three to four inches long. If you prefer to pick okra every three to five days choose a variety like the Perkins Long Pod, Cowhorn, or Red Burgundy to plant in the garden. Then, on the fourth row, you can plant some squash and zucchini along that garden row. Although there's several good varieties if you just had to pick two to grow we would recommend Goldprize Squash and Pascola Zucchini. On the last row, we suggest planting cucumbers specifically the Stonewall variety, but that can vary depending on if you prefer pickling or slicing cucumbers. Show and Tell Segment On the show and tell segment, the guys discuss a little information about the Row by Row Garden Show and little insight into what gardening all involves if you are new to the gardening world. Travis has some mulberries that were harvested this year from his mulberry trees. After a heavy storm this past weekend, the guys talk about the importance of getting in the garden as soon as that rain is over to cultivate the area and let that soil breathe. The new South Anna Butternut Squash is a hybrid that grows excellent in the heat and is disease resistant. The guys also compare their different sized onions and how they grow onions in the vegetable garden. Viewer Questions Segment On the question and answer segment this week, the guys answer questions about controlling thick crabgrass, dependable tomato variety, removing bermudagrass, and hilling potatoes in a raised bed. Travis mentions the best way to remove crabgrass is to control it when it is small and remove the whole thing. You can also plant a cover crop like Sorghum Sudangrass or Sunn Hemp to help block or cover the soil from sunlight, therefore, you are able to break up that crabgrass seed from germinating. When discussing the three most reliable tomato varieties out of the cherry, salsa, and sandwich-type tomatoes which one is the best to plant. Greg says for the cherry type tomato he recommends the Yellow Pear which produces smaller yellow fruits that have a tangy, almost citrus flavor profile. For the salsa type tomato, the Amish Paste is the best type which is an excellent open-pollinated variety as well. While the best sandwich-type tomato is the Bella Rosa which is one of our popular tomato varieties.

View Details

Variety of Wheel Hoe Attachments Our popular Single, Double, and High Arch Wheel Hoes are known to make gardening easier and with our variety of wheel hoe attachments, it makes working in the garden more manageable than ever. All three wheel hoes come with a set of cultivator teeths which is used for breaking up the soil to do preventative weeding in the garden. You can use up to five cultivator teeth on the wheel hoe, however, we have found that using less is better because if there are too many it tends to clog up. The most popular wheel hoe attachments that we have are the plows that have a left and right plow. To use the plows in the hilling position, you must put the right plow on the left and the left plow on the right to ensure they hill vegetables correctly. The second wheel hoe attachment that makes it easier to garden is the oscillating hoe which is available in a 6, 8, and 12-inch. If you have harder garden soils to work in this attachment is one of our strongest weeding attachments to use for managing the vegetable garden. Another great wheel hoe attachment is the sweeps which have a few limitations. The sweep blades are zinc-coated and made to overlap one another so you can control the size of the desired weeding path. Depending on your soil type and the amount of weed pressure you experience you should go with the sweeps if you've got softer soils and tend to stay on top of weed pressure a little more. However, go with the oscillating hoe iff you've got heavier soils and lots of weed pressure in the garden. Another advantage of using the sweeps is you can get super close cultivation next to plants that are in the ground. The fourth wheel hoe attachment is the winged sweeps which are similar to the sweeps but have a little bit different shape. The ideal setup for the wheel hoe is to have two or three-winged sweeps to ensure they work properly. Next, is one of the most misunderstood implements that we carry which is the disk harrow. This disk harrow is made for seedbed preparation, incorporating compost in the soil, and close cultivation when moved in a different position. The last attachment that the guys mention is the spreader bar which is more of an accessory that is used to extend the wheel hoe toolbar for adding more attachments. Show and Tell Segment On the show and tell segment, the guys discussed watermelons on last week's show and forgot to explain the watermelon fertilization program. Greg mentions that watermelons are a long-term crop that takes around 80 to 90 days, therefore, you need to split up fertilization as much as you can and not apply them all at one time. The ideal amount is no more than 120 units per acre of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium. It's best if you spoon feed it and bust it up while using a well-balanced fertilizer like 20-20-20 and alternate with calcium nitrate. Watermelons also need zinc, boron, and magnesium that is available in Micro-Boost. Viewer Questions Segment On the question and answer segment this week, the guys answer questions about spraying leaves and heat-tolerant lettuces. Travis mentions when spraying anything on the garden it's important to have a nice nozzle or sprayer that will atomize what you are spraying so you don't spray too much and have it running off the leaves. When growing lettuce the Cherokee and Tehama have been proven to be the most heat-tolerant varieties that we carry on the site. Product of the Week

Pickle Packer Jar Tamper

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tEYxqhlO9ks

View Details

Watermelon Varieties Since Hoss Tools has started selling seeds, Greg has decided to try a new variety of watermelons every year. In the past, he prefers growing watermelons such as Crimson Sweet before he started trying new watermelon varieties. Last year, he grew the Moon and Stars variety and this year he has decided to plant the Sangria Watermelon. When discussing the heirloom or open-pollinated watermelon varieties the few that we have available include Charleston Gray which is a more elongated, smaller sized watermelon that contained a thick rind and a very popular variety back in the day. The Moon and Stars variety consist of oblong fruits that average around 25 lbs but can get as large as 40 lbs. Another popular variety is the Sugar Baby which is a smaller sized watermelon that averages 10 to 12 lbs. Then, the last two heirloom varieties we have available are the Tendersweet Orange and Crimson Sweet which is great tasting watermelons as well. A hybrid variety is the Baby Doll which has a bright yellow interior that has an exceptional flavor profile. While the all sweet type watermelon varieties include Dulce Fantasia, Sangria, and Jamboree. Tips for Planting Watermelons When it comes to growing watermelons you can direct seed or transplant in a seed starting tray. Another factor of growing watermelons is they require drip irrigation to ensure you supply enough water directly to plant roots and control fungal diseases. It's also very important to have pollinators to get higher production yield. For plant spacing, Greg recommends a foot or two with row spacing around five feet in the vegetable garden. All the fertilization should be done before fruits start to set in the area. Show and Tell Segment On the show and tell segment, the guys try out the first batch of sauerkraut that Travis made using his cabbages harvested from the vegetable garden. Greg discusses the ideal time to plant potatoes so you don't experience rotten potatoes in the next growing season. The guys also touch base on some products that are being restocked in the next couple of days. Viewer Questions Segment On the question and answer segment this week, the guys answer questions about sowing onion seeds, storing seeds, spinosad effect on bees, healing potatoes, mixing B.T. and Spinosad, and treatment for aphids. Travis mentions last fall he started sowing onion seeds as early as last August and early September all the way through October. In sowing onion seeds this way he found that he can succession plant onions in the vegetable garden. Greg recommends storing seeds anywhere where you can get a constant temperature or environment such as a refrigerator. When spraying spinosad you should either do it right before dark or after dark when the bees are not in the garden pollinating. When it comes to mixing B.t. and Spinosad, Travis mentions they pretty much do the same thing so either use or other in the garden. Greg suggests using either Neem Oil or Pyrthine to control aphids and keep after them regularly to maintain a decrease in the population. Product of the Week

Complete Organic Fertilizer

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1wPyMMuUyl0

View Details

Types/Tasty Sweet Corn Varieties The three major types/tasty sweet corn are known as standard, sugary extender, and supersweet. The standard is a su gene that is mostly your old-time favorite varieties including Silver Queen, Stowell's Evergreen, and Jubilee. The standard type will germinate in cooler soils better than the supersweet and once they are harvested you have to do something with them quickly because they normally last about 3 days in the fridge. While the sugary extender or sugary enhance type is where you will find the majority of the most popular varieties such as Silver King, Bodacious, Incredible, Peaches & Cream, Ambrosia, and Argent Sweet Corn. Typically the sugary enhance gene can store a little better than the standard type and needs a little warmer soil temperatures to germinate. Lastly, the supersweet type is known for storing the longest once harvested and requires even warmer soil temperatures to germinate in the garden. Also, the supersweets require a little more maintenance than the standard or sugary enhanced type. Now an uncommon type is known as triplesweet corn which actually contains all three of the major genes such as the standard, sugary enhance, and supersweet. One thing about having the triplesweet contain all three of the major genes is that you don't have to isolate when planting. Therefore, if you want to grow two different varieties of sweet corn you should plant whichever variety of the standard, sugary enhanced, or supersweet then wait two weeks and plant you a triplesweet in the vegetable garden. Planting/Growing Tips The main factor about planting sweet corn is it should be planted in blocks, not rows. Corn is pollinated by the wind so if you experience corn cobs that are half-filled at the end of the growing season it is most likely due to pollination issues. Therefore, planting in squares that are larger and blockier the better your pollination will be throughout the growing season. Another important factor about pollination is ensuring that your fertilizer is delivered right to your corn to help with the coincide of the tassel and silk development. When it comes to spacing, corn has a standard row spacing of 36 inches. Travis has tried growing corn with two-foot spacing but was not successful because there is too much foliage and your pollen can't fall to the silks. For seed spacing along the row, it can vary a little bit depending on what irrigation you have, however, the most ideal is 6 to 8 inches apart. When dealing with fungus and disease on corn we suggest using Liquid Copper Fungicide, Complete Disease Control, or Spinosad. Show and Tell Segment On the show and tell segment, Greg and Travis discuss a little bit about the pandemic that is happening right now. Travis has some Pak Choi that he has harvested from the garden. This variety of cabbage is a fast producing crop that creates steady production and excellent flavor profiles. Next, he has a variety of Gold Nugget Carrots that were grown in the garden for the first time this year and they are similar to the Bugs Bunny type carrots. The guys also compare their onion varieties that were harvested from the garden area. Viewer Questions Segment On the question and answer segment this week, the guys answer questions about when to plant tomatoes and planting watermelons. Travis mentions that he just has a feeling when it's time to plant tomatoes in the garden. He kinda knows when the frost is done and the temperatures start warming up it's time to plant. Greg says he still has to get drip tape in the ground, but it is time once the true leaves start coming up in the greenhouse. Product of the Week

Sweet Corn Varieties

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=buuPR6ds_CM

View Details

Tips for Cross-Pollinating When it comes to saving seeds the most important factor in keeping that seed pure to its genetics is ensuring you aren't cross-pollinating with other varieties in the vegetable garden. Different Types of Pollination The three main pollinating types of crops are self-pollinating, wind pollinating, and insect pollinating. The self-pollinating crops include beans, peas, okra, tomatoes, peppers, and eggplant which do not require beneficial insects to pollinate them. To ensure you do not experience cross-pollinating of the self-pollinating crops there are isolation distances to help with keeping the seeds you are wanting to save true or pure for future growing seasons. The isolation distances recommended for beans or peas is 20 feet, okra is 1500 feet, tomatoes is 10 feet, peppers is 100 feet, and eggplant is 50 feet between varieties in the area. When it comes to wind-pollinating, corn is the only crop that is wind-pollinated. When growing corn you have a male flower which is the tassel and the female flower which is the silk. Wind-pollination allows the pollen grains on the tassel to fertilize the silk and every little silk represents a kernel on the ear of corn. Another important type of pollination is our insect-pollination where we need bees to help us make fruits during the growing season. The insect-pollinated crops include cantaloupes, watermelons, cucumbers, pumpkins, summer squash, winter squash, and gourds. Show and Tell Segment On the show and tell segment, Travis has a handful of Viper Carrots that he recently harvested from the vegetable garden. Greg grew the Yellowstone variety that was rather small and more personal-sized carrots. The guys also discuss their composting technique for different plots and vegetables this growing season. According to Greg, it may be the year for planting potatoes, however, Travis is a little worried that the weather temperatures have struck hot quick for potato growing. Travis shows off a seed starting tray full of tomato transplants that are ready to be planting in the garden. The several different tomato varieties he plans on planting are Bella Rosa, Celebration, Brickyard, Red Snapper, Chef's Choice Orange, Homestead, and Black Krim. Viewer Questions Segment On the question and answer segment this week, the guys answer questions about planting sweet potato slips, using cotton gin trash compost, and squash succession planting. Travis likes to wait and plant sweet potato slips in June or sometimes even July that way he can dig them towards November. Although there as been concern about using gin trash compost, Travis and Greg are getting their compost from a gin trash company that is taking the right measurements to ensure they are creating quality grade compost that can be used in the garden area. Greg mentions when succession planting summer squash he always direct seeds and moves them over a row or two so he doesn't plant in the same exact row. Product of the Week

AAS Winners

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LX8z_-1_V7A

View Details

Planting Summer Squash When it comes to growing summer squash in the garden, there are many factors such as climate temperatures, irrigation, soil quality, and insect or disease pressures that must be controlled. Summer squash is usually the first warm-weather crop the guys recommend to plant in the vegetable garden. Guide to Growing Summer Squash Here in South Georgia, we are located in Zone 8B, therefore we plant summer squash typically as soon as temperatures become warm. Another reason behind planting summer squash early is to ensure we get around three to four rounds of squash before the squash bug pressure gets too bad in the garden. A few different varieties that we recommend growing is the patty-pan types like the Sunburst and Bennings Green Tint. When it comes to the more traditional summer squash types like the crookneck and straightneck we have varieties such as the Early Crookneck, Gentry, and Goldprize. Along with the summer squash, we have zucchini varieties such as Golden Delight, Golden Zebra, Spineless Beauty, Spineless Supreme, and Pascola. Next, the guys discuss the general rule of thumb when it comes to summer squash fertilization which is add a complete fertilizer like 20-20-20. To maintain disease control over the powdery and downy mildews we suggest Liquid Copper Fungicide or Monterey B.t. The number one factor when dealing with pests such as pickle worms, squash bugs, and vine borers is you have to control them early on to ensure they don't become a larger problem in the vegetable garden. For pest control, Travis suggests mixing the B.t. with the Neem Oil one week and then the next week the Take Down Garden Spray. Overall, when growing summer squash you must get rid of plants when production begins to decline to ensure you don't create a host for pest to live and feed off of. Show and Tell Segment On the show and tell segment, Travis has a heap of Brussel sprouts that he has harvested from the vegetable garden. The different Brussel sprout varieties that he shows off is the hybrid, Jade Cross and productive open-pollinated Red Bull. The guys also discuss what crops they plan on planting coming soon in the garden. Greg is exterminating with using perlite on top of his seed starting trays after he dibbles in potting soil. The commercial growers use this perlite method to cover the top of seeds instead of using more Pro-Mix. Viewer Questions Segment On the question and answer segment this week, the guys answer questions about when the payoff stage of onions begins, tips on growing corn on a smaller scale, planting winter squash, and the cause of having a hole in the center of potatoes. Travis mentions that you will know when the onion bulbs have begun the payoff stage because the base will start to enlarge. Greg recommends when growing a smaller scale of corn you need to make sure the corn is hilled well to help ensure strong weather conditions do not ruin the plot. When you experience having a hole in the center of potatoes, Greg mentions that it is a physiological problem that is known as a hollow heart and is most likely caused by too much or lack of irrigation. Product of the Week

Complete Organic Fertilizer

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RnlycgWWLFg

View Details

Best Potato Fertilization Schedule Unlike heavy feeder crops such as corn that requires lots of fertilizer, potatoes are a little different and need a certain range of fertilizer in the vegetable garden. When discussing the nutrients that potatoes need to have successful growth Travis talks about the maximum amount and you can scale it back to the desired amount you need for your garden area. The potato fertilization schedule starts with major three nutrients which is nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium. On the higher end of the scale, nitrogen is 5 pounds per 1,000 square feet, phosphorous is 1.5 pounds per 1,000 square feet, and potassium is 5 pounds per 1,000 square feet. For the home gardener or small market farm, it is recommended to use a complete fertilizer like 20-20-20 or 10-10-10 to ensure you get all the required nutrients. Overall, if you had a 1,000 square foot of potatoes in the garden area you would need about 25 pounds of 20-20-20 throughout their lifetime growing span. Next for the fertilization schedule, we don't need to give all the nutrients at one time in the area. Therefore, the first application should be when planting potatoes, you need to put 1/3 down which can be sprinkled along the furrow. The second application of 1/3 fertilizer can be applied at emergence or around the first hilling process. The final application of the 1/3 should be applied at your last or second hilling assuming you hill potatoes at least two times. Along with the three major nutrients, potatoes also need micronutrients such as calcium, magnesium, sulfur, zinc, and boron. We recommend using Calcium Nitrate Fertilizer to ensure you get all the calcium you need and use the Micro-Juice for the other needed micronutrients. Indeterminate vs. Determinate Potatoes When talking about determinate and indeterminate potatoes it is rather different than discussing types of tomatoes. Indeterminate potatoes are described by having a later maturity date than most other varieties. While the red potatoes like Red Norland, Red Pontiac, or Red Lasoda are all early varieties, therefore, known as determinate potatoes. Some people also believe you don't need to hill determinate potatoes in the garden. However, in order to have a successful bumper crop, you will need to hill potatoes whether they're determinate or indeterminate. Show and Tell Segment On the show and tell segment, the guys discuss not plucking the greens off rutabagas to help get a large size crop in the garden. Travis shows off a Texas Legend Onion that he grew in early November that has excellent flavor and great storage life after harvesting. Travis also talks about some new flower seed varieties such as Marigold Sparky Mix, Bachelor Button Polka Dot Mix, Cosmos Bright Light Mix, Snapdragon Tetra Mix, and Zinnia Cactus Mix. Viewer Questions Segment On the question and answer segment this week, the guys answer questions about where to get vegetable bags, mixing sand with soil for growing carrots, tips for growing squash. Travis mentions when doing his weekly produce bag operation he recommends buying produce bags from Amazon which tend to hold vegetables a little longer than other bags. Greg mentions that instead of mixing sand in the soil he suggests adding a good compost to improve the nutrient value for growing vegetables in the garden. Travis and Greg suggest that the number tip when planting squash is plant them early in the spring to ensure you avoid harsh disease and insect pressures. They also recommend applying some pest control like Spinosad, Neem Oil, or Monetery BT. Product of the Week

8 mil Drip Tape Irrigation Kit

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NlO3cqybHME

View Details

Let's Talk Drip Irrigation On this week's episode, the guys answer some of the most popular frequently asked questions about drip irrigation in the vegetable garden. Although some people are intimidated by drip systems, however, it is rather simple and really a gamechanger in the garden area. The first question they answer is whether or not you can use drip tape irrigation with a gravity-fed system. Travis mentions that you can use drip tape with a gravity-fed system, but it is unfeasible overall. The second most popular question about drip irrigation is should it be buried or laid on top of the soil. Greg says you can really do either, but drip tape was designed to be buried under the soil to prevent it from being harmed by other elements. There are two ways to bury drip irrigation using our wheel hoe either with the plow set attachment or the drip tape layer attachment. Once the drip tape is in the ground, people often wonder how to know where the emitters are located after it's buried in the area. The best way that Travis determines where the emitters are once it is buried is by turning the irrigation on and around 10 to 15 minutes depending on how dry the soil is, little water spots will develop where the emitters are located. They also mention that you can plant crops in between the emitters along the drip tape irrigation. The next question that is asked often is can you save drip tape and reuse it again in the garden. The guys mention that it can be reused depending on how conservative or frugal you want to be. Travis typically pulls tape up out of the area and then cultivates the area and lays it right back down, he never pulls it completely up and tries to store it. He normally uses the same drip tape four to five times and then replaces it with new tape. Another question the guy's answer is you can certainly leave the drip tape in the garden over winter because it decompresses when it is not in use so you will never have to worry about it freezing during the winter season. The major difference between 8 mil and 15 mil tape is the 15 mil tape is almost twice as thick as the 8 mil tape. The 8 mil tape is designed for annual vegetables, while the 15 mil tape is better for perennials in the garden. When watering individual rows, you can use the drip tape row start valves which basically allows you to turn off or on individual rows that need irrigation. Another popular question is how long do you let drip irrigation run in the vegetable garden. Which is rather a hard question to answer because it depends on factors such as the climate, weather temperatures, soil type, the crop you are growing, and so much more. Greg mentions that you will get the feel for how wet it is the soil real quick and once plants start growing larger it may take longer to water, however, it all just depends on certain factors. You can also use drip irrigation in a raised bed situation it just may need more what we call tee and elbows for the mainline. When direct seeding in the garden, Greg recommends planting crops directly on top of the drip tape while planting transplants on either side of the emitters. The last question the guy's answer about drip irrigation is how to avoid hitting it with the wheel hoe. Overall, by burying it and putting it out of the way we can avoid messing it up in the vegetable garden. Show and Tell Segment On the show and tell segment, the guys discuss the different types of carrots growing in the vegetable garden. They also discuss potato planting since it has been super wet in the garden. The guys also discuss some okra varieties that have excellent flavor profiles such as Red Burgundy, Star of David, Silver Queen, Cowhorn, Perkins Long Pod, and Clemson Spineless. Viewer Questions Segment On the question and answer segment this week, the guys answer questions about growing crops against tradition, controlling tomato spotted wilt virus, warm-weather cover crop, and growing collard greens.

View Details

Planting Different Tomato Varieties Since it's time to plant potatoes in the garden area, it's also the perfect time to start planting tomato varieties in the greenhouse. Here in Zone 8, the ideal time to start planting tomato seeds in the seed starting trays is around February 15th. Typically, the tomato seedlings will take six weeks to germinate which puts us planting tomato transplants in the soil right around the 1st of April. Heirloom, Indeterminate

Amish Paste Brandywine Pink Cherokee Purple Black Krim Jubilee Mortgage Lifter Sweetie Cherry Yellow Pear

Heirloom, Determinate

Homestead

Hybrid, Indeterminate

Black Cherry Zebra Chef's Choice Orange Sun Gold

Hybrid, Determinate

Mountain Glory Celebration SummerPick Tachi Red Snapper Brickyard Bella Rosa

Show and Tell Segment On the show and tell segment, Travis has some watermelon radishes that typically have more of a bite than a normal traditional radish. The next crop that he has to show off this week is the Chioggia Beet variety. As the most visually appealing beet, this variety offers a less earthy flavor and a more sugary content profile than other red beets. As well another large cabbage variety, known as the Rio Grande which probably weighs around 15 to 20 pounds. The guys also do a little show and tell on the new seed varieties coming soon. The four new varieties on the site include Gentry Squash, Gold Star Squash, Pascola Zucchini, and Spineless Supreme Zucchini. As well as three new watermelon varieties which are supposed to be sweeter than our popular Crimson Sweet variety. These varieties include Dulce Fantasia, Sangria, and Jamboree watermelon. Viewer Questions Segment On the question and answer segment this week, the guys answer questions about pelleted seeds, preserving corn seed, preventing mildew on cucumbers, and the best way to grow corn in the vegetable garden. Travis mentions that he thinks with pelleted seeds they may need a little bit more water than non-pelleted seeds. Also, with pelleted seeds, they don't have a shelf life that will last nearly as long as unpelleted seeds. Greg says when preserving corn seed for next season it is recommended that you keep the seeds at least 1600 feet away from other varieties to ensure they do not cross-pollinate. Once you gather the seeds you want to save you will need to place them in the freezer for at least two weeks to keep the weevils out of them. If you are trying to prevent mildew on cucumbers, Travis recommends growing powdery mildew resistant varieties. The two varieties we have available that offer this disease package resistance is the Diomede and the Max Pack. When growing corn, Greg mentions that you know when there is enough fertilizer because you can see where you've burnt the edge of the leaf a little bit. The way he likes to add the fertilizer in the garden is by putting down a balanced fertilizer and every other time hit it with a nitrogen source. Product of the Week

Tomato Varieties

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hsqwo-5HSYY

View Details

Gardening Questions On this week's episode, Greg and Travis answer several gardening questions that are asked by multiple customers. The first question the guys answer on this week's episode is whether to use two or three-foot row spacing when planting corn. Travis mentions that he has made the mistake of planting on two-foot row spacing which results in poor pollination and unhealthy crops. The second question they discuss is the difference in fertilization methods between raised beds and ground gardening. Greg indicates that it depends on the type of medium you have in the raised beds, however, they do drain better and you will experience more water leaching in a raised bed. The fertilization method that Greg recommends using as Complete Organic Fertilizer to ensure you the get needed amount of fertilizer. Next on the gardening questions list is there any sweet corn varieties that grow well without irrigation. Although all sweet corn loves water, the one variety that can grow without irrigation is the Stowells Evergreen. When discussing a shift in growing seasons using a high tunnel greenhouse, the guys recommend moving crops up a couple of weeks according to your planting zone to coordinate with the growing conditions in the high tunnel. The three crops that do wonders when starting out in a high tunnel greenhouse are summer squash, lettuce, and indeterminate tomatoes. The fifth question is rather different and interesting to think about which was what did the pioneers do for fertilizer before they could just run down to the hardware store and buy it. The guys suggest the most ideal way they think the pioneer's used fertilizer is by establishing a grazing program with their livestock and a fallow ground program to let the soil rest and build up the nutrient levels by using the livestock manure. The guys also give their best advice for growing artichokes and asparagus around the homestead. However, Greg mentions that if you love asparagus you should be growing it on the homestead. Travis shows off a couple of shallots and needs some help to determine why some are splitting off and others aren't in the garden. They list off a couple of recommendations for growing winter squash such as give them plenty of room to grow and plant early to avoid disease pressures. Another common question is how to rotate different crops in a single plot garden area. Greg has experienced this issue before in the garden if you aren't able to rotate crops you can just move 10 feet over and the vegetables should be fine. Travis mentions that the best way to grow beets is by transplanting to ensure you get them uniformly spaced. If you have trouble growing all greens instead of beets that most likely means you have too much nitrogen and not enough phosphorus and potassium. When it comes to traditional gardening beds, it is recommended that watering ornamentals should be one inch per week. The last question that has been asked is whether or not we can build an attachment for the wheel hoe that would allow you to side-dress your plants. Once the guys started using the injection system the need for a side dressing attachment is kind of on the back burner right now but may come available in the future. Show and Tell Segment On the show and tell segment, the guys talk new pepper seed varieties such as Touchdown Bell Pepper, Mama Mia Giallo, Mama Mia Rosso, Cinder Jalapeno, Lola Banana Pepper, and Santa Fe Grande. Product of the Week

Hoss Hat

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=F-6HDwtb8UA

View Details

Most Popular Seed Varieties The guys discuss the 15 most popular seed varieties that were chosen by customers as bestsellers. All of these seed varieties are excellent for growing in the vegetable garden and offer some of the best production and flavor profiles throughout the growing season. Jambalaya Okra The most popular seed variety that we have available at Hoss Tools is the Jambalaya Okra. As the most productive okra crop, this variety has heavy yields of green pods with excellent flavor profiles. We recommend transplanting in okra in early spring to get a jump start on the growing season. Red Burgundy Okra Not the most productive okra variety that we have available the Red Burgundy Okra is one of the best pickling varieties according to Greg. This okra variety produces deep red pods that will remain tender at even longer pod lengths. Tiger Collard Once we sell out of the Tiger Collards variety it will soon be replaced with the Top Bunch 2.0 collards. The Top Bunch 2.0 is the newest generation in the Top Bunch collard line. This is a hybrid variety that is great for early-maturing and will grow fast in the vegetable garden. Bella Rosa Tomato The Bella Rosa is an heirloom variety that performs best in hot and humid climates. Out of all the popular seed varieties, the Bella Rosa is the top performer for continuing to set fruits once temperatures become warmer in early summer. Brickyard Tomato As the most comprehensive disease-resistant package the Brickyard Tomatoes do best when planted in seed starting trays. Tomatoes can produce heavy fruits and will require some form of trellising system to support the plants throughout the growing season. Goldprize Squash As a highly productive squash, the Goldprize variety is a straightneck that offers excellent flavor profiles, texture, and storage potential. Throughout the growing season, squash is a crop that will require multiple harvests within the garden area. Stonewall Cucumber The Stonewall Cucumber is a hybrid slicer variety that offers improved yields, great disease-resistance, and exceptional consistency. It does best when direct seeded in the garden area and is a vining plant that will need a strong trellising system in place as it grows throughout the season. Green Magic Broccoli Out of all the popular seed varieties, the Green Magic Broccoli is one of the most popular broccoli varieties. This heat-tolerant broccoli can be grown in spring and earlier in the fall than other varieties. We recommend transplanting broccoli to ensure you get maximum production and better plants. Calypso Cucumber Another popular cucumber variety is the Calypso cucumber which is gynoecious meaning it produces all-female flowers for increased productivity and higher yields. This hybrid variety offers a strong disease package and early production within the vegetable garden. Jimmy Red Corn If you are looking for a variety of corn to grind for making grits and corn mill the Jimmy Red is the ideal variety for just that. We recommend planting corn using a walk-behind planter like our garden seeder that makes planting easy and allows you to customize your planting to meet your exact needs. Rattlesnake Pole Beans A very popular variety of beans to grow in the vegetable garden is the Rattlesnake Pole Beans. This heirloom variety has vigorous plants that grow up to 10 inches when trellised and produce around 6 to 7-inch pods that can be harvested frequently throughout the growing season. Spineless Beauty Zucchini The Spineless Beauty Zucchini is another hybrid variety that provides an exceptional production, increased storage, and disease package in the garden. The variety has spineless petioles which mean there is no itching sensation during and after harvesting zucchini. Benary Giant Zinnia Mix Along with growing vegetables in the garden, it is also great to plant cut flowers in the area. The Benary Giant Zinnia Mix contains a bountiful assortment of colorful flowers throughout the entire warm growin...

View Details

Transplanting Crops vs. Direct Seeding When comes to transplanting crops and which are best for direct seeding it can vary depending on the several different plant varieties. For transplanting crops like beets you can either transplant or direct seed in the garden. Travis mentions in order to get consistently sized beets you must thin them and he prefers to do this in the greenhouse rather than on his knees inside the vegetable garden. The three other transplanting crops that are without a doubt better transplanted are broccoli, Brussel sprouts, and cabbage plants. Another crop that can be transplanted or direct seeded is cantaloupes and it is beneficial to transplant if you like in a climate where the warm growing season isn't as long. When it comes to collards you can direct seed or transplant depending on how and what variety you are planting in the garden. Another crop that can be transplanted or direct seeded is okra because it does not like cooler soils you are able to get a head start on growing if you transplant okra. When direct seeding crops such as beans, carrots, corn, cucumbers, greens, peanuts, radishes, etc all do better direct seeded in the vegetable garden. The advantage of transplanting crops is you will get a head start on planting which is really effective for areas that experience really high disease or insect pressures. Another advantage of transplanting is you get a head start on the weed pressure, especially with slower germinating crops. Transplant Crops

Brocolli Brussel Sprouts Cabbage Cauliflower Eggplant Kohlrabi Leeks Onions Peppers Tomatoes Watermelon

Direct Seed

Beans Carrots Corn Cucumbers Greens Peanuts Field Peas Radishes Spinach Summer Squash

Direct Seed + Transplant

Beets Cantaloupes Collards Gourds English Peas Kale Lettuce Okra Pumpkins Rutabaga Winter Squash Swiss Chard Turnips

Show and Tell Segment On the show and tell segment, Travis has grown some of the Mr. Big English Pea variety for the first time in the garden. The guys address the comments about the egg in the hole feedback on last week's garden show video. Greg shows off some of his Cheers and Jersey Wakefield cabbage from the vegetable garden. Greg also has his ghost pepper seeds in the freezer so he will get a better stratification process and quicker germination when he gets ready to plant them. The guys give an update on potatoes and hope to get them in and ready to ship next week. Viewer Questions Segment On the question and answer segment this week, the guys answer questions about rotating in a small garden, advice for growing watermelons, and amending pH for every crop. Travis mentions that can be more difficult to manage crop rotation in one small garden, however, you just have to be more mindful of what crops you are planting in the area year after year. He also mentions that it is really beneficial if you are utilizing cover crops that will help with incorporating nutrients back into the soils. Greg gives three tips for growing watermelons which is to give them plenty of room, use drip irrigation, and attract natural pollinators to the area. Greg mentions the ideal way to control your pH for planting is to plant new seeds in a new spot every year and work it into your rotation. Product of the Week

Cherokee Lettuce

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SpaX3Lp7lgM

Row by Row Garden Show: Recent Episodes

Greg and Travis

10 - Acorn Squash

9 - Red Kuri

8 - Georgia Candy Roaster

7 - Kabocha

6 - Hoss Butternut Squash

5 - South Anna Butternut Squash

4 - Spaghetti Squash

3 - Algonquian

2 - Delicata

1 - Sweet Dumpling